Home

FuelsManager Oil & Gas 7.5 SP3 Administrator Guide

Contents

1. 324 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Pressure Atmosphere atm 086 Bar bar 081 Feet of Water 68 F ft H20 077 Grams per Square Centimeter g cm2 085 Inches of Mercury 0 C in Hg 078 Inches of Water O 68 F in H20 076 Kilograms per Square Centimeter kg cm2 072 Kilopascal kPa 071 Millibar mbar 082 Millimeters of Mercury 0 C mm Hg 083 Millimeters of Water O 68 F mm H20 084 Pascal Pa 070 Pounds per Square Foot Ib ft2 079 Pounds per Square Inch PSI 073 Pounds per Square Inch Absolute psia 075 Pounds per Square Inch Gage psig 074 Torr O 0 C torr 080 Temperature Degrees Centigrade E 001 Degrees Fahrenheit F 002 Degrees Kelvin Kelvin 003 Degrees Rankine R 004 Time Days days 009 Hour hr 008 Milliseconds Minute min 007 Seconds sec 006 Weeks wks 010 Month mon 011 Years yrs 012 Varec Inc 325 Point Parameters UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Velocity Centimeters per Second cm sec 164 Feet per Minute ft min 162 Feet per Second ft sec 161 Inches per Second in sec 160 Kilometers per Hour KPH 169 Knots KNOT 170 Meters per Hour m hr 168 Meters per
2. Note The Select Database System window appears upon exiting the Summary Setup win dow if databases were not selected After the database or databases are selected you are automatically placed in table creation mode Creating a table in a summary report Since a Summary report is of a spreadsheet format only one table is required 1 Do one of the following a Ifyou are not in table creation mode select Edit click Add and click Table and the Tabular Format window opens b Click where you want the table to be placed to open the Tabular Format window 2 The Tabular Format window shown below allows you set the number of rows and columns in the table as well as the dimensions of the table cells 3 Type in the number of columns that you want in the table 4 Type in the dimensions of the table cells inches in width or height or select auto sizing 5 Click OK Varec Inc 255 Administering Reports Tabular Format Enter required number of rows and columns Rows cF Columns EN 1 40 2 19 p JV Auto Sizing Cancel Table Format window ROWS Either a 2 or 3 appears for a Summary report The first row is reserved for labels the second for values and the optional third for column totals This number can only be changed in the Summary Report Setup window COLUMNS You can type the number of columns with a maximum of 19 The table appears from margin to margin if the
3. 202 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Liquid Hydrocarbon Gas Table Type Method Product Table Entry Range Temp Range API F 24E 23E Light Hydrocarbon Density 60 F in Specific 0 350 0 688 50 200 F API F 1980 Gravity LPG C LPG Liquid Petroleum Gases Density 15 C in kg m3 Not Specified 110 0 60 C LPG C 1980 Asphalt Tables Type Method Product Table Entry Range Temp Range Asphalt ASTM D4311 04 C Asphalt Density 15 C in kg m3 850 Unspecified 25 275 C ASTM D4311 04 F Asphalt Density 60 F in API 0 34 9 0 500 F ASTM IP Table 7 Asphalt Density 60 F in API 0 100 0 500 F Polynomial This technique is used for specialized products that do not fall within one of the correction tables already identified A table of density versus temperature data can be converted toa polynomial using the least square method of curve fitting Using the least square method results in a set of polynomial coefficients FuelsManager accommodates a fourth order polynomial to obtain a VCF The VCF polynomial equation is as follows VCF KO K1 Dtemp K2 DTemp2 K3 DTemp3 K4 DTemp4 Where VCF Volume correction factor Std Density StdTemp Standard Temperature DTemp Current temperature StdTemp KO K4 Coefficients of polynomial Traditional tank calculations T
4. 214 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Water not subtracted The value of FW in the net volume calculation is always zero Water Subtracted from Gross Volume The FW is zero in the net volume calculation it is subtracted from the Gross Volume see above VSW not subtracted The value of BSW in the net volume calculation is always zero VSW Subtracted from Net Volume The BSW value is subtracted from the TOV as defined above VSW Subtracted from Gross Volume The BSW is zero in the Net volume calculation it is subtracted from the Gross Volume see above In addition if a correction method with the Japan designation was selected the following Net volume calculation will be applied Kaiji Kentei Kyoukai Floating Roof Tank Net volume of Kaiji Kentei Kyoukai Japanese authorization organization uses the following equation NSV TOV FW x CTSh x VCF x 1 0 BS amp W 100 0 FRA Where NSV Net Standard Volume TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free Water CTSh Tank Shell Correction VCF Volume Correction Factor BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities FRA Floating Roof Adjustment Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 1 Floating Roof Tank Net volume of Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 1 Japanese authorization organization uses the following equation
5. Feature Standard Professional Optional Edition Edition Features An OPC client interface allows seamless integration of Y Y data to and from OPC equipped systems An OPC server interface allows seamless integration of Y data to and from OPC equipped systems Control your liquid assets SCADA functionality such as Y pump and valve control allows you to control and monitor your facility Designed for the way you operate User configurable 4 tank detail templates displays and reports can be modified for your specific business operations Extended integration possibilities Additional Y communications drivers are provided to allow direct connectivity to tank gauging devices PLCs DCS and other I O systems Create a FuelsManager network Provide data to Y multiple FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Standard Edition workstations Web access to SCADA information View the current Y status of all pumps valves and other control equipment for all connected FuelsManager systems at your site via a simple web browser Reporting services View export and schedule reports Y for email delivery that centralize inventory data from across your entire site Track product movements Integrated movement Y system designed to track bulk product transfer to and from your facility or from tank to tank within your facility Automate data output Periodic or triggered logging of user specified data to CSV HTML or X
6. Figure 5 15 Edit Tank Data window Volume tab Varec Inc 83 Configuring Database Points Edit Tank Data window Volume tab PRODUCT The Product button opens the Select A Product window allowing you to pick the tank product from a list of pre defined products or add additional products CORRECTION These controls allow you to select of the correction TYPE algorithm to be used in the calculation of corrected volume for this tank The selection of the major correction type in the upper list box restricts the minor correction types available in the lower list box In addition if your system administrator associated a correction method with the product the correction type is selection is made automatically based on the product chosen SPECIAL These parameters are only available when a Japanese ROUNDING volume correction method is selected in the correction GROUP type lists These options allow you to define specific data rounding methods to be used in the volume correction calculation for VCF Level and Temperature variables CALCULATION These parameters are only available when a Japanese OPTIONS GROUP volume correction method is selected in the correction type lists These options allow you to define specific options as to when the water volume and volume due to BSW are subtracted from product volume during the volume correction calculation In addition the Mass Weight option allows you t
7. 00 ee 57 Working with Alarm Limits 0 0 0 000 RII 59 Accessing Alarm Limits uox a eR daa 59 Creating Editing and Removing Alarm Limits llle 59 Applying a Reset Holdoff to Alarm Limits 2l 60 Building an Alarm Limit using the Build Button llli 61 Working with EVentS ico Sa os athens fee nee apo ex eet ota eG 62 Creating an Event votar ist a pn edant a ph Bae hand dat dede 62 Editing an Event e ci id a ise ate at 63 Removing an Event from a Database Point llli eee 63 Alarm amp Event Logs co eenid a e EEE E e he ha 64 Printing Alarm and Event LogS n naana aeaea 64 Viewing the Alarm and Event Log n nanana aaa eee eee eae 64 Disabling Event Logging from OPC Data Sources 200000 00 ee 64 5 Configuring Database Points LLLuuuuuuuuuusuu 65 Introduction to Databases oooccoccccco eh 65 Polnt Types vous tede data a ewe ante wee intei ns 66 Tank Polnt 4 sou Tbe eu DAA 66 Input Point colono Pace re utn ba WEN ione eate 66 onis E 66 Wriggered Polnib i std d Loci me Lx od de A eas 66 Point AttribUtes eiris uon Ceo Reus erobern Ve lae o eod ted Idee 66 Engineering Units caa raii ea ina aa Da aa O a a a 67 Scale Limits toral AAA Ad RA aped rk s 67 Data SOUrCE ss eue A n uir m CURATE ton got ei 67 Data Formatu ics eto ete eg a dde 69 Alarms and Events 5 uu o Pee Walsh eG ie a e dea dte Gea 69 Tag Category ect uu
8. For Non Insulated Tanks Ts 7xTl Ta 8 Where TI Tank Liquid Temperature Ta Ambient Temperature For insulated tanks Ta TI Liquid temperature Setting the Tank Material to Other allows you to manually enter the ExpCoef and the AreaCoef Gross Observed Volume GOV The strap volume value needs to be corrected in order to arrive at the Gross Observed volume data The exact calculation used is dependent on the how the tank point was configured The following correction methods are available Default The following formula is used to calculate Gross Volume GOV TOV FW x CTSh FRA CORRVOL Where TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any CTSh Tank Shell Correction FRA Floating Roof Adjustment CORRVOL Un measurable volume associated with tank pipe work 212 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Pre 1980 If a volume correction method with the 1980 designation is selected The following formula is used to calculate Gross Volume GOV TOV FRA CORRVOL Where TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FRA Floating Roof Adjustment CORRVOL Un measurable volume associated with tank pipe work Japanese correction methods If a volume correction method with the Japan designation
9. Ma Trente LLL ractie Tork Raport ret S Last Fili Day Fark Change Repal M 05 7 0 tw Operate Port Movements Took reb di By Product Product CRUDE Vankarm Vank 10 Lank TOTAL CHANGE Tankkarm Tank 11 Fank DIROS 1200 00AM MOX UNIN 05 00 OQPM TOTAL CHANGE TankFarm Tank 12 Tank 0232005 12 00 004M TOTAL CHANGE nins 120000AM TankF arm Tank 9 Ten TOTAL CHANGE Product DERV 094139005 1200 004M Tanks arm Tank 14 Tank 09090005 0500009 05 0101 HI 2410000 MEJO ORON pan a vn un s WPN 01 zamm mw 22min 77m nmw sm m nm OR 0240005 0500 00PM 320640 915000100 975000100 45000 00 795000 00 E m 29190000 201900 00 722100 00 111900 00 vn vun m m DENNIS 0500 O0PM 0VEA2 manm 2906000 72 300 00 HL vem v m me 609937 50 we 1200620 139042 50 um 000 0a 9090 AR Tools and objects for reports Tables Labels Amae IN 5 02 51 PM A report can contain tables data values used to represent real time data points and labels used and identify the values Additional items that can be found in a report include column and row totals and averages These components are described below FuelsManager provides the capability to display information in a Tabular format You can create tables as well as edit and delete tables Some edi
10. Remaining Mass RM NRV x Standard Density Gross Remaining Volume GNV SVC FW x CTSh FRA Current Gross Volume in Tank Where SVC Strap Volume at the Maximum Working level FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any CTSh Tank Shell Correction FRA Floating Roof Adjustment VCF volume correction Factor LPG quantity calculation from liquid density Calculation of LPG quantity from liquid density at 15 C LPG C amp LPG C 1980 Overall calculation scheme d IOO NE OY Sun 11 12 13 14 Measure level average liquid temperature average vapor temperature average pressure in vapor space Input liquid density at 15 C Calculate VCF and hence liquid density at tank conditions Correct measured level for thermal effects and buoyancy This depends upon the nature of the gauge Convert corrected level to liquid volume Correct liquid volume for tank thermal expansion and pressure effects Convert liquid volume to equivalent volume at 15 C Calculate liquid mass from liquid volume at 15 C and liquid density at 15 C Correct total tank volume for thermal and pressure effects Calculate vapor volume at measured temperature from corrected total volume and liquid corrected volume at tank conditions From liquid density vapor temperature and vapor space pressure calculate vapor density Calculate vapor mass from vapor vol
11. Comparison of Edition Features The following table shows the features and abilities of the FuelsManager Standard and Professional Editions For more information contact Varec at 1 866 MY VAREC Feature Standard Professional Optional Edition Edition Features Get moving quickly and easily Predefined tank Y Y Y templates tabular and graphical tank groups Operate to international standards Select industry Y Y standard volume correction methods including API ASTM IP JIS GOST GB T polynomial and others Know your product inventory All measured and Y Y calculated storage tank parameters are displayed in the engineering units you specify View modify and control All parameters can be Y Y controlled online through the industry standard Windows user interface Integrate all tank gauges into one system Allows Y Y seamless communications to various manufacturers tank gauges via the 8130 RTU or TankGate interfaces Improve safety and prevent tank overfills Y Y Comprehensive real time alarm and event management Standardized reporting Print or save standard reports Y Y of your daily operations including alarm events historical data and others Connect to your facility s control or information Y Y systems An OPC client server interface allows seamless integration of data to and from OPC equipped systems Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas
12. DM Ra ModuleSeals S See Sealing the Point in RTUY 8130 section for details NMS Point W amp M Official DR Reports MS Access Database See Display of W amp M indication on Graphics Reports section for details Sealing the Point in 8130 RTU TankPoint NL N N See Sealing FuelsManager Modules section for details amp M Offici N See Sealing TankPoint variables via Fuelsifanager section for details Interface See Display of WEM indication on Graphics Reports section for details a End U End User iiu The 8130 RTU is configured via a tool called ViewRTU ViewRTU can communicate with the RTU either local running on a laptop device or remotely running via FuelsManager s interface connection The ViewRTU configuration tool allows the W amp M official to apply a software seal to a particular point Once this seal is applied all parameters that affect the integrity of the point s data cannot be changed without removing the seal Parameters that effect the data integrity are specific to the point type the table below details this relationship Point Type WMSeal Parameters Sealed Parameter Description No E H FMR 131 Micropilot 238 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Point
13. 1ft oft Y Example 2 shows how the product and water volumes are calculated when the water level is higher than the top point in the water table Product Table Water Table Product Level Product Vol Water Level Water Vol 0 0 0 0 1ft 1000 gal 1ft 1000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 5 ft 5000 gal 20 ft 20 000 gal Measured product level 5ft Measured water level 3ft From the product table the product volume 5000 gal FuelsManager recognizes that the measured water level is above that of the top point in the water table so it uses the bottom of the product table to extend the range From the water table 2ft of water 2000 gal From the product table 1ft of water 1000 gal Total water volume for 3ft of water 3000 gal Subtracting the 1ft of water volume from the product volume 5000 1000 gal equals Product volume 4000 gal Example 3 Water level equals the top point in the water table Example 3 shows how the product and water volumes are calculated when the water level is equal to the top point in the water table 208 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 20ft i Product Table 5ft Product 1ft Oft Product 1 2ft Water Water Table 1ft oft Y This example shows how the product and water volumes are calculated when the water level is equal to the top point in the water table Product Table
14. 44 Administrator Manual 4 Configuring Alarms and Events When a critical change occurs at your facility such as a high product level or a communications failure operators must be notified immediately so they can take necessary actions FuelsManager Oil Gas continuously checks the database and produces audible and visual alarms in Operate when changes occur that you have identified as being critical This chapter provides the information that you need to configure alarms for input and output points Tank point alarms are predefined Predefined Tank Point Alarms on page 47 but for other devices you must set up and apply alarms st J pe Ns e T ux d La y H e AS A AS uM wa ict ved v bos I NH x z m z Bu I M d Graphic Data Field Flashes with Alarrm Priority Color Alarm Lens Alarm Details Level Bar Colored Red Alarm Description Flashes Displayed if Level Exceeds 100 Flashes not an alarm Figure 4 1 Alarm Indications in Operate You can also define events which describe changes that do not require immediate action All alarms and events are recorded in a log that operators can view see section for more information Events are described on page 62 Varec Inc 45 Configuring Alarms and Events Types of Alarms Global Alarms and Local Aarms A global alarm is an alarm that can be assigned to multiple database points that share the same data format See page 50 for more informat
15. Fi FuelsManager Draw x x Menu Drawing space Toba Sae The Drawing space The drawing space is the area where drawn objects are created and displayed When you start Draw the drawing space is empty You have the option to use a grid to position objects or to draw with precision 148 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas The Draw toolbar A toolbar is displayed at the bottom of the window The toolbar has been provided for easy access to the drawing tools It also displays the current pen brush color and background text color as well as a message box describing the function of the selected tool Drawing Tools Pen and Brush Message r Select Operation z NSEECEREEREEE BO Freee Text and Background Coordinate Displays Drawing tool icons These tools are also displayed as menu options in the Add menu The functionality and procedures of each tool are described in Using the Draw Tools Pen amp brush box This box displays the default or current choice of pen line and brush fill Message window Whenever a tool is selected the Message Window provides a brief description of the selected task When no action is in progress no tool has been selected the Message Window displays Select Operation Text amp background box This box displays your current text and text background color as well as the bar graph color The background refers to an opaque box and appears behind t
16. The Draw application uses two types of image files graphics and symbols Graphics are images that can be displayed in a Graphics tabbed window or floating window in Operate Graphics can include static and dynamic elements and include single use graphics and template graphics Symbols are reusable static images that can be inserted into graphics FuelsManager graphic files can exist in two formats GRF and GRT GRF files are saved by and used by the Draw application A GRF file cannot be viewed in Operate 152 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas GRT files are generated GRF files that are optimized for display in Operate Generating a GRF file places it in the Graphics Index and makes it available for display in Operate Draw also verifies all database connections in the GRF file when you generate the file FuelsManager symbol files can exist in two formats SRF and SRT SRF files are saved by and used by the Draw application A SRF file cannot be inserted in a Graphic see SRT file SRT files are generated SRF files Generating a SRF file places it in the Symbol Index and makes it available for insertion in graphics Before You Begin Before you create a graphic or template graphic you should Create a sketch of the graphic Include in this sketch a list of database points and corresponding variables that will be represented in the graphic Note which points have defined alarms and note the
17. The Start Bit value defines the first bit position in the FuelsManager database point that should be processed The Number of Bits value defines how many bits in the FuelsManager database point should be processed starting with the Start Bit The Start Data Source Bit value defines the first bit position in the I O point that the start bit and subsequent number of bits should be written to 104 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas The following example shows data transmitted by FuelsManager the same functionality applied to data received by FuelsManager Fuels Manager PLC Database Point rl Value 00000101 MyNumber Process Value 0101000 O12 38 u 1 o 1 o o o u a o o o po 1 o 1 Start Bit 1 Number of bits 3 Ad Start Data Source Bit 5 Note In the above example only 3 bits in the FuelsManager database value are define However FuelsManager will write the entire word to the PLC This means that any data stored in bit O through 4 in the PLC word will be overwritten by zeros when bits 5 6 and 7 are written It is the engineer s responsibility to ensure that writing bitfields does not cause unexpected operations in the PLC Points with the Bitfield Data option enabled allow up to 32 independent data source assignments This allows the combination of multiple bits into a single integer or the writing of single bits from multiple
18. This variable is the minimum range for the tank temperature ambient temperature and vapor temperature process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TEMPERATURE MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM TEMP SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank temperature ambient temperature and vapor temperature process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TEMPERATURE UNITS TEMPERATURE ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank temperature ambient temperature and vapor temperature process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VOLUME MININIUM TANK MINIMUM VOLUME SCALING This variable is the minimum range for all tank volume process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VOLUME MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM VOLUME SCALING This variable is the maximum range for all tank volume process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VOLUME UNITS VOLUME ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for all tank volume process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS MININIUM TANK MINIMUM MASS SCALING This variable is the minimum range for all tank mass process variables This variab
19. Type a group name in the Name box and then click the Update icon for the new group The icon is located in the Edit column Click Close Assigning Reports to a Report Group Aog dw 6 7 Log in to the Web Server as an administrator In the left treeview select Configuration Reporting Click the Report Assignment tab The Report Assignment page opens On the Report Assignment Configuration page click Add a Report The Report Detail Con figuration screen opens Fill out the Report Name Report Path Report Description and Assigned Group fields as fol lows Report Name enter a name for standard reports use the name provided such as Journal Gross This name will appear in the report list as the link to open the report Report Path Select the appropriate report from the available list Note that the list only shows reports that you have deployed to the Report Server Report Description enter a short description of the report This text will appear under the report name in the report list Assigned Group In the Group List list select the group that you added earlier in this procedure Click the lt lt button to place the group in the Assigned Group box Click Save The Report Assignment page appears Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each of the remaining reports in the report directory 290 Administrator Manual 18 Configuring Multiple Monitors FuelsManager supports using multiple monitors for mult
20. Administering Reports 268 Administrator Manual 16 Configuring the FuelsManager Web Server This section describes how to set up the FuelsManager Web Server option for FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Standard or Professional Editions Before You Begin Install FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Standard or Professional Edition with the Web Server option e The FuelsManager Web Server is automatically configured with a site called Default The default administrator account is administrator with password marietta The default administrator belongs to the default user group Administrators Ensure that your IT staff has networked your Web Server machine to all FuelsManager Standard and Professional systems at your site You must have administrator access to all FuelsManager Oil amp Gas systems that you will be monitoring through the Web Server Task Overview Configuring the Web Server The following table describes the recommended sequence of tasks for setting up the FuelsManager Web Server to manage multiple Sites Task Reference 1 Login to the Site Logging In to the Web Server as an Administrator on page 269 2 Set Site configuration settings Defining Site Properties on page 270 3 Define User Groups and Users Defining Users and User Groups on page 271 4 Define Products Defining Products on page 276 5 Set Up the Data Dictionary Renaming Labels with the Data D
21. LEVEL OFFSET Defines the offset value to be applied to the Level calculation as part of the Hydrostatic calculations 92 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Entering Vessel 2 information Edit Tank Data gt MSIZEMORE 41 2 Tank 4 General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel1 Vessel 2 wa Strap Water Table Leak Detection Transfer Limits C HighHigh Maximurn Fill fein 1 6th High C User Defined C LowLow Minimum Empty y ftin 16th Low C User Defined Gauge Gauge Type Undefined Modifier Undefined LPG Float Characteristics Float Mass Float Density Float Diameter ftin T8th Figure 5 20 Edit Tank Data window Vessel 1 tab 1l Click the Vessel 2 tab 2 Under Transfer Limits you can set the Maximum Fill volume for the tank You can select from the pre set amounts of High High or High or select User Defined and enter the appropriate amount 3 Also under Transfer Limits you can set the Maximum Empty volume for the tank You can select from the pre set amounts of Low Low and Low or select User Defined and enter the appropriate amount 4 Under Gauge you can select from the standard Gauge Type list and enter the appropriate commands available from the gauge by clicking the Modifier button and selecting from the list 5 UnderLPG Float Characteristics you can enter the Float Mass Float Density and Float Diam eter so FuelsManager can comp
22. Ox1 DB Config Error 0x2 Tank Calc Error Ox4 Strap Error Ox8 API Corr Error 0x10 Critical Zone 0x20 Movement Alarm 0x40 Reverse Flow 0x80 No Flow 0x100 ETA HiHi Level 0x200 ETA High Level 0x400 ETA LoLo Level 0x800 ETA Low Level 0x2000 Testing 0x4000 Trans Adv SetPt 0x8000 Trans SD SetPt TANK MODE ALARM COMPOSITE TANK MODE ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority tank mode alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal Movement Alarm No Flow Reverse Flow or Testing FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current product movement of the tank and the currently operator selected tank mode ALARM API CORRECTION API CORRECTION ERROR This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or API Corr Error if the Density or Temperature is outside of the range for the selected volume correction method ALARM CALCULATION CALCULATION ERROR This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Tank Calc Error if FuelsManager is unable to perform the tank volume calculation due to an internal error ALARM CRITICAL ZONE LEVEL IN CRITICAL ZONE This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Critical Zone if the current tank level is between the Fully Floating and Fully Landed heights ALARM DAtabASE CONF DAtabASE CONFIGURATION ERROR
23. Please note that FuelsManager compares the value of the flow variable regardless of it s sign meaning that a flow of 10000 gpm would trigger a high flow alarm if the High flow limit was 9999 This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges Varec Inc 305 Point Parameters Tank Alarms Data FLOW ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High flow alarm setpoint is 10 and the flow alarm holdoff is 1 the flow must return to a value of 9 before the High flow alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate LEVEL RATE ALARM CHANGE IN LEVEL RATE ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority level rate alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High or Low FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current level rate and the alarm limits configured for the tank LEVEL RATE HIGH S P HIGH LEVEL RATE SETPOINT This variable is the limit for a High level rate alarm If the tank level rate exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated Please note that FuelsManager compares the value of the level rate variable regardless of it s sign
24. Reviewing the EventLoY o o oooooooooo ss 24 Security Authentication 0 0 0 0 eee 24 Setting System Parameters 2 00 eeee 25 Working with Configuration lisse RII 25 Opening Configuration aoaaa aeee 25 Exiting Configuration ccce rs 25 Setting Subsystem Run Modes 00 000 eee 25 System Selection 2 reca adi ala als 26 FuelsManager file directories llle 27 Setting up file directories ooooooooommmmmroooa les 29 Defining System Resources 2 0 n 29 Prod cls Panra cunts stets Zacatecas a emet Prats aged Facete dade 29 Assignment Options Product lille 30 Strings 1o exi RAO ea mA epe eei WR aed epi oe 32 Coded Variables gu c ee ck A dI 34 eni tito rr a tl a Da 35 Managing Help files csl 36 Start definitions 2c ellus ED A Luce ru a xir ed d abo he 38 Configuring Translation Tables ooooooooooocoooocco ae 39 LOOKUP Tables i o it a a put FLORE Eae Gag edie gosta Be te 39 Scaling Functions o e EIL Ie A e be a re RE EE ed 42 Changing the Default Tank Detail Display llli lees 43 Changing the Operate Tabbed Window Display Setting 44 Configuring Alarms and EventS o 45 Typos af Alarims 25 ox as bes sire et Nb e EO RO RR 46 Global Alarms and Local Aarms 2000 0 cece eee ees 46 Alarm Templates i 322g dar seed eoe dope Pe AP Dac UR 46 Predefined or User Define
25. Tank Calculation Error Strap table Error API Correction Error Critical Zone Transfer Advisory Setpoint Transfer Advisory Shutdown Specialized alarms These can be edited and applied to all tanks in the system However you cannot edit these alarms on a tank by tank basis Specialized alarms The following tank alarms have special meaning that may not be as easy to understand as the simple level temperature or process alarms For this reason a brief description of their functionality is given in the following table for more information please refer to the Glossary Edit Tank Data window Alarm tab Specialized Alarms MOVEMENT When the Tank Mode is set to Stopped a Stop Level is established at the current tank level If the tank level deviates from the Stop Level by the High Setpoint a Movement Alarm is generated Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Edit Tank Data window Alarm tab Specialized Alarms REVERSE FLOW When the Tank Mode is Fill and the Flow is negative or the Tank Mode is Empty and the Flow is positive a Reverse Flow Alarm is generated NO FLOW When the Tank Mode is set to Fill Empty or Run a Timer is started If the time exceeds the value configured under the No Flow Alarm Hold off parameter and the flow is still zero a no Flow alarm is generated The time is reset whenever the flow value is not zero TEST MODE When the Tank Mode is set to Te
26. This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or DB Config Error if FuelsManager is unable to perform operation for this tank due to an internal configuration error ALARM ETA HIGH LEVEL HIGH LEVEL ETA ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or ETA High Level if the ETA High level alarm is active see above for details of ETA alarms ALARM ETA HIHI LEVEL HIGH HIGH LEVEL ETA ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or ETA HiHi Level if the ETA High High level alarm is active see above for details of ETA alarms ALARM ETA LOLO LEVEL LOW LOW LEVEL ETA ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or ETA LoLo Level if the ETA Low Low level alarm is active see above for details of ETA alarms ALARM ETA LOW LEVEL LOW LEVEL ETA ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or ETA Low Level if the ETA Low level alarm is active see above for details of ETA alarms ALARM MOVEMENT FLOW LEVEL CHANGE This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Movement Alarm if the Movement Alarm is active see above for details of the Movement Alarm 308 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank Alarms Data ALARM NO FLOW NO FLOW Thi
27. edit window by drawing a square marquee around a group of objects This window allows you to edit move copy or delete all the objects in the window as a single unit Selecting the Move and Copy Window options can perform two of these actions 1 Select Window from the Edit menu item or press Ctrl W A check mark appears beside the option 2 Select the first corner of the window and drag the cursor around the group of objects you want to edit 3 To change the size of the window move the cursor to the border of the window Note that the cursor becomes a two headed arrow Drag the arrow to make the window the desired size Release the mouse button 4 Tomove the window without moving its contents click anywhere on the window The cursor will become a four headed arrow and you can drag the window to any desired location on the display 5 Select the Edit menu and click Move Window Alt M Copy Window Alt C or Delete Shift Del 6 Ifthe Move Window option was chosen move the window to a new location 7 Ifthe Copy Window option was chosen move the duplicated window to a new location 8 Select Window from the Edit menu item to disable the Multiple Select option Undo last If you want to undo the last action performed click Undo Last from the Edit menu item Redrawing the screen During the editing process extraneous pixels may remain on the screen Redraw removes those pixels and gives you a clean display sc
28. history 133 paths 133 139 summary 131 types 127 Multi Monitor 291 Multi Monitors 291 292 N nodes movement 134 O objects editing 171 OPC servers 70 opening Draw 148 FuelsManager Report Editor 251 Operate application 9 tabbed window display 44 output points creating 74 definition 66 P parameters point 295 password Weights amp Measures 248 paths movement 133 139 permissions user group 19 point variables ArchiveManager 114 points alarms 69 86 attributes 66 copying 105 creating 72 74 78 82 data format 69 data source 67 data sources 99 database levels 72 engineering units 67 events 69 exporting 57 importing 57 parameters 295 renaming 105 scale limits 67 tag category 69 translation tables 39 types 66 port communications 121 predefined alarms 46 reports 251 Prerequisites 291 product movement exporting 140 groups 138 importing 140 movement history 133 paths 133 summary 131 types 127 movement paths 139 nodes 134 transfer modes 129 Xfr modes 129 product strapping tables 206 products System resources 29 Web Server 276 Professional Edition 2 purging graphic files 158 R real time database 4 receipt 128 records ArchiveManager 116 redrawing graphics screen 172 regional settings 278 remote systems 10 renaming points 105 Report application 9 Report Editor opening 251 Report Manager opening 283 ReportManager 8 reports deleting 266 dynamic reports 259 edi
29. 0 20896 Z 0 81354 DENV 22 18134 Vapor density Step 12 MV 0 16687 Vapor mass Step 13 MT 53 5596 tonnes Total mass Step 14 mass to weight conversion fraction 0 99777 WT 53 4404 tonnes Total weight Varec Inc 229 Setting Calculation Methods Hydrostatic amp Hybrid Tank Calculations FuelsManager provides calculations of tank levels and volumes based on measurements at pressure of precise positions on the tank These calculation techniques fall into two main groups Hydrostatic Measurement of pressure at one or more points in the tank and the subsequent calculation of the product density and tank level This type of measurement technique can be used without a level gauge Hybrid This technique combines the measurement of product density via pressure measurement of one or more points in the tank and the direct measurement of product level with a level gauge FuelsManager provides configuration parameters for up to three pressure instruments as shown below The following shows the use of three pressure instruments however FuelsManager allows for configuration with 1 2 or 3 transmitters q Top Pressure P Bottom Pressure Pb In addition FuelsManager allows for the configuration of the exact position of the tank including the latitude and elevation above sea level These parameters allow for corrections due to the effects of local gravity and air den
30. Afterthe last point press the ENTER key to complete the polyline Drawing a rectangle The Rectangle tool draws rectangles and squares 1 Select the Rectangle tool or select Add and click Rectangle Click on area to define the first corner 2 Drag the cursor and release the mouse button at desired size Note To draw a square follow the procedure for drawing a rectangle and hold down the Ctrl key while you drag the cursor 160 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Drawing a polygon la Use the Polygon tool to draw polygons multi sided closed objects You can create polygons with up to 25 points 24 clicks 1 2 3 4 Select the Polygon tool or select Add and click Polygon Click on area to define first point Move the cross hair cursor to the next point and click again Repeat this step for each additional point of the polygon Holding the SHIFT key while draw ing forces orthogonal movement of the line from the previous point Press Enter to connect the last point and the first point Drawing an ellipse IS The Ellipse tool draws ellipses and circles 1 2 3 4 Select the Ellipse tool or select Add and click Ellipse Click on area to define center point and hold down the mouse button Drag the cursor in a diagonal direction to create the ellipse Release the mouse button at desired size and shape Note To draw a circle follow the procedure for drawing an ellipse except ho
31. Alternately you can update the software version by version as described in the Troubleshooting section Running the Utility 1 Open the Utility from the Start Menu Click Start and select Programs FuelsManager FMTools and click FMSystemUpdate This opens the FuelsManager System Update Utility The FMSystemUpdate window appears as shown below The utility recognizes versions 4 0 4 1 and 4 2 Varec Inc 143 Configuring the System Update Utility ma FMSysUpdate System Data File Version 4 0 This means that the utility recognizes the file version on your machine and can update your system 2 Click Run Click Run to begin the update process 3 Back up Files in Project Before running the process the system prompts you to back up your files in the project Backing up these files only makes copies of the files that change during the update not the entire project Click Yes to back up these files and continue 4 Finish Update After backing up the project files the system will automatically start the update The window logs the updates Updating System Data Updating Product Data Updating Alarm Group Data Updating DataManager and Movement Data Updating Graphics Data Update Complete If the update is successful the last line of the log will display Update Complete This means that the update was successfully performed and your system is now running the 6 0 database Update Failed If the utili
32. Close the Security window 18 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Access Alarm and Tag Selection In this example we assign alarm categories to a Group but you can also follow the instructions to Assign Tag categories to a Group 1 Click on the next to the Groups icon to expand the tree structure Click on the next to the group name under the Groups icon Click on the next to Access under the group name Click on the Alarm icon under the Access expanded tree structure un BR N In the right side window click in the check box next to the alarm categories that the group will have access to 6 Acheck next to the alarm name indicates that there is access to the alarm If there is nota check mark next to the alarm the group will not have any access to the alarm 7 Close the Security window System and Tag Permissions In this example we modify the System permissions for a Group but you can also follow these steps to modify Tag permissions for a Group To modify system permission for a group 1 Click on the next to the Groups icon to expand the tree structure Click on the next to the group name under the Groups icon Click on the next to Permissions under the group name Click on the System icon under the Permissions expanded tree In the right window check or uncheck the permissions as required Qv wr d o m Close the Security window System Permissions The
33. Editing and Removing Alarm Limits on page 59 To edit or replace an alarm limit 1 Inthe Define Global Alarm or Define Alarm Process window select one of the limits listed Note To change the units displayed for alarm limits in this window select a different option under Display Style if options are open 2 Click the Edit button The limit condition is copied to the Edit Limit Condition or Edit Test Condition box and the priority appears in the Pri box 3 Edit the limit statement and or priority as appropriate To reassemble the statement using option lists click the Build button and follow the instructions on page 61 If you are working with an alarm template you must enter any numerical value as a percentage as a number equal to or less than 1 00 When the template is applied to an alarm this percentage in each limit is translated to a number equal to the actual value of the point variable times the percentage 4 Check to be sure that the limit you are editing is still selected in the list and then click the Replace button Your changes are applied to the limit in the list To finish setting up the global alarm alarm template or local alarm refer to one of the sections listed at the beginning of Creating Editing and Removing Alarm Limits on page 59 To delete an alarm limit 1 Inthe Define Global Alarm or Define Alarm Process window select one of the limits listed 2 Click the Delete button The limit is re
34. Enter a 1 to show the oldest unacknowledged alarm on the Alarm Line Enter a O default to disable this feature and display the newest unacknowledged alarm on the Alarm Line Click OK Close the Registry Editor Note Operate must be restarted for registry settings to take effect Showing the Date Time and User Name By default Operate shows the current date time and user name in the status area at the bottom of the Operate main window You can set Operate to show this information on the Alarm Line also by changing a a Windows Registry setting This setting is made on the client machine and applies to any user logging on to that machine mn BR U N Caution Using the Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall your operating system Varec Inc cannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of the Registry Editor can be resolved Use the Registry Editor at your own risk On the Windows Start menu click Run Type regedit in the Open field Click OK The Registry Editor window opens In the left treeview select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Double click the following keys in sequence Software gt Varec gt SCADA gt Operate Double click on this value TimeUserOnAlarmLine The Edit DWORD Value window opens In the Value Data field do one of the following Enter a 1 to show the date time and user name on the Alarm Bar Enter a O default to disable this feat
35. Float data Mass m 1033 5 g Diameter d 288 mm Density of Liquid of Time of Calibration DENL1 999 1 kg m3 Tank data Radius R 3000 mm Tank Height HT 6000 mm Shell Thick THICK 18 mm Input Data Level H 5062 mm Liquid Temp TL 18 5 C Vapor Temp TV 21 3 C Vapor Pressure P 9 1 barg Check Data Liquid Density DENL 15 C 505 0 Step3 VCF 0 98982 Volume Correction Factor DENL 499 76 Liquid Density liquid temperature Step4 DH1 15 86 Gauge correction for float buoyancy DH2 0 3 Gauge correction for thermal expansion HC 5078 16 Corrected gauge reading level Step5 Interpolation uses points 4 5 6 7 VL 106 731 Liquid value Step6 CORRT 21 000137 Thermal correction VLC 106 837 Liquid volume CORRP 1 000856 Pressure correction 228 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Step 7 VCF 0 98962 VLC15 105 728 Step 8 ML 53 39264 tonnes Liquid mass Step 9 CORRT2 1 000188 Thermal correction CORRP2 1 00112 Pressure correction VTC 114 3603 Volume of tank corrected for temperature Step 10 VV 7 5232 Vapor Volume Step 11 MW 43 6899 Molecular weigh TC 366 1846 Critical temperature PC 42 6585 Critical pressure TR 0 80424 Reduced temperature PR 0 23707 Reduced pressure W
36. Flow O GOV GOV In Es Where Q Flow rate GOVn 1 GOVn Gross Volume change in the sampling cycle Tn 1 Tn Sample times Level rate n l n Level Level ad E i Where Q Flow rate Leveln 1 Leveln Level change in the sampling cycle 234 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Q Flow rate Tn 1 Tn Sample times Mass flow Q WN was WN T T T Where Q Flow rate WNn 1 WNn Weight change in the sampling cycle Tn 1 Tn Sample times Net flow Q VN wat ES VN T d E T Where Q Flow rate VNn 1 VNn Net volume change in the sampling cycle Tn 1 Tn Sample times Varec Inc 235 Setting Calculation Methods 236 Administrator Manual 14 Using Weights and Measures The Weights and Measures W amp M function formerly described in document number MIS 100100 01 provides sealing functionality in the 8130 RTU and FuelsManager products The system also includes data flow between the various FuelsManager and RTU modules This information is included to assist the W amp M testing authority and to ensure the system s data integrity This function meets the requirements of Nederlands Meetinsituut NMi and Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PTB Weights amp Measures W amp M Agencies Features included in W amp M include the following Sealing of program EXE s D
37. Following a change in engineering units FuelsManager will ask you if the scaling limit and alarm limits should be automatically modified to reflect the new units Volume Information 1 To select a product click on the Product button 2 Highlight a product from the Select A Product window and then click Select Refer to the Adding Products section for further information on creating a product list 3 Ifthe selected product does not define the correction method to be used select the required correction type and any optional correction techniques as required in the Special Rounding and Calculation Option sections 4 Asrequired enter the Samples Sample Time and Deadband for the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow There is no set formula to determine these values You must consider the tank geometry pipeline sizes and other factors before entering these parameters Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 Wi amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Correction Method Averaging Filter GAS Samples Correction Type Sample Time 3 Flow Filter le Deadband 15 00 tc 4 Level Rate lena F Filter Y Deadband 0 00 Special Rounding Mass Flow VCF Hiller v Level Deadband 1 000 00 Net Flow Filter v Deadband 15 00 Temperature Calculation Options Water vsw Mole Constant Mass Weight s
38. LEVEL TIME TIME OF LAST LEVEL UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank level was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TEMPERATURE TANK TEMPERATURE This process variable is the current temperature of the tank this variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator TEMPERATURE TIME TIME OF LAST TEMP UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank temperature was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY PRODUCT DENSITY This process variable is the current observed density of the product at the current temperature this variable can be measured by automatic tank gauging manually entered by the operator or calculated by FuelsManager from the Std Density and current temperature DENSITY TIME TIME OF LAST DENSITY UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the Density value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified WATER LEVEL WATER BOTTOM LEVEL This process variable is the level of water in the tank this variable can be measured by automatic tank gauging or manually entered by the operator WATER LEVEL TIME TIME OF LAST WATER LEVEL This process variable is the last time that the Water Level value was updated This variable can be viewed from the
39. MACHINE ij Coniguravon REG BINARY 04 00 00 00 30 00 31 00 J ExporfOPoints REG DWORD 0x1 Mir UpdateTime EG D WORD xa Spec amp yExportPaints REG DWORD 0 Archive Manager Configuration Real time Database Historical Database FM System Access Microsoft SQL Server Start Time HH MM 00 00 Archive Input and Output Points Interval in Minutes 10 v Specify Archived Points Historical Period in Days 60 Automatic End of Month Backup Tank Point Variables Bottom Pressure P1 Double Byte Date Density Maximum Double Density Minimum Double Units Double Desc Daukhla Cancel 20040 yu O Of 1 From the FuelsManager Configuration application click the Database menu and click ArchiveManager The Archive Manager Configuration window appears 2 Change the Interval entry to 5 and click OK The system closes the Archive Manager Con figuration window and updates ArchiveManager with the new settings Varec Inc 185 Configuring Leak Detection Edit Tank Data Description Detail Variable Type Level Temperature Volume Mass Density Standard Density Flow Pressure Units Level Change Rate Mass Flow Vapor Gas Density Leak Rate 300 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 41 000 00 0 00 10 00 3 000 00 0 00 10 00 All leak relevant data must be configured in the Edit Tank Point Data dialog for each tank when a leak analysis is performed The minimu
40. Maximum Length window and click Apply This sets the maximum number of characters used in each string which can be no greater than 80 characters and no less than 1 charac ter Type the string in the Edit String window 4 Click Append to add the string to the list The string is added to the bottom of the current list 5 Repeat the above steps to add more strings to the list When all strings have been entered click OK 32 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas String Configuration User Defined Type Name G4 Strings Maximum Length 25 Apply Edit String QA Department String Strings 1 Entries 1 QA Department String TURO gea E Mm mnes Jes PLA WI Import Export Functions Header Strings Import Export Figure 3 7 String Configuration window Deleting or editing a string Once a String has been defined it appears in the Strings sub menu under the Add Type command 1 Inthe Configuration window select the Strings command from the Resources menu From the Strings sub menu select the user defined string to be modified 2 The String Configuration window appears 3 Use the action buttons within the window to modify the string String configuration window APPEND Adds the string in the Edit String text box to the end of the string list EDIT Allows any of text of the current string selection in the Edit String text box to be modified REPLAC
41. TIME OF LAST NET VOLUME UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank net volume was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VOLUME REMAINING NET NET REMAINING STORAGE This process variable is the Net Volume of product that can be added to the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the current Net Std Volume from the Net Std Volume at the maximum working level however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOLUME AVAILABLE NET NET AVAILABLE PRODUCT This process variable is the Net Volume of product that can safely be issued from the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the Net Std Volume at the minimum working level from the current Net Std Volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator STANDARD DENSITY STANDARD DENSITY This process variable is the current corrected density of the product at the standard temperature as defined by the selected correction method This variable can be measured by automatic tank gauging manually entered by the operator or calculated by FuelsManager from the observed density current temperature and correction method MASS PRODUCT MASS This process variable is the mass of product FuelsManager normally calculates this by multiplying the Net Std
42. The Weights Measures Password must be properly entered to effect setting Tag Seals 5 Alternately the prompt is simply for confirmation Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel2 WM Strap Water Table Leak Detection Calibration Seals LJ Tank Seal ID D Figure 5 22 Edit Tank Data window Weights amp Measures tab Note For more information about weight and measure functions see the Weight and Mea sure section of this manual Selecting the Tank parameter prevents modifications to any tank parameters that can effect the calculated volumes Selecting an individual parameter prevents modification to the data source for that particular variable Strapping Water Table Information Note The Product Strapping Table can be configured in the registry to include or exclude the Water Volume FuelsManager allows each tank point to be configured with both a Product Strapping Table and a Water Table Follow the steps below to fill out the Strap Water Table information Note ThePolynomial Sphere tab replaces the Strapping Table tab when you select the Tank Geometry option Polynomial Sphere 1 Select the Add or Insert button to enter the tank strapping table directly into the grid or use the Import button to import strapping table data from a FuelsManager formatted strap ping table text file TST 2 Choose either Strap Tabl
43. The indicator appears at the footer of each report page Sealing FuelsManager Modules FuelsManager includes a Seals database This database exists on each computer ina FuelsManager network and is stored in the FMSecurity dat file under the FMProject directory For each module in the database the system stores the Path a CRC16 Checksum determined at the time the module is sealed and a Seal State that indicates whether the module is or is not sealed Access to the Module Seals Database is provided through the FMSecurityServer interface of FMSystemServer exe W amp M officials can administer Module Seals in FuelsManager from Security The Module Seals dialog shows all the modules contained in the Module Seals database for the Current System Modules can be added and removed The dialog shows the following for each module Seal State Path File Size Time of Last Modification Version if applicable Current Checksum Stored Checksum Items under the Actions menu provide for the addition and deletion of modules from the database 246 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Module Seals Actions Current System SUTCLIFFE2 Module Seals Size Modified C Program Files FuelsManager TnkCnfg dill 348160 11 22 2004 2 2 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriDCSCOMM dil 36864 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriFMArchivelManager exe 208896 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManageri
44. This name can be displayed on user graphics and reports in addition it forms part of the alarm entry if an alarm condition should occur TAG CATEGORY Each database point can be assigned a Tag Category which works with the Security module to determine the level of access for the viewing and changing of database point values 82 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Edit Tank Data window General tab DISPLAY QUALITY Enable or disable the display of FuelsManager quality DATA information text superscripts displayed in graphic and reports that define from where the data was derived The default setting is unchecked i e quality data is displayed DETAIL Enter the name of the tank detail template without the file extension to be used for this tank If this entry is left blank the default tank detail as defined in the registry will be used VARIABLE TYPE This column displays the types of tank point variables COLUMN available This data is for display purposes only MINIMUM Edit the minimum and maximum scaling ranges for each MAXIMUM of the variable types The scaling ranges are used for bar COLUMNS graphs and trend plots and to define the ranges used by Operator Commands ENGINEERING To edit the units click on the cell containing the units you UNITS COLUMN want to change the drop down list presented displays only units applicable to the variable type selected
45. U N Select Data Source Level Source Type Selection From the Database menu select the Source Assignments command The Database IO Connections window appears Select and then double click any database point shown The Select Data Source window appears Current Type rc m Bitfield Properties Start Bit Number of Bits Start Data Source Bit Data Type Translation None Source Units Undefined ig Deadband 0 050000 Device Point Description Data Source System IMTOBXS208XSO7534 Varec DataManager 1 AnputPoint Inputl Test Process Value x Cancel Figure 5 26 Select Data Source window Note For details on Data Source types see Point Attributes section 100 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Dialog Group Button Field Description Source Type Selection Current Type Displays the current Data Source type for this database point Possible options Clear Manual Comm Calc Local OPC Bitfield Properites Only available the point is configured to process bitfield data Start Bit Defines the first bit position in the database point that will be sent to the assigned I O point Number of Bits Defines the number of bits starting with the Start bit that will be sent to the I O point Start Data Defines the first bit position in the Sour
46. UK 114 Imperial Gallons per Minute gpm UK 113 Imperial Gallons per Second gps UK 112 Kiloliters per Day Kiloliters per Hour Kiloliters per Minute Kiloliters per Second Liters per Hour L hr 098 Liters per Minute L min 097 Liters per Second L sec 096 Million Liters per Day Million Gallons per Day US Million Gallons per day UK Millions of Barrels per Day Liquid MBPD Liq 123 Millions of Barrels per Day Oil MBPD Oil 119 Varec Inc 327 Point Parameters Point format The storage formats available only to Input and Output points are listed below All Tank points are of a fixed data format STORAGE TYPE FORMAT RANGE Character 8 Bit Signed 128 to 127 Byte 8 Bit Unsigned 0 to 255 Short 6 Bit Signed 32768 to 32767 Word 16 Bit Unsigned 0 to 65535 Coded 16 Bit Index to Coded Variable 0 to 65535 Long 32 Bit Signed 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Dword 32 Bit Unsigned 0 to 4 294 967 295 Float 4 Byte Floating Point 3 4 E 38 7 digits Double 8 Byte Double Precision Floating Point 1 7 E 308 15 digits Time amp Date 8 Byte Time amp Date NA Time 8 Byte Time Only NA Date 8 Byte Date Only NA User Defined String 16 Bit Index to User String 0 to 65535 328 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Coded Variables The following list contains all the sta
47. Varec Inc 111 Archiving Information 3 Select a Data Source from the list of existing options or click New to add a new data source to the list 4 Enter the login information The information entered depends on the ODBC data source selected There may be additional configuration windows to be completed For further information refer to Windows ODBC Help 5 Click OK You return to the Archive Manager Configuration window showing the Data Source you selected in the Historical Database display field The system also changes the Connect button to Disconnect Disconnecting from an archival data source To disconnect ArchiveManager from an archival data source click Disconnect The system disconnects from the archival data source and clears the Historical Database display field Setting Options The Options area shown below allows you to set Archive Manager to archive all points or select specific points for archive Options Archive All Points Add Specify Points Tanks Input Flow Meters Output Select Points Pipeline Figure 6 4 Archive Manager Options Area Archiving All Points 1 In the Archive All Points select the points you want to archive for the equipment or flow the options are Tanks Flow Meters Pipeline Input Output 2 Select or clear the appropriate check box for the points you want archived Adding Specific Points You can select specific points to archive as foll
48. end of month Allows the setting of the printing interval for the Real Time Leak Test Report in relation to the last day of the month This field is only functional if Use Automatic Printing is selected 190 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank Analysis Methods There are three possible tank analysis methods that can be used in FuelsManager All three methods compare test readings at different times to calculate leak analyses Tank Analysis Description Method Net Volume The Net Volume method collects net volume readings from the tank when performing tests This method uses up to four decimal places in its VCF calculations which is an API standard Unrounded Net The Unrounded Net Volume method collects net volume Volume readings from the tank when performing tests This method uses up to 15 decimal places in its VCF calculations which provides a more accurate reading Barton Series The Barton Series method collects pressure readings from the tank when performing tests FuelsManager retrieves the pressure from a device that must be mapped to the Vapor Press P3 process variable Note For more information on Process Variables see the Database and Glossary sections of this manual Varec Inc 191 Configuring Leak Detection 192 Administrator Manual 12 Configuring Automated Data Output In this section you will learn how to configure maintain an
49. program you can view print and save these on screen reports Your FuelsManager package may contain several predefined reports Refer to the Report chapter for more information Selecting Remote FuelsManager Systems The FuelsManager interface allows you to select other available FuelsManager databases on the network This gives the ability to remotely configure systems over a network This can be done from many different dialogs within FuelsManager Whenever you see a System button or a Select button within a System or System Name group you can select a different database System Name Yoo Select Figure 1 2 System Name selection Select FuelsManager System ES System WTESTWS15 FuelsManager Systems Display Options Y Show LAN Servers Show TCPAP Servers Figure 1 3 Select FuelsManager System dialog 10 Administrator Manual 2 Configuring Security Microsoft Windows and FuelsManager Security FuelsManager security extends the Microsoft Windows security model by providing additional security privileges specific to the process of fuels management FuelsManager security allows you to Create users and user groups Assign appropriate security privileges to user groups Create alarm categories to manage which alarms get annunciated to specific groups of users Create tag categories to manage which database points are accessible to specific groups of users Set up an optional audit trail to
50. 224 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Where ML is Liquid Mass Step 9 Total tank volume is corrected for temperature and pressure using the overall mean tank temperature This is best calculated for the liquid volume liquid temperature and total volume and vapor temperature as TAV TL x VLC VT VLC x TV VTC TAV Average overall tank temperature TL Temperature of liquid TV Temperature of vapor VTC Total tank volume The correction is then carried out as CORRT2 1 3 x aT x TAV 15 Where aT Coefficient of thermal expansion of the tank C The correction for pressure is applied as in step 6 except that 3 replaces F in the calculation of the correction factor S is the previously calculated value i e CORRP2 1 3x S YOUNG VTC VT x CORRT2 x CORRP2 Where VTC Volume of tank corrected for temperature and pressure Step 10 Vapor volume is calculated from corrected liquid volume at tank conditions Step 5 and total tank volume corrected to measured conditions Step 9 as W VTC VLC Where VV Vapor volume VTC Total tank volume VLC Corrected liquid volume Step 11 Vapor density may be calculated from liquid density vapor temperature and vapor space pressure as follows Calculate molecular weight from liquid density at 15 C as X DENL15 500 33 3333 MW 4
51. 653 778 5 18 95 C 30 C 779 824 18 125 C API C 824 5 1075 18 150 C API C 1980 54C Individual amp Special Thermal Expansion Coefficient in Alpha x 486 918 18 150 C 30 C Applications 10 919 954 18 125 C Japan JIS 2249 C 1980 54D Generalized Lubricating Density 30 C in kg m 800 824 18 125 C 30 C Oils 824 1 1164 18 150 C 60A Generalized Crude Oil Density 20 C in kg m 610 5 778 5 18 95 C 779 82 18 125 C 824 5 1075 18 150 C 60B Generalized Products Density 20 C in kg m 653 778 5 18 90 C 779 824 18 125 C 824 1 1075 18 150 C 60D Generalized Lubricating Density 20 C in kg m 800 824 18 125 C Oils 824 1 1164 18 150 C Japan JIS Table Generalized Products Density in g cm 0 500 1 200 Not Specified 2256 C 1967 2 54 Table 55 Generalized Products Density in g cm 0 6274 1 0754 Not Specified 54A 6X Generalized Crude Oil Density in kg m 610 5 778 5 18 95 C 779 824 18 125 C Japan ASTM 824 5 1075 18 150 C D1250 C 54B 6X Generalized Products Density in kg m 653 778 5 18 90 C 779 824 18 125 C 824 5 1075 18 150 C 60A 59A Generalized Crude Oil Density 20 C in kg m 653 778 5 18 90 C 779 824 18 125 C 824 1075 18 150 C 60B 59B Generalized Products Density 20 C in kg m 653 778 5 18 90 C China GB T 779 824 18 125 C 824 1075 18 150 C 600 59D Generalized Lubricating Density 20 C in kg m 800 824 18 90 C Oils 824 1 1164 18 150 C Varec Inc 201
52. Alarm Alarm Template Contents include the High High High Low Low Low Advisory High and Advisory Low alarm limits Leak Alarm Alarm Template Contents include High amp Low alarm limits for use with the optional Leak Detection feature RTU Comm Global Alarm Contents include port one communications error port two communications error communications are off line or there is complete failure in communications RTU Status Global Alarm Contents include verifying the database is not empty and the RTU is programmed Tank Digital Global Alarm Contents include scan failure gauge failure and overfill error alarms Tank Gauge Global Alarm Contents include database configuration error tank calculation error and strapping error alarms 46 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Alarm Description Tank Mode Global Alarm Contents include a movement reverse flow Alarm and no flow alarms The RTU Comm and RTU Status global alarms are tied to the RTU connected to your system The Tank Gauge Tank Digital and Tank Mode Global Alarms are tied to Tank points Tank points have predefined alarms meaning you do not have to build the alarm process You only need to enable the alarm and enter a value If the predefined tank gauge alarm doesn t match the need of your system a new global alarm can be defined and associated with the relevant tank point Pre
53. Datum Prof ITG 50 Raise Head Lower Head Tank Mode 2 Stop Fill Empty Run Test Reset Out of Service NMS530 Follow Level Raise Stop Upper Int Upper Density Reset Level 332 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank strapping table The file format defined below is the format of strapping table files exported by FuelsManager 874969854 09 22 97 19 10 54 Vol Test Tank 6B fixed roof 27 46 64 Level Units ft inch 16th Volume Units U S Gallon Mass Units Pound 0 Roof Mass 60 Strap Temperature 50 Strap Density 5 Pin Height aka Critical Low 7 Critical Zone aka Critical High 21 21 of strapping entries 0 00 00 0 00 Entry 1 0 01 00 2085 00 Entry 2 0 02 00 4212 00 Entry 3 0 03 00 6250 00 Entry 4 0 06 00 12512 00 Entry 5 0 10 00 20813 00 Entry 6 1 00 00 25015 00 Entry 7 2 00 00 50123 00 Entry 8 3 00 00 75045 00 Entry 9 4 00 00 100000 00 Entry 10 6 00 00 150762 00 Entry 11 10 00 00 250094 00 Entry 1 2 11 06 00 287645 00 Entry 13 12 00 00 3001 84 00 Entry 14 20 00 00 500003 00 Entry 15 23 00 00 500003 00 Entry 16 27 00 00 675111 00 Entry 17 30 00 00 750197 00 Entry 18 35 00 00 875096 00 Entry 19 36 00 00 900000 00 Entry 20 4
54. Draw and Report FuelsManager Configuration The FuelsManager Configuration application is used to configure maintain and administrate all FuelsManager specifications such as real time database configuration and device communications The FuelsManager Configuration application is for top level users such as administrators and maintenance personnel and is used for administration of the FuelsManager application suite You can define start up options access define resources configure the database points and alarms configure or maintain the FMDataManager and CommManager Security can be accessed to set up users and groups and control data access FuelsManager Configuration also provides access to the Operate Report and Draw applications from the User Interface menu The FuelsManager Configuration application appears as a window containing a menu bar Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas 2 FuelsManager Configuration System Resources Database Communications User Interface Movement Help Automation solutions for oil amp gas defense and aviation applications FuelsManager OIL amp GAS Figure 1 1 FuelsManager Configuration window Operate The FuelsManager Operate application allows an operator to track and monitor and or control all activity and product movements The Operate program is intended for operations personnel and can be configured with a login script to start automatically upon user log The
55. ERE RE 203 Traditional tank calculations llli 203 Strap Table Volume TOV siia Rt a HER E Diu 203 Product and Water Strapping Tables llle 206 A A DEO PR p ed ates Febr eod oL pla 210 Bottom Sediment Water BS amp W aaau enn 211 Volume of Sediment and Water VSW oooooooooooooooo oo ees 211 Free Water i5o dose oats Due eave abd PT ADR des aa ae ha dd e RA ADA 211 Correction VOM ir aida I he Pe re ee nae M 211 Volume Correction Factor VCF llle 211 Tank Shell Correction CTSh 1 0 000000 cece ees 211 Gross Observed Volume GOV 0000 ssh 212 Net Standard Volume NSV lsssleleeeeee s 214 MASS s noua aS TESER a A EAE 217 Remaining volume remaining mass l l 219 LPG quantity calculation from liquid density llle 220 Details for each Step llle s 221 Sample LPG calculati0N oooococoooonononororornorn esee 227 Stored Data piiat ii iron ada 227 Hydrostatic 8 Hybrid Tank Calculations llle sellers 230 Hybrid Calculation sse s 231 Hydrostatic Calculations llle 232 Typical Tank Calculation liielseiele s 232 Analytical and Measured Data o ooooocooooo eee 232 Tank Point Configuration Parameters llle 233 Flow calculations e resse i r en EEA EA e eee eee 234 AA Luna d bend aa RE D AI 234 Leveltate oou AURA EEG MALAE EMI eae DECR Peart alls 234 Mass
56. F Lattude oms LevelOfSe 0000 Rin 1 h When an input Process Variable is sealed configuration of the Process Variable data source is disabled This feature ensures that a user cannot connect the sealed process variable to another 8130 RTU point In this example Level Temperature and Density are sealed and cannot be edited 244 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Edit Tank Data gt SUTCLIFFE2 Test W amp M Tank Source Volume Gross Volume Net Volume Remaining Net Volume Available Net Standard Density Mass Solids Level Flow Water Volume Gauge Position Density Temperature Solids Volume Transfer Mode Manual Entry Manual Entry Calculated Manual Entry Manual Entry aj Calculated Calculated Calculated Calculated Manual Entry Calculated Manual Entry Calculated Calculated Not Assigned Not Assigned Calculated Manual Entry Ix To aid the W amp M official in verifying which FuelsManager tank points have a seal applied and what the value of the Seal ID is FuelsManager includes a Tag Seals dialog In this example three tanks have been sealed or contain sealed variables Tag Seals Current System SUTCLIFFE2 Tag Test Tank Table23 24E Obs Test Tank Table23 24E Test W amp M Tank Seal ID 0000000001 0000000001 0000000006 Seal ID Sum 0000000008 The Tag Seals dialog shows the Current System and all
57. HighestVolume x LevelRatio3 TOV CalcVolume1 CalcVolume2 CalcVolume3 Where conditions Level Current Tank Liquid Level LowLevel Strapping point level in table immediately below Level HighLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above Level HighestLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above HighLevel LowVolume Strapping point volume in table for LowLevel point HighVolume Strapping point Volume in table for HighLevel point HighestVolume Strapping point Volume in table for HighestLevel point Spherical tanks Calculations Top1 LowestVolume x Level LowLevel x Level HighLevel x Level HighestLevel Top2 LowVolume x Level LowestLevel x Level HighLevel x Level HighestLevel Top3 HighVolume x Level LowestLevel x Level LowLevel x Level HighestLevel 204 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Calculations Top4 HighestVolume x Level LowestLevel x Level LowLevel x Level HighLevel Bottom1 LowestLevel LowLevel x LowestLevel HighLevel x LowestLevel HighestLevel Bottom2 LowLevel LowestLevel x LowLevel HighLevel x LowLevel HighestLevel Bottom3 HighLevel LowestLevel x HighLevel LowLevel x HighLevel HighestLevel Bottom4 HighestLevel LowestLevel x HighestLevel LowLevel x HighestLevel HighLevel TOV Top1 Bottom1 Top2 Bot
58. Inventory Reports gt Search for Go FuelsManagerDB Dependent Items Subscriptions Name FuelsManagerDB General Description Security T Hide in list view Iv Enable this data source Connection type Microsoft SQL Server z Connection string data source 127 0 0 1 initial catalog FM 2 Archive Connect using Credentials supplied by the user running the report splay the Fallos ing text to pro Credentials stored securely in the report server User name RPTUSER Password mm Iv Use as Windows credentials when connecting to the data source I Impersonate the authenticated user after a connection has been made to the data source C Windows integrated security Credentials are not required Apply Move Generate Model Delete E Done paraba gl RJ Local intranet 7 11 Click the OK button to save the data source 12 Proceed to the next section Varec Inc 285 Configuring Web Server Reporting Deploying Reports to the Report Server Before a report can be used in FuelsManager Oil Gas Web Server you must make it available to the Reporting Services Report Server using the following procedure 1 Connect to the Reporting Services Report Manager on the server hosting the Report Server ReportServer database as described in Opening Report Manager on page 283 2 Open the appropriate report folder You should have at least two report folders as desc
59. Local Alarm and then click the Edit button The Define Alarm Process window appears Creating Editing and Removing Alarm Limits This section describes how to build modify or delete one or more alarm limits for a global alarm an alarm template or a local alarm Building or changing limit conditions is part of creating or editing a global alarm or template see page 51 or page 52 It is also part of creating or editing a local alarm see page 54 or page 55 Before you begin the Define Global Alarm or Define Alarm Process window must be open If it is not see Accessing Alarm Limits on page 59 Varec Inc 59 Configuring Alarms and Events To create an alarm limit 1 In the Define Global Alarm or Define Alarm Process window do one of the following Type the alarm limit statement in the Edit Limit Condition or Edit Test Condition box Click the Build button to assemble a statement from option lists For instructions see page 61 Click the OK button The limit condition appears in the limit list 2 Enter an alarm priority level from O to 4 in the Pri box 3 Click the Add button The limit condition and priority appears in the limit list Note To change the units displayed for alarm limits in this window select a different option under Display Style if options are open To finish setting up the global alarm alarm template or local alarm refer to one of the sections listed at the beginning of Creating
60. Maintenance window Change interface mode Each individual interface has a current status which is either STANDBY or ACTIVE The CommManager does not communicate to the field devices when an interface is in STANDBY The port is then available to other non FuelsManager programs When an interface is ACTIVE the communications port becomes active and unavailable Communications then become operational The data is transferred to and from the database as defined by the device I O point configurations 1 Select the Interface description in the window for the interface to modify 2 Select Run button to change the device from STANDBY to ACTIVE 3 Select Standby button to change the device from ACTIVE to STANDBY 4 Click Done to finish Device maintenance Device maintenance is accessible by selecting the Device button in the Communications Interface Maintenance window It allows you to view diagnostic information about the selected device Diagnostic capabilities vary from device to device 124 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Device Mai NTERF ACE 001 Time B scription Varec Inc 125 Configuring Communications 126 Administrator Manual 8 Configuring Product Movement The Movement System lets you setup and monitor Product Movements and produces archive information on the Movement A Movement involves transferring product from one or more Sources to one or more Destinations Note Pro
61. Minute m min 166 Meters per Second m sec 165 Miles per Hour MPH 167 Millimeters per Minute mm min Millimeters per Second mm sec 163 Volume Barrels of Liquid bbl Liq 049 Barrels of Oil bbl Oil 048 Cubic Centimeter cc 040 Cubic Feet ft3 044 Cubic Inch in3 043 Cubic Meter m3 041 Cubic Yard yd3 045 Imperial Gallon gal UK 047 Liter L 042 Kiloliters kl 050 U S Gallon gal US 046 Volumetric Flow Rate Barrels per Day Liquid BPD Liq 122 Barrels per Day Oil BPD Oil 118 Barrels per Hour Liquid BPH Liq 121 Barrels per Hour Oil BPH Oil 117 Barrels per Minute Liquid BPM Liq 120 Barrels per Minute Oil BPM Oil 116 Cubic Centimeters per Hour cc hr 091 Cubic Centimeters per Minute cc min 090 Cubic Feet per Day ft3 day 105 326 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Volumetric Flow Rate Cubic Feet per Hour ft3 hr 104 Cubic Feet per Minute ft3 min 103 Cubic Feet per Second ft3 sec 102 Cubic Inches per Hour in3 hr 101 Cubic Inches per Minute in3 min 100 Cubic Meters per Day m3 day Cubic Meters per Hour m3 hr 094 Cubic Meters per Minute m3 min 093 Cubic Meters per Second m3 sec 092 Cubic Yards per Hour yd3 hr 107 Cubic Yards per Minute yd3 min 106 Gallons per Hour US gph US 110 Gallons per Minute US gpm US 109 Gallons per Second US gps US 108 Imperial Gallons Per Hour gph
62. Open Maintenance Dialog Re se eres boe te Select Brush to select the color pattern and style of the bar fill Select Pen to select the color size and style of the outline Select Color to select the background color of the bar graph Select either the Horizontal or Vertical option and corresponding Reverse Dir and Deviation option 164 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 2 Select Use Variable Limits to have the bar graph object automatically track the minimum and maximum scaling limits of the database point it is linked to If you wish to set the bar graph s minimum and maximum limits independently of the associated database point clear the Use Variable Limits check mark Note To bring the bar graph forward over a symbol click Pull to Front from the Edit menu Placing a symbol in a graphic The Symbol tool adds a symbol from the Symbol Index The Symbol Index displays all standard and user defined symbols 1 Select the Symbol tool or select Add and click Symbol Click on area to define corner Drag the cursor to size the symbol and release the mouse button The Select Symbol Index Entry window appears Select a symbol and click OK wu d N The symbol appears Placing an append button in a graphic E You can use the Append tool to add a command button called an append to a graphic When a user views the graphic in Operate and clicks on the append the action that you associated
63. Operate program lets the operator interact with the facility during run time It provides dynamic interaction with the FuelsManager database In Operate the operator can monitor and control equipment through the use of real time graphics reports and other windows The operator can also manage alarms and view trends Other functions may include monitoring database points and responding to data by issuing commands Refer to the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas User Manual for more information Draw Graphics are color graphic images that show the dynamic status of the system The Draw application lets you create new graphics and symbols or edit existing graphics and symbols for use with the The Operate program Your FuelsManager system package contains several predefined graphics used to monitor and control the facility FuelsManager includes a program called Draw With Draw you can create and modify graphics When opened in the Operate program these graphics display the real time data of the selected points The Draw toolbar is shown below Refer to Chapter 10 for more information NEEEEREREEEET m ni Report FuelsManager provides the Report program which controls all printing functions The Report program lets users define new reports or edit existing reports that display real time values or events Varec Inc 9 Introduction Reports may be configured to print on demand at a specific time or periodically In the Operate
64. S Rus 2 Professional Edition 22s es 2 Comparison of Edition Features llle 2 System Architecture o sasaa Cie a E A llle ehh ne 4 Real Time Database 0 000 cee 4 TENS de rs A e a da e du Aid duce ce Ak SA 5 On line Help 6 FuelsManager Services si rra ror ccd eee e hh eee 6 FMSystemMarager 53 044 d ebd eE aoe ead 6 DataManager ss s tes A tek A o ge ALS 7 CommManader 3 2 ta a A A aac ea 8 ReportManadger air debet rap d t daba Sige iaa 8 ArchiveManager ooo 8 FuelsManager Applications llli 8 FuelsManager Configuration llle ren 8 Operatern tc at cueste caer io ee tee ps khe aee iR iig ut 9 Dp rr 9 Report 24 cece 1 9 Selecting Remote FuelsManager Systems 0000 e eee eee 10 2 Configuring Security 0 0 eee 11 Microsoft Windows and FuelsManager Security 0 00000 e eee eee 11 Categories diia ah OS sete e acte pee RU aoe sae Edit e 12 Working with Alarm Categories 0000 000 cece eee 13 Creating Deleting or Renaming Tag CategorieS o o ooooooooooo 15 Users and Groups 22 wi A ER A AAA A Sees Die ead 16 Creating and Editing Users 0 0 ee ene 16 Creating and Editing User Groups illie 17 ACCESS add lo E id dt IND eda alae ata 19 System and Tag Permissions 0 00 cece eet 19 System Permissions w in oes aXe soe ew ve EAT EXT i artis 19 AUdil oe e st dd test hae theta 23 Varec Inc 1
65. SCALING VALUE This variable is the maximum range for the output point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate MINIMUM MINIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the minimum range for the output point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate 320 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Units UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Area Square 16ths of an Inch 16th2 34 Square Centimeters cm2 31 Square Feet ft2 36 Square Inches in2 35 Square Kilometers km2 33 Square Meters m2 32 Square Miles mi2 38 Square Millimeters mm2 30 Square Yards yd2 37 Density Degrees API API 191 Degrees Balling Balling 198 Degrees BRIX BRIX 194 Degrees Heavy Baume Ba h 196 Degrees Light Baume Ba D 195 Degrees Twaddell Tw 197 Grams per Cubic Centimeter g cm3 180 Grams per Cubic Liter g L3 182 Grams per Cubic Milliliter g mL3 181 Kilograms per Cubic Liter kg L3 184 Kilograms per Cubic Meter kg m3 183 Percent Plato Plato 193 Pounds per Barrel Liquid Ib bbl liq 190 Pounds per Barrel Oil Ib bbl oil 189 Pounds per Cubic Foot Ib ft3 186 Pounds per Cubic Inch Ib in3 185 Pounds per Imperial Gallon Ib gal UK 188 Pounds per U S Gallon Ib gal US 187 Short Tons per Cubic Yard ton s yd3 199 Specific Gravity
66. Status Maximum Process Value Range Ticks Type Point Time Time Stamp Units Time Stamps Description Time Stamp Output Point Records Data Record Description Record Point Tag Point Tag Description Description System Name System Name Alarm Status Units Output Minimum Process Value Range Output Status Maximum Process Value Range Process Value Type Process Value Status Time Stamp Ticks Point Time Units Time Stamp Description Time Stamp Varec Inc 117 Archiving Information 118 Administrator Manual 7 Configuring Communications Communications interface configuration The Server architecture module CommManager is responsible for exchanging data between the FMDataManager module and external field devices such as tank gauges and remote terminal units Note Make sure that the CommManager is not in Shutdown mode Otherwise you can not access the configuration and maintenance windows To access the Communications menu you must have appropriate privileges refer to the Security In most configurations operators do not have access to communication interface configuration The communications interfaces and associated devices of the CommManager are configured and maintained from the Communications menu found in the Configuration application Configuration can include creating an
67. TANK TEMPERATURE This process variable is the ambient temperature of the air surrounding the tank This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems In addition this variable supports linking to a local FuelsManager database point this allows multiple tanks to read one common ambient temperature VOLUME CORRECTION TANK VOLUME CORRECTION This process variable is the unmeasurable volume associated with line segments and manifolds connected to the tank This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote commands to the tank gauges VOL CORRECTION TIME VOLUME CORRECTION TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank volume correction was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR DENSITY VAPOR DENSITY This process variable is the density of the gas in the vapor space above the product in the tank This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote commands to the tank gauges This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbons or tanks using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations VAPOR DENSITY TIME VAPOR DENSITY TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank gas density was updated This variable can be viewed from th
68. Tables and a lookup table appears in the Lookup Tables listing 3 Right click the newly created Lookup Table and rename it to a more meaningful name 4 Click Edit gt Add Row The Add Translation Table Row windows opens and is shown below Add Translation Table Row x r Translate From Pico 0 C BitOr C BitAnd C Else Select Coded From r Translate To Numeric 0 Coded Display Format Decimal C Hex 5 Inthe Translate From area select one of the following Translate From Description Numeric Numeric value Coded Coded variable the Select Coded From button becomes available for you to select a Coded Variable from the list Bit Or A logic test that returns a true if any bit matches the test Bit And A logic test that returns a true if all bits match the test Else A logic test that returns a value if all other rows are false 6 Inthe Translate To area select from one of the following Translate To Description Numeric Numeric value Coded Coded variable the Select Coded From button becomes available for you to select a Coded Variable from the list 7 Select a Display Format of either Decimal or Hex 8 Click OK to save the row 9 Continue adding rows as required 10 When the translation is complete click Apply Varec Inc 41 Setting System Parameters You
69. Type WMSeal Parameters Sealed Parameter Description Enraf 811 Yes Module External Module Address Chan Channel for Communications CIUAddr CIU Address ID Tank Gauge ID TOI Type of Instrument ScanCmd Scan Commands for Instrument LevelUnits F ft M Meters m millimeters TempUnits F Fahrenheit C Celsius LevelDeadband Change of State COS Level Deadband TempDeadband Change of State COS Temp Deadband Enraf 818 STIC No Enraf 854 Yes Module External Module Address Chan Channel for Communications CIUAddr CIU Address ID Tank Gauge ID TOI Type of Instrument ScanCmd Scan Commands for Instrument LevelUnits F ft M Meters m millimeters TempUnits F Fahrenheit C Celsius K kg m3 A API L Ibs ft3 DensityUnits K kg m3 A API L Ibs ft3 LevelDeadband Change of State COS Level Deadband TempDeadband Change of State COS Temp Deadband Enraf 867 STIC No Enraf 873 Yes Module External Module Address Chan Channel for Communications CIUAddr CIU Address ID Tank Gauge ID TOI Type of Instrument ScanCmd Scan Commands for Instrument LevelUnits F ft M Meters m millimeters TempUnits F Fahrenheit C Celsius LevelDeadband Change of State COS Level Deadband TempDeadband Change of State COS Temp Deadband Varec Inc 239 Using Weights and Measures Point Type WMSeal Parameters Sealed Parameter Descri
70. VL is defined in Spherical Tanks in the Strap Table Volume section earlier in this chapter For the LPG calculation method the corrected level value HC is used in the conversion of level to liquid volume Step 6 Liquid volume needs to be corrected for the thermal expansion of the tank shell The nature of the correction depends upon the type of tank Thermal correction C F aT TL 15 Where aT coefficient of thermal expansion of tank C For a vertical cylinder E 2 For a horizontal cylinder F 1 2 A sin A A sin A cos A where HC liquid depth corrected R cylinder radius A cos 1 HC R For a sphere F HC2 R HC2r HC3 3 where H liquid depth R cylinder radius A pressure correction should be applied This will take into account the vapor space pressure and the hydrostatic head of liquid The average pressure throughout the sphere is assumed to be one half the total liquid level converted to a pressure plus the vapor space pressure The linear stress is then calculated and this used with Youngs modulus to calculate the increase in radius The F factor necessary for temperature correction is again used to convert change in radius to change in liquid volume The units of Youngs modulus are generally known in bar The units of length used in the calculation of stress do not matter but the pressure must be in bar to match the units of
71. Youngs modulus The following equations are based upon the use of bar for Youngs modulus Note the P is in bar g and HC is in mm Calculate average pressure as PAV P DENL x HC 2 04 x 107 where PAV Average vapor pressure Bar P Pressure in vapor space Varec Inc 223 Setting Calculation Methods PAV P DENL x HC 2 04 x 107 DENL Liquid density kg m3 H Liquid Level mm Calculate external radius as ROUT R THICK where ROUT External radius R radius THICK Shell thickness Calculate stress as _ PAV _2xR xROUT S 2 ROUT R Calculate increase in linear dimension factor as CORRP 1 F x S YOUNG The value of S calculated is also used in correcting the total volume of the tank in step 9 Typical values for Youngs modulus are Carbon steel 2 1 x 106 bar Stainless steel 1 9 x 106 bar Corrected liquid volume VLC VL x CORRT x CORRP Step 7 The corrected volume at liquid temperature is converted to a volume at 15 C using the volume correction factor VCF calculated in Step 3 as VLC15 VLC x VCF Where VLC15 Volume O 15 C VLC Volume at liquid temperature VCF Volume Correction Factor Step 8 Liquid mass is calculated from liquid density at 15 C and corrected liquid volume at 15 C The units here are tonnes ML VLC15 x DENL15 1000
72. amp M indicator 245 overview 237 password 248 sealing FuelsManager modules 246 tank point variables 243 the point 238 software seal 241 system overview 238 systems seals 248 ViewRTU sealing the point 238 X Xfr modes 129 Administrator Manual Document Code ADM010GVAE00713 Varec Inc 5834 Peachtree Corners East Norcross Atlanta GA 30092 USA Tel 1 770 447 9202 Fax 1 770 662 8939 www varec com 2006 Varec Inc All Rights Reserved This document is for information purposes only Varec Inc makes no warranties express or implied in this summary The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners
73. and Renaming Points lille 105 6 Archiving Information LLuuuu3Staitiiissssessseessse 109 ArchiveManager srir eevee suntt rue tabe e ER ERES RES ERES 109 ArchiveManager Prerequisite lille 109 Opening ArchiveManager 000 rn 109 ArchiveManager Configuration lile 110 Select a real time database oooooooooooo seres 110 Add or connect to an archival data source lille sss 111 Setting Options penes cae WA ETE A headed 112 Archiving Parameters 4 4 pA duh ed won een eee mesi 113 ArchiveManager EOM Backup 000 0 0c cece eee eA 114 Point Variables dv A ipea ecd us 114 Adding point variables to ArchiveManager llli ess 114 Editing point variables 10 2 026 caro pace puc e V pad Fabret d 115 Deleting point variables csse II 115 Records ovde uut uw R mu E PADO a ai edd e Aa 116 Tank Polnt Records scc ear eto MR E EARN EE 116 Input Point Records er endai iaei da EC e s 116 Output Point Records a rd a A ao a 117 7 Configuring Communications aana aaaea 119 Communications interface configuration llle 119 Creating a new interface llllllslslse rh 119 Communications port configuration 2222s 121 4 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Locked interfaces and devices annaua 121 Device config ration 3 5 arre ra rend bate ahd 122 l O Point connections neas gana e aa s 122 Mai
74. autosizing option is selected This option was also defined in the Summary Report Setup window The defined number appears in the edit box change only if needed margins AUTOSIZING Deselect this option if you want to enter the table cell dimensions manually when checked all cells will be equal in width and stretched from margin to margin The allowable space can not exceed the page width minus the Creating labels in a summary report Labels can only be added to the first row of a Summary Report 1 Select Edit click Add and click Label 2 Click on the cell where you want the label to be placed Only the cells in the first row can be selected for a summary report 3 The Label Attributes window appears In this window enter the label name An Edit button is available to format the appearance of the label The table Snap option buttons aligns the label within a cell 4 Enter the text in the Label Text edit box 5 Click Edit to format the font appearance of the label These changes can be made before or after the text has been entered in the Label Text edit box 6 Align the label by selecting the appropriate option button This option only applies to labels placed in the table with the Snap to table option selected in the table pull down menu 7 Click OK A label appears in the selected area 256 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Label Attributes Label Text Fo
75. available for configuration All interfaces are forced into this mode Cannot configure for field data REPORTMANAGER Reports are available for configuration Reports can be opened in Operate program Active Mode Effect ARCHIVEMANAGER The system archives data into the ArchiveManager database DATAMANAGER Real time data is available to all subprograms and subsystems COMMMANAGER Data passes between the configured database point variables and the field device s REPORTMANAGER Reports are available for configuration Reports can be opened in Operate program The selected hard drive subdirectories and file contents vary according to your facility requirements FuelsManager file directories Varec Inc 27 Setting System Parameters Program directory Program Files FuelsManager The FuelsManager directory which is not displayed in the System Control Options window contains all the FuelsManager system files The FuelsManager directory is always separate from the project directory and it is where the program was installed FM Project Program Files1FuelsManagerl FMProject The FMProject directory is the main directory that stores all the project specific files such as CommManager data database definitions strapping tables and alarm definitions This directory also contains the Graphic Report and other subdirectories Note The RTU Strap CSV support subfolders are not automatically
76. batch generation is provided below l 2 3 Select Batch Run Files from the File menu item The Batch Compile window appears The Altered Files list box displays all files that have been modified since the last compila tion Select the files for generation To select all the files in the list box click Select All Clicking Unselect All deselects the files Follow one of the below procedures Varec Inc 265 Administering Reports Do Selected option to automate run file generation Step by Step 1 Click Do Selected A window appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all selected files 2 Click OK to proceed with the compilation of the files you have selected Make option to automate run file generation 1 Click Make A window appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all altered files 2 Click OK This option generates all files that have changed since last generated This option is useful if you are unsure of which files have been modified Build All option to automate run file generation Note The Build All generation process does not prompt you if the report is not in the report Index You must use the Master menu to add reports to the index The Build All option is useful for either initial project development or if the system database has been modified System database modification often requires re verification of database references 1 Click Buil
77. below the lowest possible product level This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations 300 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank Points Process Data AIR DENSITY AIR DENSITY This process variable is the density of the air surrounding the tank This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations MASS FLOW MASS FLOW This process variable is the mass flow of product into or out of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this sampling the mass at user defined intervals and averaging the change in mass over a user defined number of samples However this value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator MASS FLOW TIME MASS FLOW TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank mass flow was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified NET FLOW NET FLOW This process variable is the net volumetric flow of product into or out of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this sampling the net volume at use
78. can also add User Groups to meet your Site s unique needs 1 If you have not already done so log in to FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server as described in Logging In to the Web Server as an Administrator on page 269 2 Inthe left treeview select Configuration gt System gt User Groups The Configuration page opens 3 Click the Add button under the User Groups list 4 At minimum complete the User Group Name field See the following table for a description of each field Field Description User Group Name This name is used within FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server to identify this User Group Description This description appears in the User Groups table Assigned Users Users in this list have all of the Security Rights and Company associations identified for the User Group To assign Users to the User Group select the Users in the Unassigned Users list and then click the lt lt button 272 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Field Description Unassigned Users Users in this list are not associated with this User Group To unassign Users select them in the Assigned Users list and then click the gt gt button 5 If User accounts exist assign the appropriate Users to the group as follows a Inthe Unassigned Users list select the User s that should be included in the User Group b Click the lt lt button The Users appear in the As
79. can also import export translations to from a CSV file This allows you the option of editing a long translation table in a CSV editor such as Excel To import a translation table 1 Open FuelsManager Configuration and click Resources gt Translations The Translation window opens 2 Select the Lookup table you want to import and click Import The Import Translations File window opens 3 Select the file you want to import and click Open All the translations included in the CSV file are created automatically 4 Click Apply then click Close To export a translation table 1 Open FuelsManager Configuration and click Resources gt Translations The Translation window opens 2 Click Export and the The Import Translations File window opens 3 Typethe file name you want to save the table as and click Save A CSV file containing all the translations is created 4 Click Close 5 You can now edit the CSV file in a CSV editor Scaling Functions A scaling function defines mathematical formula that is applied to the value before it is received or transmitted by FuelsManager The following formulas are supported Y A X B Y X A B A Y X A B C C Y X A B A D C C In these formulas the variable Y represents the result of the scaling and X is the value before scaling The constants A B C and D are configured by you The following example shows data transmitted by FuelsManager the same fun
80. can be set in the Attributes menu From the Attributes menu select the appropriate command to change the default setting Setting the default font 1 From the Attributes menu select Text Font 2 The Select Text Font window appears 3 Select the desired font size and attributes 4 This default applies to any text created such as labels and values Setting the default text color 1 From the Attributes menu select Text Color 2 The Set Default Text Color window appears 3 Selecting Palette from the Set Default Text Color window displays all the colors available 4 This default applies to any text created such as labels and values Note The Text Color amp Background Box displays your new choice of color This color remains the same until the default is changed Setting the default background mode 1 From the Attributes menu select Background Mode to display a cascading menu 2 Acheck mark appears next to the current default mode 3 The Text Color amp Background Box display changes when you choose transparent Setting the default background color 1 From the Attributes menu select Background Color to display the Set Default Background Color window 2 Selecting Palette from the Set Default Background Color window displays all the colors available for the background color Varec Inc 159 Creating Graphics Notice the change in color in the Text Color Background Box Setting the default pen attr
81. can be the name of an application document group directory or file depending on the type of window in which it appears Close Button Use this button to close the window or application Maximize Button Use this button to enlarge the application window so that it fills the entire desktop Minimize Button Use this button to reduce the application window to an icon at the bottom of the screen Restore Button This button can restore an application window to its previous size and location Window Border The Window border is the outside edge of a window The user can change the window size by dragging the border in or out on each side of a window Administrator Manual 4 Introduction Overview FuelsManager Oil amp Gas is a software toolset for the management of bulk liquid assets in tank farms terminals and refineries FuelsManager is available in Standard and Professional Editions FuelsManager integrates all major types of tank level and mass measurement instruments including float radar servo hydrostatic intelligent magnetostrictive and hybrid tank gauges into one system Storage tank parameters such as level temperature gross and net standard volumes are displayed at an operator workstation In addition FuelsManager can be networked with other PC or Host Computer systems FuelsManager operators can view the facility using predefined graphical displays tabular displays or
82. cannot be modified via Operate TIME TIME OF LAST VALUE UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the output point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TICKS MILLISECONDS OF LAST UPDATE This process variable is the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since output point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MAXIMUM MAXIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the maximum range for the output point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate MINIMUM MINIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the minimum range for the output point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate Varec Inc 319 Point Parameters Triggered points process data Output Points Process Data DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION This process variable is the name by which the output point is known to the user This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate OUTPUT OUTPUT POINT COMMAND This process variable is the value of the last command issued via this output point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems and is used to send op
83. cell in this column you can change the Low Low alarm limit Low Low alarm limits are available for Level and Temperature process variables only HOLDOFF This column displays the current alarm hold off value COLUMN sometimes called deadband or hysteresis In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column you can change the Hold off alarm value This value defines the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High level alarm setpoint is 10 and the level alarm hold off is 1 the level must return to a value of 9 before the High level alarm is deactivated Hold off parameters are available for Level Temperature Density Flow Level Rate and Vapor Pressure process variables Also a time hold off value is available for the Movement Reverse Flow and No Flow alarms To assist you when entering alarm limit information the Edit Tank Data Alarm window displays the minimum and maximum available values for each alarm limit along with the applicable engineering units In addition when a new tank point is created the Level Alarms are automatically enabled and the alarm limits are set to 95 85 1596 and 5 Other alarm types Several additional alarms exist for each tank however these are not configured from the Alarms Page These alarms are defined in the Tank Digital Global Alarm Definition The default Tank Digital Alarms include Database Configuration
84. contain Database tag variable and value entries The value is a forced value For example Area42 Tank37 LEVEL 220 CALC VALUES Files contain Database tag variable and value entries The value is the calculated value Uncalculated points contain the Uninitialized parameter for Example Tank 2 Gauge FLOW Uninitialized Tank 3 Gauge DENSITY 75 87801 The Input Output Triggered and Tank point data types add points to the database The other data types are reference values assigned to the existing points in the database For example the Manual Values data type file assigns manual values The import function finds that particular database point and variable and then assigns the manual value Note Before performing the tasks to import or export points the default value i e 123 456 789 in the Digit Grouping field needs to be changed to 123456789 on the Cus tomize Regional Options Numbers tab After completing the Export and Import functions change the Digit Grouping field back to its default value i e 123 456 789 To import a point file 1 In the Database Edit window click Import The Import Export Data Type window appears This window lists the types of data that can be imported and exported 2 Select the desired data type and click OK 58 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 3 The appropriate Import File window appears 4 Select the desired file and click OK 5 A windo
85. created by FuelsMan ager These folders are created by your Varec project engineer Subdirectory Description Archives Contains Archival and Movement databases when using MS Access database type CM_Data Contains communication interface definitions CSV Contains exported configuration files Detail Contains all standard and custom tank detail graphics Graphics Contains all saved and generated graphic and seasonal files Log Contains all Alarm and Event logs Reports Contains all saved and generated report files RTU Contains RTU Configuration and DVR files Strap Contains all exported tank strapping tables Support Contains various other files used to configure your FuelsManager database Templates Contains template files for Bitmaps Databases example projects Graphics Reports and Symbols FMTools The FMTools subdirectory contains FuelsManager applications used to assist in the configuration of your database File Description Dmp exe Application used to create a diagnostic file detailing the FuelsManager application files and the installation environment FMBakRes exe Application used to back up the FuelsManager configuration to a zip file or restore a configuration from a zip file This requires Winzip to be installed on the machine FMSim exe An OPC client application that can be used to simulate changing tank values useful for testing and demonstrating p
86. data point types Create any new symbols if not available in the Symbol index that will be used in the new graphic as described on page 155 For a template graphic identify the database points that should be available for dynamic association with the graphic Creating a graphic Select New Graphic from the New sub menu in the File menu Set the size of the graphic as described in section Setting the size of a graphic on page 154 Build the graphic using the techniques described in this chapter including section Using the Draw Tools on page 158 and section Using Dynamic Conditions on page 173 Save the graphic by selecting Save As from the File menu Enter the graphic name including the GRF file extension Generate the file as described in section on page 155 You must generate a graphic or tem plate graphic before it can be displayed in Operate Note Draw verifies database connections when generating a file If you do not have access to the database or databases associated with the graphic do not generate the file The file must be generated at a later time before it can be displayed in Operate Creating a template graphic A template graphic is a graphic that is dynamically associated with a database point when it is opened in Operate A template graphic can be opened in one of three ways with an Append button see section on page 165 through a selection by a user in Operate or when an alarm occurs see secti
87. data source Select A Communication Interface System Name MSIZEMORE Select System Interface Description Interface Type Port Locked INTERFACE 004 Modbus Master UNASSIGNED Unlocked INTERFACE 007 Varec 8130 RTU UNASSIGNED Unlocked Figure 5 27 Select a Communication Interface dialog Note The exact process for selecting the device and I O point is specific to the interface selected 1 Open the Data Source window for the point you want to clear See Opening the Database IO Connections window steps 2 Click Comm The Select a Communication Interface window appears and lists all available Interfaces 3 Select the Comm interface that you want to assign and select the device and 1 0 point from the selected interface 4 Click OK to close the Select Data Source window 102 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Selecting an OPC data source OPC Server Source Select System WSIZEMORE i6 Selected OPC Server ndress Hauser DataManager 1 Scan Time 1000 mSec 100 10000 Endress Hauser ArchiveManager 1 Endress Hauser DataManader 1 Meters A Alarm amp Ack Data M 300 M 400 Process Value FlowRate Temp Density Figure 5 28 OPC Server Source Select dialog 1 Open the Data Source window for the point you want to assign See Opening the Database IO Connections window steps 2 Click OPC The OPC Server Source Select window appears 3 From the list select the OPC server
88. display by modifying the registry You can also select which Tank Detail display is used for each tank This selection is made in Tank Point configuration as described in Creating and Editing Tank Points on page 82 If a Tank Detail display is not specified when the Tank Point is configured FuelsManager uses the default display name set in the registry To create a new tank detail display see Customizing Tank Detail screens on page 176 This section also provides some common reasons for using custom Tank Detail screens Caution Using the Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall your operating system Varec Inc cannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of the Registry Editor can be resolved Use the Registry Editor at your own risk On the Windows Start menu click Run Type regedit in the Open field Click OK The Registry Editor window opens Varec Inc 43 Setting System Parameters 4 In the treeview select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE 5 Double click the following keys in sequence SOFTWARE gt FuelsManager gt Detail The Path value is the location of the directory used to store the Tank Detail display file or files The Tank value contains the file name for the current default Tank Detail Double click on the Tank value The String Editor window opens Enter the file name for the new default Tank Detail Do not include the GRF file ex
89. feature is not installed or you do not have the Configure Leak Detection security permission The Leak Detection page allows you to configure Real Time analysis on configured tanks Also automatic printing of a Real Time Leak Test Report at the defined print time and day before end of the month can be configured Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 WEM Strap Water Table Leak Detection Properties Tank Analysis Method Unrounded Net Tank Analysis Type Real Time Auto Printing IV Use Automatic Printing Recurrence Print Time 12 00AM Number days before end of month 0 Field Description Tank Analysis Method Drop list of leak analysis methods that are valid for the tank gauge selected from the Vessel 2 page The methods include Net Volume Unrounded Net Volume and Barton Series Tank Analysis Type This field is typically for real time tank analysis The types supported include Static Continuous and Real Time Use Automatic Printing Allows you to enable and disable automatic printing This field is only functional if Real Time is the current selection in the Tank Analysis Type drop list Print Time Allows the selection for the time of day the Real Time Leak Test Report will be printed This field is only functional if Use Automatic Printing is selected Number of days before
90. for selection 4 Click OK The Port Type window appears 6 Select the port type that the device is connected to Local Serial Port LAT Terminal Server Port or Dial Up Modem 7 The port type selected will determine what window will appear next and the available set tings Varec Inc 119 Configuring Communications 8 Edit the port configuration necessary for the device you are creating 9 Select OK after the device has been configured 10 The Communication Interface Configuration screen will appear with the recently created configuration listed Communication Interface Maintenance System Name MSIZEMORE Select System Run Mode ACTIVE Interface Status Interface Description Interface Type INTERFACE 004 Modbus Master UNASSIGNED STANDBY INTERFACE 005 Varec 8130 RTU COMI STANDBY Change Interface Mode f Open Maintenance Dialog Done Help Figure 7 1 Communication Interface Configuration window Choose The Type Of Deyice x Port Type Allen Bradley DH DH Entis Host Interface Modbus Master Modbus Slave Mtu7 InterFace Varec 8130 RTU Varec TSU Model 6820 LAT Terminal Server Port Dial Up Modem Figure 7 2 Left Choose the type of device Figure 7 3 Right Select the port type Local serial port and Dial up modem The local serial port is used when using any of the serial communications from the local system The dial up modem is used when using a modem for communicati
91. for the value as follows a If you need to select a different database click the Database button b Under Point Name navigate to the correct tank point by selecting an entry and using the Next Level or Prev Level buttons C Click the Select button The Select Database Point Variable window appears showing your point selection d Ifthe Variable selection shown is not correct click the Variable button and choose a variable in the Select Point Variable window then click the Select button e If any settings are incorrect click the appropriate button s to correct the settings 162 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas f Click the OK button The Value Attributes window appears 4 If you are building a template graphic use the Template Configuration Dialog window to select the database reference for this object Define the reference as follows a Select the database reference for the object by using one of these methods Click the Browse button and select a database point then click the OK button The Tag Name Point Type Variable and Format fields display your selection Alternatively use the Tag Name Point Type Variable and Format fields and buttons to manually define the point This may be necessary if your system does not have access to the appropriate site database or if the database has not been created To display quality codes with the data in Operate select Display Quality Data T
92. from the list 4 Click Save to save changes Deleting Sources and Destinations 1 Select Movements from the Configuration menu bar The Movements window appears as shown below This window lists the defined Sources and associated Destinations Each Source and corresponding Destinations constitutes possible movement line ups The con tents are arranged in a tree like format Varec Inc 139 Configuring Product Movement Movements Source Destination M 300 Groups fad Tank 1 ud Tank 2 Tank 3 pa T Add Sources an bd j 1 1 Y Add Destinations ani sd Tank 12 fad Tank 13 fad Tank 17 PA m 400 Tank 19 Export BH m 401 Tank 20 Import II m 401 Check Product History Closing Time HH MM 00 00 History Period Days 30 Close Note A Source can not be deleted until its corresponding Destinations are deleted 2 Select the desired Source or Destination The Delete button becomes enabled 3 Click Delete The system deletes the selection from the list 4 Click Save to save changes Exporting amp Importing Movement Elements You can export movements from FuelsManager to a file and import that file to another FuelsManager with the Movement Import Export feature You import and export the tank nodes unit nodes meter nodes movements and groups separately Note All nodes must exist in the workstation before you import movements If you are transferring all elements of the movement syste
93. integers into a single PLC register Again the following example shows data transmitted by FuelsManager the same functionality applied to data received by FuelsManager FuelsManager Database Points Value 01234567 00000101 MyNumbert 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 All FuelsM anager database points are assigned to the Start Bit 1 same PLC 1 0 point Number of bits 3 Start Data Source Bit 5 MyNurrberl MyNurmber2 MyNurber3 01234567 MyNumber2 1 07 7 DELL Start Bit 1 E Number of bits 2 Ad Start Data Source Bt 0 E 01234667 MyNumber3 0 1 1 o o 1 1 0 Start Bit 0 Number of bitsz 3 LL 4 Start Data Source Bit 2 Copying and Renaming Points Database Points can be renamed or copied at any database level Varec Inc 105 Configuring Database Points Point Copy Rename Source Points Tank Farm Destination Points Tank Farm Options JV Copy Description IV Copy Alarms IV Copy Product IV Copy Tank Strap Water Table ow Figure 5 29 Point Copy Rename dialog 1 From the Database Edit window select the desired database point level 2 Click Copy or Rename The Point Copy Rename window appears with appropriate options to copy or rename The items in the Options section are not available when Rename is selected In this window you ente
94. interface selecting a port creating a device and establishing connections from the database points to the designated field devices The procedures for creating interfaces and devices vary depending on the type of device you are using An interface is utilized to transfer data into or out of a system An interface is like a communication channel such as a serial port or network card Some examples include the Varec 8130 RTU Modbus Master Modbus Slave and Varec TSU Communications Interface Configuration window INTERFACE DESCRIPTION Displays the interface description entered when the interface was created INTERFACE TYPE Displays the interface type Varec 8130 RTU Modbus Master Modbus Slave and Varec TSU PORT Displays the selected hardware port used by the interface lt may be a serial port or another hardware communications channel LOCKED Indicates if the interface is available for configuration Creating a new interface The types of interfaces that can be created are dependent on the drivers installed on the system After drivers have been installed a new interface can be created 1 From the Configuration application Communications menu select the Configuration com mand 2 From the Communication Interface Configuration window select New The Choose The Type of Device window appears 3 Select the type of device you want to create Only devices with the drivers already installed will appear
95. linked to the status information data in the tank gauge Possible statuses depend on the tank gauge in use This variable is normally linked to automatic tank gauging systems but can be entered by the operator if required GAUGE ALARMS GAUGE ALARM FLAGS This process variable represents the alarms present in the automatic tank gauge In order to use this variable the gauge alarms variable must be linked to the alarms information data in the tank gauge This variable is normally linked to automatic tank gauging systems but can be entered by the operator if required Possible alarm values depend on the tank gauge in use You can configure these values The default gauge alarms are 0x01 Scan Failure 0x02 Gauge I O Fail 0x04 Device Alarm 0x08 Field Cfg Modified 0x10 Raise Failure 0x20 Lower Failure 0x40 Upload Failure 0x80 Download Failure 0x100 OverFill Varec Inc 299 Point Parameters Tank Points Process Data GAUGE ALARMS BIT XX GAUGE ALARMS This process variable represents the individual elements of the Gauge Alarm Flags Where gauge alarms bit 00 represents the state of the lowest bit of the gauge alarm flags and gauge alarms bit 15 represents the highest bit of the gauge alarm flags Possible values for each gauge alarms bit are Normal or the coded variable associated with the particular bit In the example above gauge alarms bit 00 Normal or Scan Failure TEMP TANK AMBIENT AMBIENT
96. method Volumes Allows you to set the volume of the product Water Level Allows you to enter the water level Permissions that are set as the default for the operator group Override DB Input is enabled Operator can change values in manually entered fields if the group system permission Audit The FuelsManager audit feature allows the administrator to track when and by whom configuration changes are made Once enabled changes made to the audited parameters are logged to the Windows Event log under a FuelsManager specific log called FM Audit The audit log is useful in tracking down what parameters have been changed when diagnosing a problem FuelsManager provides the ability to turn audit logging on and off for six areas of configuration data Note It is recommended that the audit log only be enabled after FuelsManager configura tion is complete Enabling this feature during configuration results in many useless log entries Varec Inc 23 Configuring Security Reviewing the Event Log To review the event log 1 Open the Windows Control Panel from the Settings menu 2 Select Administrative Tools 3 Select Computer Management 4 Click on the next to System Tools to expand the tree structure 5 Select Event Viewer 6 Select FM Audit Audit Categories Changes to Tag Monitor and record any changes made to the Configuration configurati
97. not assigned to other interfaces There will always be an UNASSIGNED entry in the list The UNASSIGNED selection disables all other controls in the window until a valid port is chosen An interface may be configured with its hardware port UNASSIGNED but the interface may not be activated until a port is chosen If the device is currently ACTIVE it will be set to STANDBY Once a valid port is chosen other communications parameters may be set Choices will be restricted to those which are supported by the device Locked interfaces and devices A Lock status is set when a user is configuring an interface or device If another user is configuring the same interface from another FuelsManager system configuration access to this interface will not be allowed A message will be displayed noting which user has the interface locked and from which system this user is working If the interface is unlocked configuration can proceed normally When a user clicks Done at the end of a configuration process the action saves the configuration updates the run time interface and resets the configuration lock of the interface When an interface is locked during configuration the run time operation of that interface is not interrupted and continues until the user configuring the interface clicks Done Note The time period should be insignificant enough that the user does not notice any interruption of data to or from the interface At that time the run time o
98. object of making the assignment absolute so the value is always associated with the point variable that you select For more information see Creating a template graphic on page 153 and Placing an append button in a graphic on page 165 1 Select the Bar tool or select Add and click Bar Click on area to define the corner and hold down the mouse button 2 Dragthe cursor to end position and release the mouse button A window appears for select ing the database point variable reference for the bar graph Varec Inc 163 Creating Graphics If you are working with a regular graphic go to step 3 If you are working with a Template Graphic go to step 4 If you are building a regular graphic use the Database Edit window to select the database reference for the object as follows a If you need to select a different database click the Database button b Under Point Name navigate to the correct tank point by selecting an entry and using the Next Level or Prev Level buttons C Click the Select button The Select Database Point Variable window appears showing your point selection d Ifthe Variable selection shown is not correct click the Variable button and choose a variable in the Select Point Variable window then click the Select button e If any settings are incorrect click the appropriate button s to correct the settings Click the OK button The Dynamic Bar Attributes window appears If you are buildin
99. pair twice Transfer Tank 1 Blend Tank 1 Charge Tank 1 Shipment Tank 2 Tank 1 Tank 2 Tank 3 Tank 2 Unit XYZ Unit XYZ 132 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas A combination that results in a circular transfer of product Transfer Tank 1 Tank 2 Transfer Tank 2 Tank 3 Transfer Tank 3 Tank 1 Discrepancy is the difference between the total amount transferred from all the From tanks and the total amount received at all the To tanks Totals is only available for Shipment and Receipt movements and is the sum of amount transferred Movement history The movement history allows the operator to view all product movements totals and discrepancies on a daily basis Operators can open multiple movement history windows and visually compare movement data from different days The movement history is a Microsoft Access MS SQL database and may be accessed offline in order to create custom reports using 3rd party reporting tools The movement system writes records to the movement history at the following times If a movement is stopped either manually by the operator or automatically on non zero flow if the Stop on Non Zero Flow option is selected If a movement is active at the system close out time The default close out time is midnight but can be configured to be any single time during the day Defining Movement Paths In FuelsManager setting up movement paths involves the followin
100. resources and configuring database points alarms and field device interfaces Other features include maintaining field communications and accessing the Operate Report and Draw applications Opening Configuration 1 From Windows click Start and select Programs Select FuelsManager folder Select Configuration Je ge dg The FuelsManager Configuration application window appears 2 FuelsManager Configuration eE System Resources Database Communications User Interface Movement Help Automation solutions for oil amp gas defense and aviation applications FuelsManager OIL amp GAS Figure 3 1 FuelsManager Configuration window Exiting Configuration 1 From the System menu select the Exit command 2 The Configuration window closes Setting Subsystem Run Modes Note Setting subsystem run modes must be done after a new installation The system defaults everything to shutdown and none This section lets you start and stop the different FuelsManager services It also lets you set which of these services should automatically start when FMSystemManager starts Varec Inc 25 Setting System Parameters System Control Options r System Name r System Serial Number Muvoo1 n 300 058 3520 Select Subsystem GS Directory C Program Files FuelsManager Fl E V Default Tank Detail ArchiveManager Shutdown ROTE Shutdown RenoriManeser Shutdown C Program Files FuelsManager Fl Brow
101. select the Data Source as required 2 The Select Data Source window appears 3 Click one of the buttons Clear Manual Comm Calc Local or OPC in order to set the required data source 4 Repeat to change the source for any other variable as required Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 WEM Strap Water Table Leak Detection Variable Source Level Manual Entry Temperature Manual Entry Density Calculated Water Level Manual Entry BSW Manual Entry Volume Gross Calculated Volume Net Calculated Volume Remaining Net Calculated Volume Available Net Calculated Standard Density Manual Entry Mass Calculated Solids Level Manual Entry Flow Calculated Water Volume Calculated Gauge Position Not Assigned Density Temperature Not Assigned Solids Volume Calculated Transfer Mode Manual Entrv Figure 5 16 Edit Tank Data window Process Data tab Edit Tank Data window Process Data tab VARIABLE This column displays the tank point process variable COLUMN name This column is for display only SOURCE COLUMN This column displays the current Data Source for the particular tank process variable Clicking on a particular Source opens the Select Data Source window where the source can be changed Varec Inc 85 Configuring Database Points Sel
102. someone learns the W amp M password and makes changes to the Tag Seals the Seal ID will be incremented and no longer match the Seal ID recorded by the W amp M official In this manner the W amp M official is able to detect unauthorized tampering with the Tag Seals When a Tank is sealed you cannot configure or edit any process variable scaling engineering unit volume correction vessel characteristic vapor characteristic or strap table parameters In this example of a sealed tank W amp M keeps any users from editing the sealed information Edit Tank Data gt SUTCLIFFE2 XTest W amp M Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection t Characteristics Optional Protection r Tank Shell Correction Cathodic Protection I Enable vd Baris Overfil Protection 5 datior Floating Height ft n 18h Sifon F Acacoet Fea Roof Mass Ib Gauging E Roof Type Tank Roof y Traditional C Hydrostatic Hybrid Tank Geometry ylind y Pressure Transmitter Setup s OffSet PSI Height ftin 16th Tank Volume gal US Tank Height 0000 R n 18h T M de Tank Radius 00000 Ran l8h ind ShelThickness L 0000 fin 1 h Ht Lining Material A Minimum Level po ft n 18h Density Deadband Aj Date Installed 9 28 2004 v _ xi Ei Tank Material Mid te y F Use al Gravity C m Sec ExpCoef 1 24005 Hevation D ft Install Temp 0
103. term If an alternate term was defined for this element that text appears in the box otherwise the box is blank Edit the existing value if one exists or enter a new value This is the alternate text that will appear for the interface label when the Use Data Dictionary checkbox is selected Click the Update this Item icon thumbs up hand to apply and save the change If you make a mistake click the Cancel Edit on this Item icon to cancel your changes for the current entry Repeat steps 3 through 6 to redefine all of the terms in the Data Dictionary as appropriate for your Site Exporting a Site Data Dictionary to a File You can save a Data Dictionary to an XML file and import the data from the XML file to a FuelsManager Web Server Site Data Dictionary You may want to do this for any of the following reasons To back up the Data Dictionary To build or edit a Data Dictionary with an XML editor outside of the FuelsManager Web Server Importing is described in section on page 277 d If you have not already done so log in to the FuelsManager Web Server as described in section on page 269 In the left treeview click Configuration gt Sites gt Data Dictionary The Data Dictionary Glos sary page appears showing a list of keyvalue pairs Varec Inc 277 Configuring the FuelsManager Web Server 3 Click the Export button 4 Select an XML file to export the Data Dictionary to 5 Click OK Setting Region
104. the Draw application you can create buttons or Appends that displays a help file when selected in Operate You have the option of creating a graphic button as well as a help file button Text help file This type of help utilizes a user defined text file with the HTX extension These files may be created with any text editor such as Window Notepad These files should not be created with a word processor since embedded formatting is not supported The text file should consist of no more than 80 characters on each line The length of the file should not exceed 64 000 characters including spaces When the Help Append is selected in Operate a Help Window will be displayed with the designated HTX file If the complete file is too large for the window scroll bars are provided Adding a help file This section describes how to make a help file available for assignment in FuelsManager Help files must be located in the FuelsManager Graphics directory default FMProject Graphics 1 From the Resources menu in the Configuration window select the Help File Names com mand The Help Files Configuration window appears 2 Under Edit enter the help file name in the Name box If appropriate select the Windows help format checkbox and enter a context ID 4 Click the Add button The help file name is added to the list Note For more information about the fields and buttons in the Help Files Configuration window see page 37 5 Click OK The
105. the File menu click Detail Data from the sub menu select the Use Parameters option Click on the Hand selector icon in the toolbar and then select the desired value Select Attributes from the Edit menu The Value Attributes window appears Click Select next to the Variable entry The Select Point Variable window appears The tank parameter can be selected in this window Choose the tank parameter and click Select Varec Inc 177 Creating Graphics Arial 16 point Sample Text V Bold A 0 Background Align D talic E IV Use Bkg Rectangle ner c Center Bkg Rect GF Value Attributes Database Point Data Variable Level Tank Level Type Double Font Style Color Selection Data Format Field Width 12 Precision 2 Fort Zz Text a Convert Units Ok Cancel Use template mode In this mode you can select any input output or triggered point that is at the same database level as the tank point Such as assuming a database structure of Area31 Tankl TankPoint tankpoint Area31 Tank ValveStatus input Area31 Tankl PumpsStatus input Area31 Motor BearingTemp input The input points Area31 Tank1 ValveStatus and Area31 Tank1 PumpStatus can be added to a tank detail using the Use Template mode The input point Area31 Motor BearingTemp cannot be added to the tank detail SS ro ww Note The Tag Name field in the Template Configuration window is case sensitive y
106. the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow calculations FILTER This parameter is used to enable the averaging calculation of Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow If the filter parameter is not set FuelsManager calculates the instantaneous value for the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow values Averaging can be set independently for the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow calculations LANDED HEIGHT This parameter defines the height at which the floating roof is fully landed on it legs At this point the volumetric effect of the floating roof is zero since it is no longer floating The area between the Landed Height and the Floating Height is known as the Critical Zone FuelsManager only uses this parameter if the Roof type Roof Mass not in Strap is selected otherwise this parameter is ignored FLOATING HEIGHT This parameter defines the height at which the floating roof is fully floating on the product At this point the full volumetric effect of the floating roof is applied to the volume calculations The area between the Landed Height and the Floating Height is known as the Critical Zone FuelsManager only uses this parameter if the Roof type Roof Mass not in Strap is selected otherwise this parameter is ignored ROOF MASS This parameter defines the weight of the floating roof this value is used together with the Roof Type selection current density and strapping density to calc
107. the Operate interface but cannot be modified Varec Inc 311 Point Parameters Scaling and Engineering Units Data VAPOR DENSITY MININIUM TANK MINIMUM GAS DENSITY This variable is the minimum range for the tank gas density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR DENSITY MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM GAS DENSITY This variable is the maximum range for the tank gas density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR DENSITY UNITS GAS DENSITY UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank gas density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEAK RATE MINIMUM TANK MINIMUM LEAK RATE This variable sets the minimum leak rate that is detectable when running leak detection tests LEAK RATE MAXIMUM TANK MAXIMUM LEAK RATE This variable sets the maximum leak rate that is allowed when running leak detection tests Any rate above this will result in an alarm if configured and the printing of the word FAILED on leak reports LEAK RATE UNITS LEAK RATE UNITS This variable sets the volumetric engineering units that is used during leak detection 312 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank configuration data Tank Configuration Data DETAIL This parameter de
108. the Operate program Refer to the Saving Reports section If any editing needs to be done refer to the Editing Reports section Creating column totals You can display grand column totals or totals for each product or database system If only two rows are displayed in the table return to the Summary Report Setup window to select a column totals option This window is found under the Report menu 1 Select Edit click Add and click Summary 2 Click on cell where you want the total to be placed The Row Column Summary window appears Clicking Edit allows you to modify the column total appearance 3 Click OK A number appears in the selected cell 258 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Row Column Summary x r Summary Type TotaliAwg Column Summary Calculate Total Row Summary C calculate Average r Format r Table Snap Width 17 Left Precision 2 C Center VV Autc C Right Size 10 Font Courier New talic Enter the number of table cells to mx be included in this surnmation Cancel Bold Edit Figure 15 4 Row Column Summary window Dynamic reports A Dynamic report is more flexible than a Summary report You can select points and corresponding variables from any active database and add them to the report You are also not restricted to a certain format You can use as many tables as you like or no tables at all Unli
109. the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab TANK GEOMETRY This parameter defines the shape of the tank FuelsManager uses this value to determine how to interpolate between strapping points possible values are Vert Cylinder Horizontal Cylinder End Caps Horizontal Cylinder Flat Ends Standard Sphere Polynomial Sphere Underground End Caps and Underground Flat Ends Selecting Polynomial Sphere causes the strapping table tab of the tank configuration window to change to Polynomial Sphere TANK VOLUME This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods and defines the total internal volume of the spherical tank TANK HEIGHT This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods and defines the total height of the sphere at the point at which the automatic tank gauge is installed TANK RADIUS This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods and defines the radius of the sphere SHELL THICKNESS This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods and defines the thickness of the sphere s shell LINING MATERIAL This piece of data stores the material that the tank is coated with on the inside of the tank DATE INSTALLED This variable stores the date that the tank was brought into service Varec Inc 315 Point Parameters Tank Configuration Data T
110. the format of the alarm definition associated with the input point FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current process value and the alarm definition configured for the input point This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified UNITS ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units of the input point s process variable This variable is entered when configuring the input point but cannot be modified via Operate TIME TIME OF LAST VALUE UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the input point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TICKS MILLISECONDS OF LAST UPDATE This process variable is the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since input point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MAXIMUM MAXIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the maximum range for the input point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the input point but cannot be modified via Operate MINIMUM MINIMUM SCALING VALUE This variable is the minimum range for the input point s process value This variable is entered when configuring the input point but cannot be modified via Operate Output points process data Output Points Process Data DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION This process variable
111. the last transfer TRANSFER VOL SETPOINT TRANSFER FINAL VOLUME SP This variable is the current volume shutdown setpoint If no transfer is active this variable displays the volume shutdown setpoint for the last transfer TRANSFER DIFF VOL SP TRANSFER DIFF VOLUME SP This variable is the current differential volume shutdown setpoint If no transfer is active this variable displays the differential volume shutdown setpoint for the last transfer TRANSFER MASS SETPOINT TRANSFER MASS SETPOINT This variable is the current mass shutdown setpoint If no transfer is active this variable displays the mass shutdown setpoint for the last transfer TRANSFER DIFF MASS SP TRANSFER DIFF MASS SP This variable is the current differential mass shutdown setpoint If no transfer is active this variable displays the differential mass shutdown setpoint for the last transfer TRANSFER REMAINING TRANSFER REMAINING BASED ON MODE This variable is the amount of product that remains to be transferred for the currently active transfer Units are based on the currently selected transfer mode MASS TRANSFER REM TRANSFER REMAINING MASS This variable is the amount of product expressed in mass units that remains to be transferred for the currently active transfer Tank Alarms Data Tank Alarms Data LEVEL ALARM COMPOSITE LEVEL ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displays a coded vari
112. then click OK This setting does not change the color of the grid lines or the major division lines 3 Click the OK button Showing appends FuelsManager buttons Appends can be created as invisible buttons In this manner they can be placed behind bitmaps or symbols representing tank objects or field devices The user appears to be clicking the graphical object but in fact is clicking the invisible button In Draw it is possible to show these invisible buttons by choosing the Show Appends command from the Options menu When you select this option all created buttons in the current file are automatically displayed A check mark appears beside the option To deactivate select the option to erase the check mark Displaying mouse coordinates This option is helpful in sizing objects equally or aligning objects The X and Y coordinates displayed change as you move the cursor in the Drawing Space 1 Select the Show Mouse Coordinates command from the Options menu A coordinate display appears in the right hand portion of the Draw toolbar To deactivate the coordinate display select Show Mouse Coordinates command from the Options menu again Displaying object coordinates 1 Select the Show Object Number command from the Options menu A coordinate display and Object Number appears in the right hand portion of the Draw toolbar The X displays the horizontal coordinate or X coordinate of the selected object The Y
113. to System configuration settings which includes Alarms amp Events Data Dictionary User Groups and Users Modify Ticketing Data This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version Modify Transaction Aliases This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version Modify Transaction Data This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version Modify User Groups When a User with this right logs in the User can modify User Groups If you assign this right to a User Group you should also assign the View User Groups right to the User Group Modify Users When a User with this right logs in the User can modify Users If you assign this right to a User Group you should also assign the View Users right to the User Group Perform Closeout When a User with this right logs in the User can perform a Closeout Perform Product Update This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version View Allocation Data This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version View Company Data This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version View Equipment Data This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version View Installed Modules Status This right is intended for future development and is not used
114. to create a daily inventory report ata specific time or to log the state of all tanks when a particular event or disk file is detected The button next to this field opens a browse window to make it easier to define the desired output file 196 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Field Definition Periodic File The Periodic file is an CSV file written at regular intervals as specified in the Periodic Interval field There are options to export the column headers with the data as well as an option to include a custom Version column Periodic Interval The Periodic Interval is the amount of time in minutes between updates to the Periodic File The Periodic File is overwritten each time this period expires and the counter begins when Automated Data Output starts which corresponds with when Windows starts Version If a value is specified in the Version field it is included in the periodic file as an additional column of data This affects both the Snapshot File Parameters and the Periodic File Parameters Export Quality Info If this box is checked the file will contain the current status of the selected variables overrage underrage forced manual etc This affects both the Snapshot File Parameters and the Periodic File Parameters Export Header If this box is checked then the field names are included at the top of each column of the CSV file If this
115. to historical data is required If the ownership of the archive file is not System then the data does not appear as W amp M approved Varec Inc 249 Using Weights and Measures 250 Administrator Manual 15 Administering Reports Report The Report application lets you create and edit reports as well as specify print times and print intervals Once created the reports can be opened in the Operate program The active report prints at its scheduled time even if the Operate program is not opened Note The Report feature is only available in the FuelsManager Professional Edition or the FuelsManager Server Edition The FuelsManager Standard Edition will not allow access to this feature For additional information about upgrading to the FuelsManager Professional Edition or the FuelsManager Server Edition please contact your Varec representative In Operate opened reports displaying real time data from the database you selected can be printed on demand or schedule them to print automatically You can create two types of reports The Summary report displays the only Tank point information found in one or more databases The Dynamic report displays all types of points Tank Input Output and Triggered points as defined by the report creator Make sure the DataManager is not in SHUTDOWN mode You will not be able to access the database windows used to define values if the DataManager is in SHUTDOWN mode The DataManager m
116. value as listed in the Glossary These values become the limits used for bar graphs trends and Operator Command entries Refer to the Scale Limits section for more information If the data format is Coded Variable a command modifier may be assigned to the point For more information on Modifiers refer to the Modifier Assignment section Note For a list of the available formats refer to the Glossary Modifier Assignment If the Coded Variable type is selected during configuration you can assign modifiers to the point Modifiers are sets of coded variables grouped together to be used as commands issued by the operator The On Off and Open Close modifiers are examples The FuelsManager System contains a list of predefined modifiers a list of these modifiers can be found in the Glossary Alarms and Events An Alarm Process defines the alarm limits of a point s value If the value exceeds or falls below these defined alarm limits an alarm occurs in the database The alarm is then displayed in the Operate program Event Processes occur if the point s numeric value changes by a specified amount or if a command is issued Refer to the Administering Alarms section Tag Category Each database point can be assigned Tag Category which works with the Security module to determine the level of access for the viewing and changing of database point values The Tag Category can be set to determine which database points may be viewed or modifi
117. values Scaling Functions used to apply a mathematical formula to the value in order to scale a particular range of values to a different range of values FuelsManager allows the configuration of user defined names for translation tables Once a Translation table is defined it can be used as many times as need by multiple databases points This functionality allows the engineer to define all the required translations once and then simply assign them to the points as needed Translation tables can be associated with Input Output and Triggered points In addition they can be applied to individual Tank Point process values via the Select Data Source accessed from the Process Data tab Lookup Tables A lookup table defines a one to one mapping of one set of values to an alternate set of values The following examples show a numeric to numeric mapping and a coded variable to numeric mapping From To 10 1 20 2 30 3 Table 3 1 Numeric to Numeric Lookup Table From To Stop 100 Start 101 Pause 102 Table 3 2 Coded Variable to Numeric Lookup Table Lookup tables can be applied to data being received by FuelsManager and data being transmitted by FuelsManager For data received the From column defines the data being received and the To column defines the value that will be written in to the FuelsManager database For data transmitted the From column defines the value in the F
118. which the alarm is to be defined and then select Edit The Edit Point window appears 3 Select the Details tab in the Edit Point window 4 Click the Alarm Defined option button in the Edit Point window 5 Click the Edit Alarm button The Alarm Assignments window appears Creating and Assigning a Local Alarm Local alarms are unique to the point to which they are assigned Establishing a local alarm involves defining the alarm conditions and setting other parameters as alarm graphics and alarm categories To remove an alarm assignment see page 57 1 Open the Alarm Assignments window for a database point 54 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Alarm Assignments Alarm Limits Alarm Limit Enable Local Alarm Edit Template Limit C Global Alarm Alarm Name Alarm Graphic Select Alarm Help Select Alarm Event Category Default v Event Definition Event Enabled Cancel Help F Ad Figure 4 4 Alarms Assignments window 2 Under Alarm Limits select the Local Alarm option if it is not selected 3 Under Alarm Limits do one of the following To build the limit conditions without using a template click the Edit button To use the limit conditions defined in an alarm template click the Template button In the Global Alarm Definitions window select a template and then click the Done button 4 Assemble the alarm limit conditions for this alarm as described in Working with
119. with real time Graphic Displays This system runs with any of the following operating systems Microsoft XP Professional 32 bit SP3 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard 32 bit and 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Advanced 32 bit and 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard 32 bit and 64 bit Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise 32 bit and 64 bit FuelsManager operates on a single PC or as part of a network and is available in Workstation or Server configurations New Options Available The FuelsManager Web Server utilizes the latest in Microsoft technology such as NET and SQL Reporting Services to enable your remote users and customers to access data relevant to their business operations including current inventories plant status and reports via the Internet Intranet The FuelsManager Web Server Interface is available as an Online Web Server Interface Option for FuelsManager Standard or Professional Editions The Web Server Interface Option provides access to a single site Licensing Options The FuelsManager software suite is available as a licensed product with various levels of functionality Each edition is available pre installed on a PC or as a software license only The FuelsManager license pre installed onto a PC includes the following deliverables PC with minimum required features for workstation or server editions Electronic copies of the user and operator manu
120. 0 00 00 1000000 00 Entry 21 Varec Inc 333 Point Parameters 334 Administrator Manual Numerics 8130 RTU sealing the point 238 A acknowledged alarm 48 alarm categories 13 14 alarm logs 64 alarm templates creating 51 editing 52 exporting 53 importing 53 opening list of 50 predefined 46 understanding 50 alarms accessing configuration for a point 54 display mode 48 displaying date time user name 49 global assigning to point 52 creating 51 definition 46 editing 52 exporting 53 importing 53 opening list of 50 understanding 50 graphics 56 help files 56 Leak Detection 187 limits accessing 59 building with Build button 61 creating 60 deleting 60 editing 60 reset holdoff 60 local assigning 54 creating 54 definition 46 editing 55 logs 64 points 69 predefined 46 47 removing from database point 57 tank points 86 templates creating 51 definition 46 editing 52 exporting 53 importing 53 opening list of 50 understanding 50 tolerance 60 types 46 user defined 46 appends 151 165 architecture system 4 ArchiveManager 8 about 109 configuration 110 EOM Backup 114 Leak Detection 184 opening 109 point variables 114 records 116 audit 23 Automated Data Output configuring 195 198 output file types 194 program location 193 B bar graphs 163 bit field data sources 104 bitmaps 170 blend 127 buttons 151 165 C calculation methods 199 categories 12 alarm 13 14 tag 15 char
121. 04 Lower 105 Lowering 135 Reset 164 Unauthorized 194 Lower Head 106 Lowered 136 Resume 165 UnderRange 195 Run Immed Prof 107 Man 137 Reverse 166 Under 196 Follow Wtr Lvl 108 Manual 138 Right 167 Unload 197 Find Wtr Lvl 109 Minutes 139 Run 168 Unlocked 198 Find Datum 110 Month 140 Running 169 Unlock 199 Stowed 111 No Flow 141 Secondary 170 Up 200 Seeking Level 112 No 142 Seconds 171 Vacuum 201 Doing Profile 113 Not Ready 143 Series 172 Valid 202 Doing Dip 114 O R 144 Shutdown 173 Warmup 203 Finding Water 115 Off Line 145 Start Sequence 174 Week 204 Following Water Varec Inc 329 Point Parameters Coded Variables 116 Off 146 Start 175 Winter 205 Finding Datum 117 On Line 147 Starting 176 Xfr by Volume 206 Following Level 118 On 148 Stop Sequence 177 Xfr by Level 207 Servo 119 Open 149 Stop 178 Year 208 NC 120 Opened 150 Stopping 179 Yes 209 One Hour 121 Opening 151 Summer 180 I O Failed 210 Eight Hours 122 Out 152 Timeout 181 I O Disabled 211 One Day 123 Override 153 Timed Out 182 Reverse Flow 212 One Week 124 OverRange 154 Top 183 Trans Adv SetPt 213 One Month 125 Over 155 Transitional 184 Trans SD SetPt 214 Last Value 126 Parallel 156 Transfer 185 Scan Failure 215 Goto Zero 127 Pressure 157 Transfer In 186
122. 1 1 T5 NSV TOV FW xCTSh x FRA jx VCFx 1 BS amp W ds as sc xvcrx 100 Where NSV Net Standard Volume TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free Water CTSh Tank Shell Correction r15 Product Density BSG Strap Density VCF Volume Correction Factor BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities Varec Inc 215 Setting Calculation Methods NSV Net Standard Volume FRA Floating Roof Adjustment Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 2 Floating Roof Tank Net volume of Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 2 Japanese authorization organization uses the following equation IS S amp W 1 je NSV TOV FW xCTSh x VCF x 1 0 BS amp W _ x FRA 00 p15 BSG Where NSV Net Standard Volume TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free Water CTSh Tank Shell Correction r415 Product Density BSG Strap Density VCF Volume Correction Factor BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities FRA Floating Roof Adjustment Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 3 Floating Roof Tank Net volume of Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai3 Japanese authorization organization uses the following equation It does not apply the roof correction to the net volume calculation NSV TOV FW x CTSh x VCF x 1 0 BS amp W 100 Where
123. 2 xor ena uh a ER BRUM DEA BR Ede de 182 Continuous Analysis zen Fears AA EE d e RU 182 Realtime Analysis ieee ea eas dea Me IRE PERS TRE IDA 183 DOCU picar a al E MANSIS Ide EN 183 ArchiveManager icu vex ee dE ex Rae 184 Edit Tank Data ex xe a aa 186 Process Data sci dak a PRSE EM ER Ee t 186 ANOS deu Eoo ME A oe saec Tau east 187 Vessel 1213s o3 yebuedaetetu tes art wee dete uetus uet ea a 188 Vessel 2 hie aeo Ohm vu teet mE ins ease MERDA A REGERE 189 Leak Detection Page 22 nost er Roe anus Ba at Rude d ADR dd P 190 Tank Analysis Methods 00 00 cece eh 191 12 Configuring Automated Data Output 193 Program Location enana A BR a 193 Output File Types 0 020 194 Automated Data Output Configuration Dialog 0 0 0 0 195 Varec Inc 7 13 Configuring Automated Data Output ooooccoccocococ eee 198 Initial Setups Lieb EE ati e a e 198 Setting Calculation Methods 0044 199 Volume correction methods 0 0 0 eee 199 Data rounding 1 23 rra pte arme aed otha et edo bd Mada pio dye dde ad 199 Volume correction techniques ooooooocooo sls 200 Petrole m tables ici a uarie ded eod Ren d ROS ate 200 Chemical tables 5 c2 2 aac deiude Ppa upon n a ea ane Paper ae ed 202 Liquid Hydrocarbon Gas Table liliis 203 Asphalt Tables edv exui EU ek to a A e Add 203 Polynomials ct a ds ater tol ttn M ISO Dah alain DOR EIS
124. 297 Point Parameters Tank Points Process Data VOLUME REMAINING GROSS GROSS REMAINNG VOLUME This process variable is the Gross Volume of product that can be added to the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the current Gross Volume from the Gross Volume at the maximum working level However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOLUME AVAILABLE GROSS GROSS AVAILABLE VOLUME This process variable is the Gross Volume of product that can safely be issued from the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the Gross Volume at the minimum working level from the current Gross Volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator MASS REMAINING REMAINING MASS This process variable is the Mass of product that can be added to the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the current Mass from the Mass at the maximum working level However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator MASS AVAILABLE AVAILABLE MASS This process variable is the Mass of product that can safely be issued from the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the Mass at the minimum working level from the current Mass However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging system
125. 3 4 4 x X 1 35 x X2 0 15 x X3 Calculate critical temperature from liquid density at 15 C as TC 364 13 33 x X 8 5 x X2 1 833 x X3 Varec Inc 225 Setting Calculation Methods Calculate critical pressure from liquid density at 15 C as PC 43 2 283 x X 0 05 x X2 0 0667 x X3 TR TV 273 2 TC Where TR Temperature of vapor Calculate reduced temperature from vapor temperature and critical temperature as Calculate reduced pressure from vapor space pressure and critical pressure as PR P 1 013 PC Where P pressure in vapor space Calculate W as W 0 214 0 034333 x X 0 005 x X2 0 0001667 x X3 Calculate z by locating the smallest root of Z Z Zx A B B2 AxB where 2 PR A 9 42747 xL XR TR B 0 08564 x PR TR L 1 0 48 1 574 x W 0 176 x W2 x 1 SQR TR This may be solved by Newton Raphson as follows Z 1 5 20 F Z3 Z2 Z x A B B2 A x B IF ABS F lt 0 0001 THEN 70 F1 3 x Z2 2 x Z A B B2 Z Z F F1 GOTO 20 check range of Z 70 IFZ lt 0 2ORZ gt 2THENZ 1 RETURN This routine always appears to converge and to give Z in the range 0 2 to 1 which is correct for typical LPG storage conditions Vapor density is calculated from molecular weight vapor temperature vapor spac
126. 48 Unsigned 32 bit 0 to 4 294 967 295 cubic yards Floating Point 3 4E 38 7 digits Long Float Point 1 7E 308 15 digit Imperial Gallon Time amp Date Flow Volume jBarrel Oil Date Only Time Only z _o a Figure 5 5 Left Select Data Storage Format window Figure 5 6 Right Select Engineering Units window 1 If needed you can select a modifier by clicking the Modifier button 2 Select the appropriate Modifier and click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog 3 If you are using a numeric format you can set the minimum and maximum value by enter ing the parameters in the Min Value and Max Value fields Entering Details for an input output point Variable Format Details Input Source r Alarm Event Configuration Alarm Defined Edit Alarm Input Translation Table None ba Figure 5 7 Details tab Input Output point 1 From the Edit Point window select the Details tab 2 You can make Alarm Event Configurations for the input output point here by clicking Edit Alarm and setting up alarms for the point See Administering Alarms section for more details 3 Click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog 4 You can select an Input Translation Table by making a selection in the list You can also view and edit translation tables by clicking the browse button 76 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Translations Scaling Functions Impo
127. 5 Local Diag 275 Enhanced 305 Mid Int Level 330 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Coded Variables 246 IMUX Master 276 Follow Level 306 Upper Density 247 IMUX Slave 277 LON 307 Middle Density 248 LRC 278 MTS Master 308 Bottom Density 249 CRC 279 Measure 309 Rel Over Tens 250 Passive 280 Set Time 310 Calibration Act 251 L amp J Master 281 Start Leak Mode 311 Shipment 252 L amp Slave 282 Stop Leak Mode 312 Receipt 253 Enraf Master 283 ETA HiHi Level 313 Water Drain Varec Inc 331 Point Parameters Modifiers The standard FuelsManager modifiers are listed below Modifiers are used when the coded variable data format type is selected You can select a modifier from the available list or create a custom modifier MODIFIER NAME COMMAND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Active Inactive Active Inactive Enable Disable Enable Disable Manual Off Auto Manual Off Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto On Off On Off Open Close Open Close Raise Lower Raise Lower Run Stop Run Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start Stop Reset Start Stop Reset Trip Reset Trip Reset Up Down Up Down Fill Mode Inactive Xfr by Level Xfr by Volume Xfr by Diff Vol Xfr by Mass Xfr by Diff Mass Tank Mode Stop Fill Empty Run Test Reset ITG 60 70 Raise Head Lower Head Clear Run Immed Follow Wtr Lvl Find Wtr Lvl Find
128. 9 labels 161 redrawing screen 172 symbols 165 tools 158 values 162 window 148 exiting Draw 148 file indexes 156 files 152 merging 158 purging 158 saving 157 for alarms 56 generating files 155 grid Draw 149 indexes 156 opening Draw 148 template graphic 154 graphs bar 163 grid Draw 149 groups movement 138 H help files for alarms 56 managing 36 historical reports 267 history movement 133 hybrid tank calculations 230 hydrostatic tank calculations 230 I O point connections 122 importing alarm templates 53 global alarms 53 points 57 product movements 140 indexes 156 input points creating 74 definition 66 interface communications 119 FuelsManager 10 K keyboard shortcuts Draw 179 L labels 161 Leak Detection alarms 187 ArchiveManager 184 Edit Tank Data 186 explanation 181 Mass Analysis 182 security 183 tank analysis methods 191 tank analysis types 182 Volumetric Analysis 181 levels database 72 licensing options 1 limits alarm building with Build button 61 creating 60 deleting 60 editing 60 reset holdoff 60 limits alarms 59 local alarms assigning 54 creating 54 definition 46 editing 55 locked interfaces and devices 121 logging in to Web Server 269 logs 64 lookup tables 39 LPG calculations sample 227 LPG quantity calculation 220 M maintenance communications interfaces 123 Mass Analysis 182 Varec Inc merging graphic files 158 modifiers 35 modules sealing 246 movement
129. ADM010GVAE0713 FuelsManager aaa OIL amp GAS gt Q 3 3 0 oh m1 Q eh e im 1 Q gt 9 Automation Solutions for oil amp gas defence and aviation applications Copyright All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976 no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of the Publisher Varec Inc 5834 Peachtree Corners East Norcross Atlanta Georgia 30092 Phone 770 447 9202 Fax 770 662 8939 Trademarks Acknowledged Varec Inc recognizes all other trademarks Trademarks of other products mentioned in this manual are held by the companies producing them FuelsManager TankView TacFuels and Varec are registered trademarks of Varec Inc Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Crystal Reports is a registered trademark of Business Objects HTML DHTML XML XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology Microsoft WINDOWS NT EXCEL Word PowerPoint and SQL Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation SAP SAP Logo R 3 mySAP mySAP com and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as wel
130. ANK MATERIAL If this parameter defines the material from which the tank shell is constructed Different materials have different thermal coefficients of expansion and hence expand or contract at different rates The selection of tank material will effect the calculated tank shell correction factor TANK SHELL CORRECTION EXPCOEF This parameter defines the material expansion coefficient used in the tank shell correction calculations Manual entry of this value is not allowed except when the Tank Material is set to Other INSTALL TEMP This parameter stores the outside ambient temperature when the tank was brought into service CATHODIC PROTECTION This variable denotes that this tank is fitted with Cathodic protection used for reporting and information only OVERFILL PROTECTION This variable denotes that this tank is fitted with Overfill protection used for reporting and information only SPILL PROTECTION This variable denotes that this tank is fitted with Cathodic protection used for reporting and information only TANK SHELL CORRECTION ENABLE CORRECTION If this option is selected FuelsManager compensates the Net Std volume for the thermal expansion effects of the tank shell If the option is not selected the Tank Shell Correction factor equals 1 hence no correction TANK SHELL CORRECTION SHELL INSULATION If this option is selected FuelsManager uses the insulated tank correction equation wh
131. Alarm Lim its on page 59 5 Under Alarm Limit Enable disable or enable individual alarm limit as appropriate To do this select a limit and then click the Enable or Disable button No status is shown for enabled limits 6 To assign a graphic to the alarm use the Alarm Graphic options as described on page 56 7 To assign a help file text or Windows Help to the alarm use the Alarm Help options as described on page 57 8 Under Alarm Event Category select an alarm category if appropriate You can assign alarms to alarm categories see the Security section to ensure that operators are only presented with the alarms that apply to them For more information about alarm categories including instructions for adding categories see page 12 9 Click the OK button Editing a Local Alarm You can modify a local alarm to change the alarm conditions and reset other parameters such as alarm graphics and alarm categories 1 Open the Alarm Assignments window for the database point to which the alarm is assigned Varec Inc 55 Configuring Alarms and Events Alarm Assignments Alarm Limits Alarm Limit Enable Local Alarm Edit Template Limit C Global Alarm Alarm Name Alarm Graphic Select Alarm Help Select Alarm Event Category Default Event Definition Event Enabled Cancel Help r Figure 4 5 Alarms Assignments window 2 Modify the settings as appropriate For detailed i
132. E This parameter defines whether the strapping table starts at the minimum and increments to the maximum level volume pair innage or starts at the maximum level volume pair and decrements to the minimum outage STRAP WATER TABLE MODE This parameter defines the mode of Strap and Water tables used Combined or Separated Combined uses a single table for both water and strap calculations Separated uses individual tables for strap and water calculations POLYNOMIAL SPHERE This parameter enables the special Polynomial Sphere strapping table when selected in Tank Geometry The Polynomial Sphere strapping table uses a polynomial equation to calculate volume based on level 317 Point Parameters Input points process data Input Points Process Data DESCRIPTION POINT DESCRIPTION This process variable is the name by which the input point is known to the user This variable is entered when configuring the input point but cannot be modified via Operate PROCESS VALUE PROCESS VARIABLE OR SETPOINT This process variable is the current value of the input point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems but can also be manually entered by the operator ALARM STATUS COMPOSITE ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority alarm for the input point Possible values depend on
133. E Replace the current string selection with the text in the Edit String text box INSERT Insert a new blank string above the selected string CLEAR Clear the current string selection of any text DELETE Delete the current string selection from the list completely Importing exporting string information User defined strings can be imported or exported using comma delimited text files csv The header and strings have to be imported exported separately Importing strings 1 Inthe Configuration window select the Strings command from the Resources menu From the Strings sub menu select Add Type The String Configuration window appears 2 Select either Header or String option button The Header options button import header information user defined name and maximum length The String option button imports the string the list of strings for the user defined type 3 Click Import Varec Inc 33 Setting System Parameters 4 The Import User String Header or the User String table appears 5 Select the file to import and click Open 6 The String Configuration window displays the Header or String information imported Coded variables Coded Variables are used for input and output processing as well as alarm processing Coded Variables can be used to build alarms and to display process or equipment status on graphics and reports FuelsManager allocates the first 512 Coded Variables These standard Coded Varia
134. Entry Messages Products Product Groups Exit Messages Product Messages If you assign this right to a User Group you should also assign the View Product Data right to the User Group 6 Click the Security Rights button Assign security rights to the User Group as follows Refer to the table below for information about each security right a Inthe Unassigned Rights list select the security right s that Users in this group should have b Click the lt lt button The security right s appear in the Assigned Rights list Field Description Varec Inc 273 Configuring the FuelsManager Web Server Field Description Modify Reports When a User with this right logs in the User can add or modify a Report and add or modify a Report Group using the Configuration Reports node on the left tree view The following nodes are available on the left tree view Configuration Reports If you assign this right to a User Group you should also assign the View Reports right to the User Group Modify Sites and Site Groups When a User with this right logs in the User can modify Sites Sites Entity Ownership Sites Stations and Sites Tanks If you assign this right to a User Group you should also assign the View Sites and Site Groups right to the User Group Modify System Settings When a User with this right logs in the System node is available on the left tree view and the User can make changes
135. Event Creating an event is a restricted version of building a local alarm you build or select alarm limits conditions and identify the definition as an event Alarm graphics and alarm help files are not used with events 1 Open the Alarm Assignments window as described on page 54 Alarm Assignments Alarm Limits Alarm Limit Enable Local Alarm Edit Template Limit Status C Global Alarm Alarm Name Alarm Graphic Select Alarm Help Select Alarm Event Category Default v Event Definition Event Enabled Cancel Help r Figure 4 6 Alarms Assignments window 62 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 7 Under Alarm Limits select the Local Alarm option if it is not already selected Under Alarm Limits click the Edit button The Define Alarm Process window appears a Type in a test condition by entering the Test Type the Test Value and the Result or use the Build feature In the Pri edit box type in a priority 0 Lowest through 3 High est b Enter the attributes such as Use Hysteresis and Reset Holdoff value The attributes have the functionality and purpose as defined in the Defined Global Alarm window c Click Add to enter the test condition into the condition list Repeat the build and add process until all alarm test conditions have been added Click OK when all test conditions are entered The Alarm Assignments window appears Under Alarm Limit Enable disab
136. FMCommiManager exe 90112 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program Files FuelsManager FMCONFIG dil 720896 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriFMDataManager exe 438272 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManagerniFMReportManager exe 126976 11 22 2004 2 14 C Program Files FuelsManager FMSecurityClient dil 135168 11 22 2004 2 14 C Program FilesiFuelsManageniFMSYSTEM dil 561152 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriFMSystemManager exe 425984 11 22 2004 2 1 C Program FilesiFuelsManageriFMUSR exe 1011712 11 22 2004 2 14 E CaProgram FilesiFuelsManageriFMUSRLIB dil 241664 11 22 2004 2 1 yy gt ET Figure 14 9 Module Seals dialog available in Security A checkbox shows the Seal State for each module A check indicates the module is sealed while an unchecked box indicates no current seal is applied Changing a Seal State for a module 1 In Security Click Module Seals from the W amp M menu The Module Seals dialog appears 2 Click the checkbox that corresponds to the module you want to change The Update Seals button becomes available Click Update Seals A prompt appears to confirm the changes 4 Click OK If any Seal State changes are checked a prompt appears to enter the Weights amp Measures password Otherwise the prompt is simply for confirmation 5 Enterthe password The Weights amp Measures password must be properly entered to modify the Tag Seals W amp M Logic The following is a summary of the logic used whe
137. Farm Tank 1 Tank Level Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Temperature Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Density Cale TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Water Level Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank 985 Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Volume Gross Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Volume Net Cale TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Volume Remaini Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Volume Availab Calc TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Standard Densi Manual TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Mass Cale TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Solids Level Manual TankFarm Tank 4 Tank Flow Cale TankFarm Tank 4 Tank Water Volume Calc TankFarm Tank 4 Tank Gauge Position None TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Density Temper None TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Solids Volume Calc Figure 5 24 Left Database menu select the Source Assignments command Figure 5 25 Right Database IO Connections window for descriptions refer to the table opposite FuelsManager provides access to all data point assignments in one window to simplify management of Points in a database Database IO Connections window CURRENT DATABASE SYSTEM The Current Database System displays the name of the system that hosts the currently selected database DATABASE BUTTON Clicking Database displays the Select FMDataManager Subsystem window to allow selection of another system s database TYPES SELECTED POINT This option buttons allows filtering of the point types appear in the Database Point list Tank Points displays all tank p
138. Figure 3 4 Edit Product Definition window Assignment Options Product In addition to the Name and Description of the Product Definitions you can also set the product to use a Correction Method Standard Density and Temperature Limits You can have different options for each Product Assignment Options Y Use Correction Method Use Standard Density Use Temperature Limits Figure 3 5 Product Assignment Options Edit Product Definitions dialog 30 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Selecting one or more of the options above ensures that when a Product is assigned to a tank point the corresponding parameters are automatically applied to the tank Use Correction Method Select the Correction Method checkbox when you want to use Correction Methods This enables the Type and Specific list boxes Select the Type of Correction Method you want to use then select the Specific method You may be required to enter additional data in the Correction Factors fields Use Standard Density Standard Density lets you set the specific density that will be used for the Product This enables the Standard Density field so you can enter the appropriate figure Edit Product Definition Product Name 20 chars CRUDE v Use Standard Density Description 30 chars Crude Oil TT Use Temperature Limits r Correction Method Temperature Alarms Type Specific No F X Standard Temperature p Corr
139. FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server page 289 This task may have been performed previously If so skip the task Creating a User in Windows for Reports When the FuelsManager Web Server receives a request for a report SQL Server Reporting Services uses the Windows system user account on the Web Server machine to request the report from the Web Server The Report can then be sent to the browser on the client system 1 Create a new Windows user on the Web Server system with the following properties user name RPTUSER domain local domain 2 Assign the new RPTUSER user to the following user groups Users and SQLServer2005ReportingServicesWebServiceUser domain MSSQLSERVER Where domain the local domain for the Web Server machine MSSQLSERVER is the database instance name 3 Select the User Cannot Change Password and the Password Never Expires checkboxes Create a User in SQL Server for Databases Under the main security node in SQL Server 2005 do the following 1 Under the main security node in SQL Server 2005 create the user RPTUSER under Logins Be sure to use the domain name i e doma n RPTUSER This allows the ReportViewer to log in to SQL Server 2005 282 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Under the ReportServer database security node add the RPTUSER user with the following database role membership db_datareader db_datawriter db_owner and RSExecRole Under the Cons
140. Gauge I O Fail 216 Goto Full Scale 128 Primary 158 Transfer Out 187 Device Alarm 217 Hand 129 Raise 159 Transferring 188 Field Cfg Modif 218 Invalid 130 Raised 160 Trip 189 Raise Failure 219 Midnight 131 Raising 161 Tripped 190 Lower Failure 220 Time of Day 132 Ramp 162 True 191 Upload Failure 221 Process 133 Ready 163 U R 192 DnLoad Failure 222 Fill 134 Remote 164 Unauthorized 193 Raise Head 223 Filling 224 Empty 254 Enraf Slave 284 ETA High Level 314 Run Down 225 Emptying 255 GPP 285 ETA Low Level 315 Charge 226 Test 256 GPU 286 ETA LoLo Level 316 Blend 227 Testing 257 CIU 287 DB Empty 228 Stopped 258 Block 288 Not Programmed 229 Xfr by Diff Vol 259 Freeze 289 DB Download 230 In Progress 260 Lock Test 290 Programming 231 Advisory 261 Get ID 291 Leak Probe 232 Complete 262 Set Gauge Data 292 Generic Gauge 233 Overfill 263 Get Stored Data 293 GPE Master 234 Minimum 264 Rejected 294 Out of Service 235 Maximum 265 Auto Configure 295 AC 236 RTU Master 266 Redundant 296 DC 237 RTU Slave 267 Independent 297 Fifteen Minutes 238 TIWAY Master 268 Download 298 Port 1 Fail 239 TIWAY Slave 269 Upload 299 Port 2 Fail 240 MODBUS Master 270 Whessoe Bus 300 Print 241 MODBUS Slave 271 TSU Slave 301 Printer 242 HART Master 272 AB Slave 302 V1 Master 243 HART Slave 273 AB Master 303 Rackbus Master 244 Peer to Peer 274 Standard 304 Upper Int Level 24
141. Help Several forms of Help are provided to maximize operator proficiency User defined Help files may be created and then linked to graphics displays and alarms Client Applications The FuelsManager client applications include FuelsManager Configuration Operate Report Draw FuelsManager Services FMSystemManager FMSystemManager performs master initialization and scheduling for the FuelsManager System It starts up the previously mentioned server programs on its local machine In addition it provides shared system resources Coded Variables Modifiers Engineering Units Strings Products Graphic File Names Help File Names and up to 16 sets of User Defined String tables and services that are used by all FuelsManager programs Each machine contains FMSystemManager which must be started before any other FuelsManager program FuelsManager can be set up to start FMSystemManager manually or as a service When started as a service FMSystemManager automatically starts when Windows opens It also executes under the SYSTEM account so it is not necessary for a user to be logged into the system for FMSystemManager to execute System Start up After loading and initializing the shared system resources FMSystemManager then starts up programs such as FMDataManager FMCommManager ArchiveManager and ReportManager The selection of programs depends on the local FuelsManager configuration The startup mode of each program can be configured usi
142. K The system imports the alarms and displays them in the Global Alarms Definitions window Exporting a Global Alarms and Templates 1 From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Alarms com mand the Global Alarm Definitions window appears Click Export to export all alarms or select the global alarm to export The Export Alarm Definition File window appears Enter an export file name and click OK The system saves the global alarm s in a comma delimited text file with the csv extension Varec Inc 53 Configuring Alarms and Events Working with Local Alarms A local alarm is an set of alarm conditions that are specified for a single database point variable You can build a local alarm from the foundation or you can use generic alarm templates see page 50 as a starting point Refer to the following procedures to manage local alarms Accessing the alarm configuration for a point on page 54 Creating and Assigning a Local Alarm on page 54 Editing a Local Alarm on page 55 To remove an alarm assignment see page 57 Accessing the alarm configuration for a point This procedure prepares you for building or editing a local alarm for a database point or assigning a global alarm to a database point 1 From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Points com mand The Database Edit window appears 2 Select the input or output point for
143. L subtract 189 35 US Gals Solids Volume SOLVOL subtract 34 12 US Gals 434 994 85 US Gals 434 994 8500000000 Correction for Temperature of CTSh multiply 1 00016 1 0001640643225 Shell 435 066 22 US Gals 435066 2171353560 Floating Roof Adjustment FRA subtract 86 61765 US Gals 86 61764706 Gross Observed Volume GOV 434 979 60 US Gals 434 979 5994882970 Correction for Product VCF multiply 0 99230 Temperature Correction for BS amp W BS amp W multiply 1 00000 Net Standard Volume NSV 431 630 26 US Gals 431630 2565722380 Available Product Gross 285 265 11 233 Setting Calculation Methods Calculated or Derived Data Symbol Action Values Units Values used in Reported calculations rounded unrounded Available Product Net 283 068 57 Remaining Product Gross 414 849 73 Remaining Product Net 411 655 39 Notes Quantity derived from tank strapping table using level value to enter table Quantity derived from tank strapping table or separate water table using water level value to enter table Quantity derived from tank strapping table using solids level value to enter table Gross volume uncorrected for temperature effects and floating roof adjustment 5 From API Tables 5 6B Net volume corrected to 60 F Flow calculations The following sections detail how FuelsManager performs Flow calculations
144. LL s and report displays files by W amp M official such that if the files are changed in any way the system will not display data in a W amp M approved fashion A display that lets W amp M officials quickly check the installed program elements against the program elements that were approved Indicators on all displays when a W amp M official has sealed a particular tank variable W amp M approved displays to include at least W amp M Approved indication Legend of all status signs Engineering units Tank Name Level Product Temperature Water Volume Product Std Density TOV GSV Mass Volume Correction Methods Standard Temperature for Correction Methods Application of calibration seals for individual variables per tank Application of calibration seals to tank points in the 8130 RTU Ensure that unauthorized modification of system data both propriety and open databases is detected and then not displayed as W amp M approved These requirements have been provided for in FuelsManager and the 8130 RTU by Module Seal and Tag Seal features described in the following sections These features are combined with Microsoft Windows XP 2000 Security to insure the integrity of the data Varec Inc 237 Using Weights and Measures System Overview System Overview NMS 8130 RTU FuelsManager V1 Protocol 8130 Protocol 8213 CM T 8203 5 AM Rackhus Protocol
145. Level lt Low level Alarm Low Low level Alarm or User Defined Level lt Water Volume Level lt Minimum level as defined in the strap table If these conditions are not met the available volume calculation is defined as using the following equations Net Available Volume NAV Current Net Volume of Tank SVC FW x CTSh x 100 0 BS amp W 100 0 FRA x VCF Available Mass AM NAV x Standard Density Gross Available Volume GAV Current Gross Volume of Tank SVC FW x CTSh FRA Where SVC Strap Volume at the Minimum Working level FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any CTSh Tank Shell Correction FRA Floating Roof Adjustment VCF volume correction Factor Remaining volume remaining mass Remaining volume is defined as the amount of net or gross volume that can be pumped into a tank It is calculated as 0 if none or more of the following conditions are true Level High level Alarm High High level Alarm or User Defined Level gt Maximum level as defined in the strap table If these conditions are not met the remaining volume calculation is defined using the following equations Varec Inc 219 Setting Calculation Methods Net Remaining Volume NRV SVC FW x CTSh x 100 0 BS amp W 100 0 FRA x VCF Current Net Volume in Tank
146. MI s and other display clients FuelsManager currently support the following OPC specifications OPC Data Access v1 0 OPC DA 1 0 OPC Data Access v2 05a OPC DA 2 05a The OPC DA specification defines interfaces for both OPC clients and OPC servers Typically clients are HMI or other data gathering display programs client applications can browse OPC servers and allow you to select which OPC tags the client will read OPC servers typically provide communications to from devices further down the system hierarchy OPC servers encapsulate the specific details of talking to the device s and provide a well defined set of OPC tags that the client can connect to FuelsManager can operate simultaneously as both an OPC client and OPC server FuelsManager can be an OPC client and communicate with OPC server for Tank Gauges PLC s and other remote I O to gather data from the field At the same time FuelsManager can be providing data to DCS s and other business systems via its OPC server interface 70 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Office Systems ERP Systems DCSs SCADA Systems FuelsManager PLCs q Tank gauges Remote I O OPC Server Tags FuelsManager s OPC server exposes all database points created in the FuelsManager real time database to OPC clients The exact structure of the OPC tags depends on the database structure defined for your project Also the method for browsing and selecting
147. ML data files Monitor for leak conditions Integrated statistical analysis of historical data designed to detect possible leaks from underground storage tanks to EPA standards Estimate tank emissions Offline analysis of historical 4 data provides throughput calculations to assist with EPA Title V permitting Share information more effectively A web interface Y allows you to publish your facility s operational information and reports to users throughout your organization Custom applications that allows access via the FMAPI Y Requires FuelsManager Oil amp Gas to be installed at integrated facilities Requires FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Standard or Professional Edition to operate Product Movement System requires FuelsManager Professional Edition to operate Varec Inc 3 Introduction System Architecture The FuelsManager System consists of a real time database and integrated applications and services that interact in a client server architecture using the Windows XP Windows 7 or Windows 2003 2008 Server operating systems This section describes the real time database and the FuelsManager services Management Information System Serial Host Links A Host Webserver Servers Networked Printer Optional Redundant Server Data Server Clients Stand Alone Workstation Data z Acquisition i RTUs PLCs Tank Gauging Instrumenta
148. Manager to archive points and associated variables to a relational database management system RDMS with an ODBC interface MS SQL Access etc This chapter also explains how to start and shutdown ArchiveManager ArchiveManager Prerequisite You must setup a user in FMConfiguration to enable ArchiveManager to access data The user must be named System and must be assigned to the Administrator group See Users and Groups on page 16 for details on setting up this user Opening ArchiveManager You can access the ArchiveManager Configuration window from the Database menu in the FuelsManager Configuration application 1 In the Configuration window click Database 2 Click ArchiveManager The Archive Manager Configuration window appears and is shown below Varec Inc 109 Archiving Information Archive Manager Configuration xi Database Real time Database NSER 1 552 TLSR6 Select Historical Database Connect Options Archive All Points Add Specify Points Tanks input Flow Meters Output Select Points Pipeline Archiving Parameters Archive on data change Archive with a static interval 10 in Minutes Start Time 00 00 HH MM Historical Period 30 in Days Tank Point Variable Width Precision Y Density Maximum Double Density Minimum Double Density Units Units Density Double Description Desc Flow Maximum Double Flow Minimum Double Flow Units Units Flow Do
149. Manager via the PntStatus parameter in the particular RTU point The bit position of the WMSeal information is specific to 242 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas the particular point type FuelsManager automatically knows which bit position contains the WMSeal information FuelsManager combines this WMSeal information from the 8130 RTU with its own W amp M Seal information in order to determine if the particular data value is W amp M approved Sealing TankPoint variables in FuelsManager The FuelsManager Tank Database includes Tag Seal Data for each tank The Tag Seal Data includes a seal for the Tank a seal for each input Process Variable and an integer Seal ID that denotes the revision of Tank Seal Data The Tank Database is stored in file FM_TankPoint dat in the FuelsManager project directory FM_TankPoint dat is a proprietary database file and is only accessible through FMDataManager exe Library Tnkcnfg dll is the Tank Configuration client component of FuelsManager and includes the Edit Tank Data dialog Applying the Software Seals Tank seals can be configured from the W amp M tab of the Edit Tank dialog in Configuration Edit Tank Data gt SUTCLIFFE2 WTest WAM Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Calibration Seals Y Tank Y Level Temperature vi Density Water Level BSW Volume Gro
150. NSV Net Standard Volume TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free Water CTSh Tank Shell Correction VCF Volume Correction Factor BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities 216 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas MASS Default Mass is defined as net standard volume corrected for density at the observed temperature The following equation is used to calculate Mass Mass NSV x Standard Density In tables where density is expressed in API Density is calculated as Density KG M3 141 5 x 999 012 API Gravity 131 5 Japanese correction methods If a volume correction method with the Japan designation is selected The following additional options are available Weight in air NW NSV x r15 0 0011 Where NW Net Weight NSV Net Standard Volume r15 15 C liquid density 0 0011 atmosphere conversion coefficient Weight in a pressurized tank NW NSV x r15 GW 273 gt GW V max VG x GDx 1 P 273 GT The GW is the Gas weight derived by following equation Where NW Net Weight NSV Net Standard Volume r15 15 C liquid density GW Gas weight GD Gas density P Gas Pressure GT Gas Temperature Varec Inc 217 Setting Calculation Methods The Molar method NW
151. NSV r15 0 0011 GW The GW is the Gas Weight derived by following equation 273 y 1 033 P M 1 1 273 GT GW V max GOV x p15 0 0011 XT xX xX 1 033 22 4 pl5 1000 Where NW Net Weight NSV Net Standard Volume GW Gas weight GOV Gross Observed Volume Vmax Total Tank Capacity r15 15 C liquid density P Gas Pressure GT Gas Temperature M Mole constant Food oil method NW GOV x r15 Where NW Net Weight GOV Gross Observed Volume r15 15 C liquid density Chinese Correction Method If the GB T Volume Correction Method is selected the following additional mass calculation options are available Sinopec Method NW NSV x p20 1 1 G x 1 W PetroChina Method NW NSV x 1 W x p20 0 0011 Where NSV Net Standard Volume Sinopec method NSV in liters PetroChina method NSV in M3 W Water percentage BSW G Floating root mass kg p20 Density of product 20 C Kg m3 NW is returned in kg for Sinopec method NW is returned in metric tones for PetroChina method 218 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Available volume available mass Available Volume is defined as the amount of net or gross volume available for pumping out of a tank It is calculated as 0 if one or more of the following conditions are true
152. Oil amp Gas facility but then segregate the tanks based on logical areas of plant such as West Tank Farm East Tank Farm and Docks Note This process of defining which database points are in which alarm tag category takes places as part of database configuration and is detailed in the Database section FuelsManager allows the creation of up to 32 alarm and 32 tag categories Once defined alarm and tag categories are assigned to a user group under the Access branch and only users in those groups have access to the tags in the categories Categories can be assigned to more than one group allowing an overlapping of alarm and tag categories From our example above we created categories for West Tank Farm East Tank Farm and Docks typically these might be assigned to user groups of the same name We could then create another user group called Managers and assign all three categories to this group Using the categories and tags the Managers user group would be able to see all tanks across the entire facility Working with Alarm Categories Alarms can have a defined report manager printer start time print interval and the choice to enable the print Note The Name column can be sorted by clicking the Name column heading An A indi cates the column is sorted in ascending order a D indicates the column is sorted in descending order Creating Deleting or Renaming Alarm Categories Use this example to Create an alarm but you can a
153. Operate interface but cannot be modified Varec Inc 295 Point Parameters Tank Points Process Data BSW BOTTOM SEDIMENT AND WATER This process variable is the percentage of impurities bottoms sediment and water in the product if required the operator usually manually enters this variable however the variable can be linked to automatic gauging systems if required BSW TIME TIME OF LAST BS amp W UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank BSW was updated VOLUME GROSS GROSS TANK VOLUME This process variable is the total measured volume of the product in the tank corrected for Water Level BSW and Roof Volume FuelsManager normally calculates this from the tank gauge reading and the tank strapping table however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOLUME TIME GROSS TIME OF LAST GROSS VOL UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank gross volume was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VOLUME NET CORRECTED TANK VOLUME This process variable is the corrected volume of the product in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by multiplying the Gross Volume by the Volume Correction Factor however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOLUME TIME NET
154. Performs hardware configuration protocol translation and data conversion functions required to support the device These functions may also include downloads and uploads from the field device Converts device data from all field devices for transmission to the FMDataManager The CommManager may poll the field devices or accept unsolicited data from the devices based on device capabilities Translation may include simple data type conversion engineering units conversion or more complex calculations such as tank calculations Relays information from the device to the FMDataManager upon changes to device dynamic data Transmits data to field devices by processing output requests from the FMDataManager ReportManager This program controls the scheduling of reports according to the print times specified when each report is created Alarm Event reports are categorized into Alarm Groups Each Alarm Group is scheduled to print at a specific time and interval If no alarms or events occurred within the interval a report will still be printed indicating that no alarms or events occurred during the interval ArchiveManager This program controls the extraction of information from FMDataManager and stores it to an alternate data source usually a third party ODBC compliant relational database FuelsManager Applications FuelsManager can be configured and maintained through several Windows based user applications FuelsManager Configuration Operate
155. R BOTTOM VOLUME This process variable is the volume of water in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this from the water level value and the tank strapping table however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator GAUGE POSITION LEVEL GAUGE POSITION This process variable is the current position of the tank level gauge measuring head This variable is only applicable to servo type tank gauges where the measuring device can be positioned at points in the tank other than the product level This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator GAUGE POSITION TIME GAUGE POSITION TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank gauge position was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE FOR MEASURED DENSITY This process variable is the measured temperature at the time the density data was last updated If entered FuelsManager uses this data to convert the density data to corrected density This variable is normally measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator Typically tank gauges that support density measurements provide this data Otherwise the laboratory may provide this data for manual entry DENSITY TEMP TIME DENSITY TEMP TIME This process variable is the last time tha
156. RED This variable is the amount of volume transferred into or out of a tank during the tank transfer or the amount transferred thus far if a transfer is active TRANSFER TOTAL CURRENT TRANSFERRED BASED ON MODE This variable is the amount of volume level mass transferred into or out of a tank during the tank transfer or the amount transferred thus far if a transfer is active Units are based on the selected transfer mode TRANSFER MASS CURRENT MASS TRANSFERRED This variable is the amount of mass transferred into or out of a tank during the tank transfer or the amount transferred thus far if a transfer is active TRANSFER TIME REMAIN REMAINING TIME TO FILL OR EMPTY This variable is the time left to complete an active transfer based on the amount left to transfer and the current flow rate TRANSFER START TIME TIME AT WHICH TRANSFER BEGAN This variable is the time at which a currently active transfer started If no transfer is active this variable displays the time that the last transfer was started 302 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Product Transfer Data TRANSFER COMPLETE TIME TRANSFER FINISH TIME This variable is the time at which a last product transfer ended TRANSFER LEVEL SETPOINT TRANSFER LEVEL SETPOINT This variable is the current level shutdown setpoint If no transfer is active this variable displays the level shutdown setpoint for
157. S flOW coti ate aos Zub a RR PE de S Bead a dd 235 a os 235 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 14 Using Weights and Measures 237 System Overview 2 nn 238 Sealing the Point in 8130 RTU 1 0 2 eee 238 Applying the Software Seal liliis es 241 W amp M Ghiecksutis si tesa gate e RR REX CAN E ELI EA Ee eA 242 W amp M Seal Communications llle 242 Sealing TankPoint variables in FuelsManager lisse 243 Applying the Software Seals llle 243 Changing a Seal State for a Process Variable llli 243 Display of W amp M Indicator on Graphics amp Reports 0055 245 Sealing FuelsManager Modules 000 eee ee eae 246 Changing a Seal State fora module 11 es 247 Setting the W amp M Password osoo dasr dnro era Pera ren 248 SYSTEMS Seal each Gales oh bt da a tele ee oA EA 248 15 Administering Reports 5 00 cece eee eee 251 REDON NR 251 Opening Reports lille rrr 251 Exiting Reports iex unies EPI UR Ie ad eed en tog Beto 251 Predefined standard reports llle 251 Tools and objects for reports liliis 252 Tables 25 e UE duet e ie a Edo ve es 252 Labels x A A dde tb ox DAL E cc LA UNE 252 Vallis sei euo ll eee ed dte tel mee ins acide eta ido baca d 253 SUMMA reports 22 Dao ra Pate Read uper atado kas Ste acted s 254 Creating a new summa
158. SITY This field allows you to edit the strapping table density This value is the density at which the strapping table was created and is used in FuelsManager volume calculations TEMPERATURE This field allows you to edit the strapping table temperature This value is the temperature at which the strapping table was created and is used in FuelsManager volume calculations ADD This button allows you to add a new entry at the end of the strapping table DELETE This button removes the currently selected entry from the strapping table INSERT This button allows you to add a new entry at the currently selected position in the strapping table EXPORT This button allows you to export the tank strapping table to a proprietary formatted text file This allows you to edit the information offline using 3rd party tools like Notepad IMPORT This button allows you to import a previously exported tank strapping table 97 Configuring Database Points Edit Tank Data window Strap Water Table tab STRAP TABLE This group allows you to configure the type of strapping TYPE table to be used either Innage or Outage A tank may be converted from Innage to Outage by simply changing the selection in the Strap table Type The system calculates the new Outage Strap table based on the Innage table and recalculates the new alarm setpoints A tank may also be converted from Outage to Innage by the same process INNAGE The Innage option button
159. Select the Append tool or select Add and click Append Click on area to define corner and hold down mouse button 2 Drag the cursor to define the size of the append and release the mouse button The Append Attributes window appears 3 To display the append as a visible button in your graphic click on the Button is visible under Style and then select a button color 4 Under Type select the Linked Template option 5 Click File in the File Name group box The Template Graphic Database Select window appears 6 Inthe upper list box under Graphic Description select the template graphic that you want to open with the append button When you select a graphic the database points defined as options for this template graphic appear in the lower list box These are referred to as Tem plate Database Defines 7 Inthe lower list box under Template Description select the database point to associate with this append button If the point that you want to associate with the append is not listed you can add it by clicking the Browse button Select the point and click the OK button You can now select this point Varec Inc 169 Creating Graphics 8 Click the OK button The Append Attributes Dialog window appears showing the graphic file name and the selected point under File Name 9 Click the OK button The append is placed in the drawing Inserting a bitmap The Bitmap tool is used to insert a BMP file Bitmaps c
160. Server ReportServer database as described in Opening Report Manager on page 283 Create the report directory s Click the New Folder button Enter a directory name You can use any name but FuelsManager by default refers to a directory called Standard Reports Click OK Creating a Data Source in Report Manager Each report that users obtain through the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server uses one or more data source rds files to obtain information from the database A data source contains a connection definition type or string and user credentials to limit access to the data To define a data source you must provide a name choose a security method and provide instructions for retrieving the data from the database These instructions can be predefined for example in a data extension or you can enter the instructions as text a Connection String 284 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas The standard reports supplied with your FuelsManager Web Server installation use the FuelsManagerDB data source which will have the file name FuelsManagerDB rdl 1 Connect to the Reporting Services Report Manager on the server hosting the Report Server ReportServer database as described in Opening Report Manager on page 283 2 Open the report directory that you created in Create a Reports Directory in Reporting Ser vices on page 284 3 Click the New Data Source button The New Data Sour
161. Setting Calculation Methods Type Method Product Table Entry Range Temp Range Russia GOST 20 C 85 Oil amp Oil Products Density in g cm 0 560 1 060 25 114 C Chemical tables Correction Type Table Entry Product VCF Range Temp Range ASTM D1555 F VCF 60 F 300 F 148 9 C Aromatic 0 9741 1 0296 5 110 F ASTM D1555 F 1980 350 F 176 7 C Aromatic 0 9756 1 0266 5 110 F Benzene 0 9597 1 0130 40 120 F Cumene 0 9670 1 0297 5 120 F Cyclo hexane 0 9597 1 0132 40 120 F Ethyl benzene 0 9660 1 0306 5 120 F Mixed Xylene 0 9671 1 0293 5 120 F o Xylene 0 9683 1 0288 5 120 F p Xylene 0 9496 1 0027 55 150 F Styrene 0 9675 1 0242 15 120 F Toluene 0 9647 1 0383 5 120 F ASTM D1555M C VCF 15 C 300 F 148 9 C Aromatic 0 9729 1 0278 15 44 C ASTM D1555M C 350 F 176 7 C Aromatic 0 9745 1 0262 15 44 C pem ASTM Dibe E Benzene 0 9583 1 0123 4 5 49 5 C Cumene 0 9660 1 0293 15 49 5 C Cyclo hexane 0 9585 1 0126 4 5 49 5 C Ethyl benzene 0 9646 1 0300 15 49 5 C Mixed Xylene 0 9661 1 0289 15 49 5 C o Xylene 0 9673 1 0285 15 49 5 C p Xylene 0 9492 1 0025 12 65 5 C Styrene 0 9664 1 0237 9 5 49 5 C Toluene 0 9634 1 0376 20 5 49 5 C Japan Chemical C Chemical Applications Thermal Expansion Not Specified Coefficient in Alpha x 106 Chemical Applications Thermal Expansion Not Specified Coefficient in Alpha x 106
162. Start the configuration program by selecting Start Programs Automated Data Output Automated Data Output Select the variables to be logged from the Available Tank Variables field and click the gt gt Add gt gt button You can select all the variables to be logged at once and add them simul taneously or add them one at a time Alternatively you can click the Default button and add to or remove from the default set of tank variables Keep in mind that the order in which the variables are displayed in the Tank Variables to be logged field is also the order in which the variables will be written to the output file If you want to use a database point value to trigger the file creation define that point in the Trigger Point and Trigger Value fields Then enter the Reset Value to the value you want to reset the point to after the snapshot file is created If you want to create snapshot files at specific times of day check the box es next to the appropriate Trigger Time fields and enter your time s there Keep in mind these fields are entered using 24 hour time You can enter up to two Trigger Times Specify the snapshot file that you want Automated Data Output to write to by entering in the full path and file name into the Snapshot File field If you want to create a snapshot file using a trigger file when a file exists enter that file s path and filename in the Trigger File field If you want Automated Data Output to create a Pe
163. TD MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMIUM STD DENSITY SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank corrected density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified STD DENSITY UNITS STANDARD DENSITY UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank corrected density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified FLOW MININIUM TANK MINIMUM FLOW SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified FLOW MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM FLOW SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified FLOW UNITS FLOW ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified PRESS VAPOR MININIUM TANK MINIMUM VAPOR PRESSURE SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank vapor pressure process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified PRESS VAPOR MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMIUM VAPOR PRESSURE SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank vapor pressure process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be mo
164. TR 0 427258 x TR2 0 0480645 x TR3 TR 1 00001 Vi VO x 1 Y1 x VD TR TL 273 2 Y2 TT 1 TR 1 3 vo 1 1 52816 x TT 1 43907 x TT2 0 81446 x TT3 0 190454 x TTA VD 0 296123 0 386914 x TR 0 427258 x TR2 0 0480645 x TR3 TR 1 00001 V2 VO x 1 Y1 x VD VCF V1 V2 VCF should be rounded to 5 decimal places The density of liquid at liquid temperature is given by DENL DEN15 x VCF Varec Inc 221 Setting Calculation Methods Step 4 The following formulae are used for making corrections to liquid level gauges a Float buoyancy correction This is necessary to correct for changes in liquid density between calibration and use The correction is achieved as Ah 1273 x 10 x a z aP P Where Ah1 correction to the gauge readout for float buoyancy in mm m mass of float in grams d diameter of float in mm pl density of liquid at the time of calibration p density of liquid at the time of gauging This correction is only applied to float gauges It does not apply to non contact measurement devices Corrected height measured height Dh b Thermal correction This is necessary to account for the thermal expansion of the tank or stilling well and the gauge wire For a float gauge this will be carried out in addition to the buoyancy correction The correction is Ah aw 15 TV HT H o 15 TV HT H 0 15 TL H Wher
165. TY DATA Enable or disable the display of FuelsManager quality information text superscripts displayed in graphic and reports that define from where the data was derived The default setting is unchecked i e quality data is not displayed ALARM EVENT CONFIGURATION Alarm Defined Open the Alarm Assignments window allowing you to define and assign alarm processes to the input output point see Administering Alarms Edit Alarm re open the Alarm Assignments window allowing you to edit previously defined alarm processes for the input output point see Administering Alarms The Edit Alarm button is disabled if not alarms have been defined for this point TRIGGER SETUP Triggered only The minimum repeat interval defines the fastest period that any changes in the monitored value will be sent to the defined destination The maximum repeat interval defines the period of which the monitored value will be sent to the destination regardless of whether the value has changed Setting either the minimum or maximum repeat intervals to zero disables the associated functionality INPUT TRANSLA The translation table FuelsManager uses to decipher the data coming TION TABLE in from the input point OUTPUT The translation table FuelsManager uses before TRANSLATION sending point data to an output destination TABLE Triggered only OUTPUT DESTINATIONS Triggered Only A table listing the data sources that ser
166. The list below displays the points within that OPC source 4 Clickthe to open levels of the database and navigate to the specific data source point and select the point when it appears in the lower right list Click OK to close the OPC Server Source Select window 6 Click OK to close the Select Data Source window Selecting a Local data source Note The local data source selection is only available for the Tank Point Ambient Temper ature parameter 1 Open the Data Source window for the point you want to clear See Opening the Database lO Connections window steps 2 Click Local the Database Edit window opens 3 Browse to the database point you want to assign and click Select 4 Click OK to close the Select Data Source window Engineering Units Conversion The Source Units defined on the Select Data Source window instructs FuelsManager what engineering units the data value being received from the I O points are expressed in So if FuelsManager receives a value of 30 5 and the Source Units are set to feet FuelsManager knows to treat this as 30 5 feet Varec Inc 103 Configuring Database Points Engineering unit conversions can be associated with any database point via the Select Data Source window If the engineering units for the FuelsManager database point do not match those defined for the I O point Source Units it will automatically be converted the engineering units defined for the FuelsManager database p
167. Values must be typed in manually If the data format is a user defined string type the Test Value button will be enabled Clicking the button will show a list of attributes of the applicable user defined string type Varec Inc 61 Configuring Alarms and Events Working with Events Select a test value and then click the OK button Click the Result Code button if it is enabled Select a result code and then click the OK button If the data format is Time and Date you must enter a time and date which will be set to the system default time and date Click the OK button to close the Build Alarm Limit window The new limit statement appears in the Define Global Alarm or Define Alarm Process window Events are changes to a database point value that do not require immediate attention but are important enough to be recorded in a log that operators can review You can assign events to numerical or non numerical point values Examples of events are Operator commands opening a valve or raising a tank gauge Value change by the operator entering a new manual value for water level or changing a high level alarm setpoint Value change by the system communication request from another system via OPC or a CommManager driver to change the density value or issue a command to reset a tank To create an event see page 62 To edit an event see For more information about the alarm amp event log refer to page 64 Creating an
168. Volume by the Std Density However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator MASS TIME TIME OF LAST MASS UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank mass was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified SOLIDS LEVEL BOTTOM SOLIDS LEVEL This process variable is the level of solids in the tank the operator usually manually enters this variable however the variable can be linked to automatic gauging systems if required SOLIDS LEVEL TIME SOLIDS LEVEL TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank solids level was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified 296 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank Points Process Data FLOW TANK INPUT OUPUT FLOW This process variable is the flow of product into or out of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this sampling the gross volume at user defined intervals and averaging the change in volume over a user defined number of samples However this value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator FLOW TIME TIME OF LAST FLOW UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the tank flow was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified WATER VOLUME WATE
169. Water Table Product Level Product Vol Water Level Water Vol 0 0 0 0 1 ft 1000 gal 1 ft 1000 gal 2 ft 2000 gal 2 ft 2000 gal 5 ft 5000 gal 20 ft 20 000 gal Separate Product and Water Tables Separated When configured to use the separate product and water table mode FuelsManager assumes no correlation between the water and product tables Since this mode of operation provides no correlation between the product and water tables it is assumed that the tables start at the same point and overlap in the lower part of the tank Separated strapping and water tables example Product Table A Water Table e doe Product Water volume Measured water level lookup in water table Product volume Measured product level lookup in product table Varec Inc 209 Setting Calculation Methods Floating Roof Adjustment FRA Tanks with floating roofs require a correction to offset the effect of the displacement of the floating roof Default This correction is calculated in the following manner If no floating roof or level is lt Roof Landed Height FRA 0 No Correction Required If floating roof is not included in the strap table FRA Roof Mass ProductDensity If floating roof is included in the strap table FRA RoofMass StrapDensity RoofMass ProductDensity Japanese correction methods If you select any of the correction methods
170. X El Source Units Undefined i Deadband 0 050000 Data Source System MTOBXS208XSOT53A Device Point Description Marec Datalanager 1 UnputPoint Input1 Test Process Value OK Cancel The available source selections include the following Manual Input The Manual data source is used when the operator needs to change the value manually This task is accomplished by issuing Operator Commands in the Operate program where the operator can type in new data or select a command When this data source is selected a SET button appears next to the database point variable for example level in the Tank Detail In the Point Monitor display a modify button appears Entering an Operator Command sends the command directly to the FMDataManager FMDataManager immediately processes an Operator command and issues the command to the appropriate destination based on point configuration Varec Inc 67 Configuring Database Points Operator Command requests are checked against the permissions assigned to the User Group If the command cannot be completed due to security or other reasons the system displays an operator message window describing why the command is disallowed CommManager The Comm option enables you to connect to an external field device Depending on the point data format and variable type only some points can be assigned to the I O connections After selecting the Comm option the Communications Inte
171. a eM ee ed ee ad ED enter 69 OPC Server Support ooocccc elle 70 What is OPG2 3 ves lave du Eus o Re a sTE e 70 OPG Data ACCesS i ED A deae pip cedet ura 70 OPC Server Tags so zat deser A ees wu Fre d lane oe 71 Supported client and server interface illis 71 Setting the Number of Database Levels lile eee 72 Creating Database Points o oooooccococc eens 72 Varec Inc 3 Creating Input and Output Points 2 lese 74 Creating and Editing Triggered Points 0 0 eee 78 Edit Point Window ue ii peg eng ee Maa eA be Eu ERR ed us 80 Creating and Editing Tank Points liiis ee 82 General Information 22s 82 Volume Information sosie siana aa aaan nanea a wed da a de dx RE 83 Process Data Information llle 85 Alarm Information llis 86 Vessel Information Vessel 1 amp Vessel 2 Tabs l l lesen 89 Polynomial Sphere Information 00000 eee eee eee 94 Weights amp Measures Information o ooooooocorrn oro eee 95 Strapping Water Table Information llle 96 Strap Water and Hydro Definition Modes ooooccccccccoooo 98 Leak Detection ata a a e TERIS 99 Assigning Data SouUrcesS o oooooocccoo ren 99 Opening the Database IO Connections Window llle 100 Engineering Units Conversion 000 cece eee ses 103 Configuring Bit Field Data Sources isses 104 Copying
172. able representing the highest priority level alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High High Low Low Low FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current level and the alarms limits configured for the tank LEVEL HIHI LIMIT CURRENT HI HI LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High High level alarm If the tank level exceeds the HiHi Alarm value then a High High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL HIGH LIMIT CURRENT HIGH LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High level alarm If the tank level exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL LOW LIMIT CURRENT LOW LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low level alarm If the tank level falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL LOLO LIMIT CURRENT LO LO LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low Low level alarm If the tank level falls below the LoLo Alarm value then a Low Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with suffi
173. able Net Standard Density Mass Solids Level Flow Water Volume Gauge Position Density Temperature Solids volume Transter Mode Not Assigned Not Assigned Calculated Manual Entry Manual Entry Calculated Calculated Calculated Calculated Manual Entry Calculated Manual Entry Calculated Calculated Not Assigned Not Assigned Calculated Manual Entry LeakManager Variables Assignment Options Leak Rate Calculated Manual Entry Communication Device and OPC The leak rate alarm is used to trigger real time alarms associated with calculated real time leak rate The leak data alarm is used to trigger a real time alarm when there is not enough quiet time in the tank to produce a valid Leak Test Report Note Leak Detection alarms are only functional for Real Time leak analysis Varec Inc 187 Configuring Leak Detection Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 WEM Strap Water Table Leak Detection Gauge Alarm Tank Gauge Alarm E vent Category Default y Alarm state High tigh High Low Low Low 58 00 00 34 00 00 6 00 00 2 00 00 0 00 00 SS os MECO oe AS 000 ETA Leak Rate Leak Data Min gt 34 00 00 Max lt 40 00 00 Engr Units ft in 16th Alarms Description Leak Rate Allows an Enable Disable State and allows the entry of High ab
174. able and then click Select The Select Engineering Units win dow appears if the point variable is numerical At this time the engineering units to be dis played are undefined To view a complete list of engineering units refer to the Shared Sys tems Resources documentation 8 Select the corresponding engineering unit Click Select The Database Value Attributes win dow appears 9 Select the attributes of the point and then select OK The value appears in the selected cell Varec Inc 257 Administering Reports DataBase Value Attributes Database Point Variable Point Tag Point Name Type Tag Engineering Units Format Table Snap Font Courier New Field Width 184 are Edit pner Size 10 Est Converted Ta Precision Bold C Center Left talic C Right Select Point Variable Type Tank Point Variable Point Tag Minor Correction Minor Correction Type Movement Holdoff Movement Holdoff Time ID of controlling Movement Net Flow Net Flow Time No Flow Holdoff No Flow Holdoff Time Overfill Protection Overfill Protection Figure 15 3 Select Point Variable window After the Independent Variable has been defined the remaining columns can be filled with Tank point variables such as temperature level and volume After all values have been entered you have the option of displaying column totals If not the next step is to save and generate the report for viewing in
175. adecimal value c Click OK Double click bNumberLevels The DWORD editor window opens Enter the number of levels 1 4 and then click OK Close the Registry Editor Creating Database Points The following section defines the procedure necessary to create any type of database point This procedure is common to all point types for specific information about input amp output points triggered or tank points refer to the following sections 1 From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Points com mand and the Database Edit window appears In the Database Edit window click New to create a new point the Add Point to Database window appears 72 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 3 Enter the level s names used to define the new point Depending on which level you selected the higher levels appear in the window Each point must be unique within the sys tem 4 Under Point Type select either Tank Input Output or Triggered Click Add 6 The Database Edit window appears if you selected a Tank point follow the appropriate pro cedure to create a Tank point For a description of the Add Point to Database and Database Edit window refer to the tables on the following pages 7 The Edit Point window appears if you selected an Input or Output point Follow the appro priate procedure to create an Input and Output point 8 The Edit point window appears if you se
176. aining liquid hydrocarbons P CONSTANT This field allows you to enter the volumetric constant to be applied to all level gauge values for more details please refer to the Tank Calculations chapter DENSITY This field allows you to edit the density at which polynomial sphere constants apply This value is used in FuelsManager volume calculations TEMPERATURE This field allows you to edit the temperature at which polynomial sphere constants apply This value is used in FuelsManager volume calculations Weights amp Measures Information FuelsManager allows you to apply a software seal to a particular tank point This provides a method of verifying the data associated with the tank point is weights and measures approved The W amp M property tab in the Edit Tank Data window provides a list of Calibration Seals for a particular tank point variable A check box indicates the state for the Tank Seal and each input Process Variable Seal Note Each time the weights and measures Tank Seal Data is changed the Seal ID is increased This allows the weights and measures authority to know if seals have been removed and subsequently reapplied 1 To change the desired Seal State click in the Seal check box with the left mouse button 2 The checkbox is ticked 3 Click the Update button Varec Inc 95 Configuring Database Points 4 fany Seal State changes are checked the prompt is for entry of the Weights amp Measures Password
177. al Settings Regional settings define the time formats and other characteristics of the Web Interface for your Site 1 If you have not already done so log in to the FuelsManager Web Server as described in section on page 269 2 Inthe left treeview click Configuration Sites Data Dictionary Click the Regional Settings tab The Regional Settings page appears 4 Enter or modify the settings as appropriate for the Site Setting Up Tank Farm Monitoring You can configure the FuelsManager Web Server to monitor the status of fuel tanks for each FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Standard and FuelsManager Professional system at your Site FuelsManager Web Server Users can then view the status of the tanks for each system using their browser To execute this functionality you set up a mapping in the FuelsManager Web Server to one or more FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Standard or Professional Edition systems at your Site The network address of the SCADA software FuelsManager Oil amp Gas or other systems the unique ID for each tank and other properties are stored in the FuelsManager Web Server database SCADA System Mapping Method Reference FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Automatically section v7 0 Create Other Systems Manually Create section on page 279 There are two mapping methods available the method you use is determined by the type of SCADA system used at the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas and FuelsManager Professional
178. alarm is activated when the time remaining before reaching the High High level setpoint is less than the advisory limit defined by the Trans Adv Setpoint see Product Transfer Data section LEVEL HIGH ETA HIGH LEVEL ETA This variable is the estimated time to arrive at the High level alarm setpoint based on the current flow rate The alarm is activated when the time remaining before reaching the High level setpoint is less than the advisory limit defined by the Trans Adv Setpoint see Product Transfer Data section LEVEL LOW ETA LOW LEVEL ETA This variable is the estimated time to arrive at the Low level alarm setpoint based on the current flow rate The alarm is activated when the time remaining before reaching the Low level setpoint is less than the advisory limit defined by the Trans Adv Setpoint see Product Transfer Data section LEVEL LOLO ETA LOW LOW LEVEL ETA This variable is the estimated time to arrive at the Low Low level alarm setpoint based on the current flow rate The alarm is activated when the time remaining before reaching the Low Low level setpoint is less than the advisory limit defined by the Trans Adv Setpoint see Product Transfer Data section TEMPERATURE ALARM COMPOSITE TEMP ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority temperature alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High High High Low Low Low Th
179. als CD with files necessary to install the FuelsManager and ViewRTU software Software protection key Windows XP Windows 7 or Windows 2003 2008 Server license Varec Inc Introduction Standard Edition FuelsManager Standard Edition provides software for bulk liquid asset management including tank gauging inventory management alarm management reporting and OPC This edition supports predefined graphics and reports but does not support custom graphics or reports FuelsManager Standard Edition does not support SCADA functionality FuelsManager Standard is intended for standalone systems or as a client to the Professional Edition installation Professional Edition FuelsManager Professional provides all the functionality of the Standard Edition and adds real time SCADA functionality a customizable user interface and environmental compliance FuelsManager Professional Edition can also act as a data server and provide inventory data to other FuelsManager Professional or Standard Edition systems Each FuelsManager workstation on the network has its own licensing key FuelsManager Professional is intended for medium to large sized networks where the customer needs to be able to customize the operator interface and show data over a network FuelsManager Web Server Option provides a web server that enables your remote users and customers to access and compile FuelsManager data for your FuelsManager Standard or Professional site
180. alysis type requires the tank to be shut down out of service and stable for 24 48 hours depending on the gauge type Typically a total of 24 hours of valid data or quite time is needed to perform a relevant static tank analysis After analyzing valid data from ArchiveManger over a minimum 24 hour time period the system can report valid leak rates Continuous Analysis Continuous analysis allows the operator to keep the tank in use while performing an analysis The system automatically identifies valid down times from ArchiveManager during regular operation and builds the results Continuous analysis does analyze tanks in real time like Static Analysis Continuous Analysis are manual operations initiated by the operator 182 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Security Real Time Analysis Real Time analysis allows for an automatic continuous analysis of tanks An operator will not have to interact with the Leak Detection system to perform an analysis Unlike Static and Continuous types Real Time Analysis works constantly to analyze the leak rate Tests are performed automatically every day at 12 00 am Leak Detection can if configured trigger an alarm if the analysis detects a leak that is out of range Also an alarm is triggered if Leak Detection detects that there is not enough quiet time data in the current month from the tank to produce a valid Leak Test Report For Leak Detection to be accessible the follo
181. an append When you select a template graphic for the append you can also add database points to those already defined for the selected graphic See section on page 168 or section on page 169 for more information Open the template graphic Select Template Database Defines from the Edit menu The Template Database Definitions window appears Identify a point by doing one of the following Click the Browse button in the lower right corner of the window In the Database Edit window select the appropriate tank point and then click Select Enter the appropriate information for the database point in the System Template Description and Path fields You may want to enter values manually if you are creating a template graphic before the database has been built or if you are developing the graphic on a machine that does not have access to the site database Draw does not verify database connections until the file is generated Click the OK button Save the file as described on page 157 If appropriate generate the file Graphics must be generated before they can be displayed in Operate For detailed instructions see page 155 Note Draw verifies database connections when generating a file If you do not have access to the database or databases associated with the graphic do not generate the file The file must be generated before it can be displayed in Operate Setting the size of a graphic In Draw you can determine how each FuelsMa
182. an be used to represent equipment such as tanks pumps valves and pipeline segments to include images such as company logos and emblems or to include digital photographs such as plant overviews Note FuelsManager includes various Bitmaps that were used to create the predefined Tank Detail and Tank Group displays These are located in the Detail folder and Graphics folder respectively Additional bitmaps can be located in the Templates folder on your FuelsMan ager CD 1 Select the Bitmap tool or select Add and click Bitmap Click on area of insert to define cor ner 2 Drag the cursor to define an area within which the symbol will be located and release the mouse button 3 The Select BMP File window appears 4 Click onthe desired file and click OK The bitmap is displayed You is able to size the bitmap by clicking and dragging on the graphic Select BMP File FileName Path c Mmprojectuyraphics File cone_iso_bl BMP Fitter Horz bmp Filter ert bmp FM_iconv6_b bmp FM_OG_b bmp FuelsManager_bk bmp Note Custom Bitmaps must first be added to your project directory Insert the bitmap in the directory used to store all graphic and symbol files Most configurations store the graphics in the FMProject Graphics subdirectory 170 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Editing objects Editing objects involves moving copying and deleting selected objects as well as modifying the attributes of
183. anager calculates this alarm based on the current vapor pressure and the alarm limits configured for the tank PRESS HIGH SETPOINT HIGH PRESSURE SETPOINT This variable is the limit for a High pressure alarm If the tank pressure exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges PRESS LOW SEPOINT LOW PRESSURE SETPOINT This variable is the limit for a Low pressure alarm If the tank pressure falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges PRESSURE ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High pressure alarm setpoint is 10 and the pressure alarm holdoff is 1 the pressure must return to a value of 9 before the High pressure alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate 306 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank Alarms Data MOVEMENT ALARM This variable is used to detect illegal product movements If the tank command mode is Stopped and the level moves in either direction by mo
184. anager Oil amp Gas 6 Click the OK button to save the Data Source selection The data source appears on the report Data Sources screen 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 as needed to identify the remaining Data Sources for this report This step does not apply to standard reports 8 Click the Apply button on the Data Sources page Caution If you do not click the Apply button your Data Source settings will not be saved for this report Setting Report Server amp Standard Report Addresses The Report Server is the Reporting Services application that processes requests for reports Before FuelsManager Web Server users can access reports you must supply the FuelsManager Web Server with the URL for the Report Server as described in section You must also identify the virtual directory that contains the deployed web reports as described in section on page 284 The Report Server uses this directory to locate reports when they are requested Setting the Report Server Address 1 Log in to the Web Server as an administrator 2 Inthe left treeview select Configuration gt System Settings 3 Inthe Report Server URL field enter the network or local address URL for the Report Server in the Report Server URL field By default this is http localhost ReportServer However if the Report Server is not hosted on the same machine as FuelsManager you will need to provide the complete URL i e http myserver ReportServer Also i
185. andard volume is defined as Gross observed volume corrected for BS amp W and temperature The following equation is used to calculate net volume NSV GOV x 1 0 BS amp W 100 0 x VCF Where NSV Net Standard Volume FRA Floating Roof Adjustment BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities VCF Volume Correction Factor Pre 1980 If a volume correction method with the 1980 designation is selected The following formula is used to calculate Gross Volume NSV GOV FW x 1 0 BS amp W 100 0 x VCF Where NSV Net Standard Volume FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any FRA Floating Roof Adjustment BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities VCF Volume Correction Factor Japanese correction methods If a volume correction method with the Japan designation is selected The following additional options are available NSV GOV FW x 1 0 BS amp W 100 0 x VCF Where NSV Net Standard Volume GOV Gross Observed Volume FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities VCF Volume Correction Factor Water not subtracted The value of FW in the net volume calculation is always Zero Water Subtracted from Net Volume The FW value is subtracted from the TOV as defined above
186. anually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbons TEMP VAPOR TIME VAPOR TEMPERATURE TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank level was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL CHANGE RATE RATE OF LEVEL CHANGE This process variable is the rate of change of the level value due to movement of product into or out of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this sampling the level at user defined intervals and averaging the change in level over a user defined number of samples However this value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator LEVEL RATE TIME LEVEL RATE TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank level change rate was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified GAUGE COMMAND LEVEL GAUGE COMMAND This process variable is used to issue commands to automatic tank gauges the possible values depend in the tank gauge modifier configured for the tank This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote commands to the tank gauges GAUGE STATUS LEVEL GAUGE STATUS This process variable represents the status of the automatic tank gauge In order to use this variable the gauge status variable must be
187. apanese correction type is selected The Net Mass options are Mass Weight Weight in a Pressure Tank Idemitsu and Food Oil This parameter defines the method of Weight calculation MOLE CONSTANT This parameter is only available when Idemitsu is selected for the Net Mass calculation This parameter defines the Mole Constant value used in the Idemitsu weight calculation Varec Inc 313 Point Parameters Tank Configuration Data SAMPLES This parameter is used along with the Sample Time and Deadband parameters in the averaging calculation of Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow It defines the amount of samples to be included in the average The same Sample parameter is used for Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow calculations SAMPLE TIME This parameter is used along with the Samples and Deadband parameters in the averaging calculation of Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow It defines the amount of time in seconds between the samples in the average The same Sample Time parameter is used for the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow calculations DEADBAND This parameter is used along with the Samples and Sample Time parameters in the averaging calculation of Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow The sample value must be greater than the deadband value otherwise a sample value of zero will be used The deadband parameter can be set independently for
188. are applied to the Volume Correction Factor before all calculations are performed LEVEL ROUNDING This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The rounding options are None and Nearest Integer Level rounding is applied to the product level before performing each volume calculation TEMPERATURE ROUNDING This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The rounding options are None 0 25 and 0 5 Temperature rounding is applied to the product temperature before performing each volume calculation WATER SUBTRACTION This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The water subtraction options are None Gross Volume and Net Volume This parameter defines the method of Water Volume compensation Water Volume is either not subtracted subtracted in the calculation of Gross Volume or subtracted in the calculation of Net Volume respectively VSW SUBTRACTION This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The VSW subtraction options are None Gross Volume and Net Volume VSW is defined as the Volume associated with the percent BSW Bottoms Sediment and Water This parameter defines the method of VSW compensation VSW is either not subtracted subtracted in the calculation of Gross Volume or subtracted in the calculation of Net Volume respectively NET MASS This parameter is only available when a J
189. assist in monitoring configuration changes made by users Note All FuelsManager users must be defined as Windows users on the system running the application If users are not set up refer to the appropriate Windows documentation prior to setting up FuelsManager security Administrators have a centralized security model where they can designate which system s users can access easily Opening the Security Window 1 In the FuelsManager Configuration window click Security 2 Select Security The Security window opens and is shown below Actions wam m Categories xf Groups amp Users l Audit Varec Inc 11 Configuring Security Categories The security window has two menu options when it is open Actions W amp M Actions Menu The Actions menu includes the options to add delete rename properties or close Some options appear only when appropriate depending on previous selections Option Description Add The Add command allows the administrator to add a user group tag or an alarm according to what section is selected in the security window Delete The Delete command allows the administrator to delete a user group tag or an alarm according to what section is selected in the security window Rename The Rename command allows the administrator to rename a user group tag or an alarm according to what section is selected in the security window Propertie
190. at are currently selected to be logged gt gt Add gt gt This button adds the currently selected variable in the Available Tank Variables list box on the left to the Tank Variables to be logged list box on the right That variable will then be removed from the Available Tank Variables list box lt lt Remove lt lt This button removes the currently selected variable from the Tank Variables to be logged list box on the right That variable will then reappear in the Available Tank Variables list box on the left Varec Inc 195 Configuring Automated Data Output Field Definition Default This button deletes all variables from the Tank Variables to be logged list box and then adds the Automated Data Output default set of variables to that list box This default list is generally accepted as the most commonly used set of variables and includes the following System Name Point Tag System Date and Time Product Code Level Temperature Standard Density Gross Volume Net Standard Volume Available Volume Net Remaining Volume Net Flow Rate Precision The precision of the data in the output files can be entered here The Precision field defines the number of decimal places you want in the values logged If you enter 0 no decimal places will be logged Trigger Point Trigger Value A FuelsManager point can be entered a
191. at your groups users system permissions and tag permissions are still working properly Since some of the security rights definitions have changed they may not match perfectly The update utility created a back up copy of the old files that were changed These files are located in the Copy of FMProject directory This is not a complete back up of your entire database and includes only the files that were changed in the upgrade Rebuild Graphics and Reports You will have to rebuild the following Symbols Graphics Detail Mode Symbols Detail Mode Graphics Rebuild Reports Back up FMProject After doing all this you should and back up your new FMProject 146 Administrator Manual 10 Creating Graphics FuelsManager Draw is an application for developing custom graphic screens to display in the FuelsManager Operate You can also use Draw to edit the tank detail graphics included in the FuelsManager package Note The Draw feature is only available with FuelsManager Professional Edition For infor mation about upgrading to Professional Edition contact your Varec representative Make sure that the DatabaseManager is not in SHUTDOWN mode Otherwise you will not be able to access the database windowes used to define values How Draw graphics are used in Operate The figure below shows a site overview graphic for a bulk fuel storage facility All of the elements in this graphic were created in Draw using lines rectangles bit
192. ate graphic but each button is associated with a different database point When the operator clicks one of these append buttons the template graphic appears showing the data for the selected point For example operators in an area of ABC Refinery must monitor the status of over 50 valves All the valves are shown in a complex site graphic With Draw you can create one generic template graphic to show detailed valve information You can then place an invisible append over each valve icon in the site graphic Each append opens the template graphic for the matching valve point When an operator clicks on one of the valves in the site graphic in Operate the valve details graphic is displayed for that valve Note To quickly create multiple appends for a template graphic create one append and then copy and modify that append for each reference point 168 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas You must define one or more template graphics before performing this procedure Refer to section on page 153 for more information 1 Select the Append tool or select Add and click Append Click on area to define a corner and hold down the mouse button 2 Drag the cursor to define the size of the append and release the mouse button The Append Attributes window appears 3 To display the append as a visible button in your graphic click on the Button is visible under Style and then select a button color 4 Under Type sel
193. aterial and type of tank shell the variable can also be linked to automatic gauging systems or manually entered if required C amp W COR FAC C amp W CORRECTION FACTOR This process variable is the correction for sediment and water used to correct gross volume for the effects of water and sediment in the bottom of the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this from water level and solids level variables the variable can also be linked to automatic gauging systems or manually entered if required BSW VOLUME VOLUME FOR BSW This process variable is the volume base sediment and water impurities in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this from the BSW value and the current gross volume However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator 298 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank Points Process Data TANK BOTTOM VOLUME TOTAL BOTTOM VOLUME This process variable is the combined water and solids volumes in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this by adding the water volume to the solids volume values However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VAPOR TEMP VAPOR TEMPERATURE This process variable is the temperature of the vapor space above the product in the tank This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be m
194. base for the Site to ensure that you exactly match each of the items in that database If you are establishing a new Site you can save considerable time by using the Auto Create feature to add tanks automatically as described in section l If you have not already done so log in to the FuelsManager Web Server as described in section on page 269 In the left treeview click Configuration gt Sites gt Tanks A Configuration page appears showing the Tanks list Under the Tanks list click the Add button A form appears for defining the tank Note The tank ID and all other tank information should be an exact duplicate of the tank detail information stored in the FuelsManager Professional database for the Site Enter or select the appropriate information for the tank This is a multi page form Use the page number links at the bottom of the Variables table to access all of the tank detail fields Click the OK button Repeat the preceeding steps as needed to add all of the remaining tanks Varec Inc 279 Configuring the FuelsManager Web Server 280 Administrator Manual 17 Configuring Web Server Reporting This chapter describes how to set up the Web Server for FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Standard or Professional Edition so users can access FuelsManager site reports using a web browser Note This feature is only available with the Web Server option for FuelsManager Standard or Professional Edition Before Yo
195. bles are used for FuelsManager processes and cannot be modified The predefined variables include most common process control states including equipment status alarm states months of the year and equipment commands If the list is not sufficient you have the ability to create new Coded Variables Once created the Coded Variables are available for assignment in the database Creating a new coded variable 1 From the Resources menu in the Configuration window select the Coded Variables com mand the Coded Variables Configuration window appears 2 Typeina coded variable name The name can be up to 15 characters including any embed ded spaces entered then click Add 3 The name appears in the list click OK 4 The Coded Variable is now available for database point assignment Coded Variables Configuration Coded Variables List Variable 26 Standard 337 Custom 0 Acknowledged Active Figure 3 8 Coded Variables Configuration window Coded Variables Configuration window The Coded Variables Configuration window lists all the variables found in the system standard and custom Coded Variables and the quantity of each type You are able to add or delete custom Coded Variables Each Coded Variable is identified by a variable index number as indicated in the Coded Variables Configuration window Deleting a coded variable 1 In the Coded Variables Configuration window select the variable to be deleted from the s
196. brary and OperNT exe modules are sealed and the data is sealed in the archive FMOperate will display data as sealed in historical reports and historical trends if the FMSystem dll library and OperNT exe modules are sealed the data is sealed in the archive and the Archive mdb file is still owned by the SYSTEM In addition for the historical reports the Crystal report must have been designed to display W amp M seals using custom functions supplied in the U2FM dll which must also be sealed RMClient will display data as sealed on reports if the FMSystem dll library the DCSComm dll library and the RMClient dll modules are sealed and the data is sealed by FMDataManager FMReportManager will print data as sealed on real time reports if the FMSystem dll library the DCSComm dll library and FMReportManager exe modules are sealed and the data is sealed by FMDataManager TankGroup will display data as sealed on tank group displays if FMSystem dll library and TankGroup dll library modules are sealed and the data is sealed by FMDataManager Setting the W amp M Password To set the W amp M password you must know the existing W amp M password W amp M Password Old Password New Password Confirm New Password Update The same W amp M password is used for Systems Seals Tag Seals in FuelsManager Module Seals in FuelsManager WMSeal enable in 8130 RTU From Security select Password from the W amp M menu The W amp M Passwo
197. c C Hybrid Pressure Transmitter Setup OffSet PSI Height ft in 16th y Top F Midde Bottom Minimum Level Density Deadband Elevation Latitude Level OffSet Figure 5 19 Edit Tank Data window Vessel 1 tab Entering Vessel 1 information Note For more details on using Hydrostatic or Hybrid tank calculations see the Calculation Methods chapter 1 Click the Vessel 1 tab 2 Enter information about the basic physical Characteristics Landed Height Floating Height Roof Mass Roof Type Tank Geometry Tank Volume Tank Height Tank Radius Shell Thickness Lining Material Date Installed Tank Material ExpCoef and Install Temperature 3 Under Optional Protection indicate any Cathodic Overfill or Spill protection that is used with the tank Varec Inc 89 Configuring Database Points 4 Under Tank Shell Correction you can enable and indicate any Shell Insulation and area coefficient if applicable 5 Under Gauging Setup you can set whether your gauging system uses Traditional Hydro static or Hybrid setups 6 Ifusing either the Hydrostatic or Hybrid gauging setup you must enter the bottom Pressure Transmitter Setup Offset PSI amp Height You can also enable and enter the Top and Middle transmitter settings 7 If using Hydrostatic or Hybrid gauging setup you can enter the Minimum Level and Density Deadband 8 You can select whether to use Local Gravity settings Just
198. cccco eee eee 284 Deploying Reports to the Report Server ooooococcccococc cece eee 286 Setting Report Properties llle llle 286 Opening the Report Properties Page lille 286 Renaming Hiding or Showing a Report 2 000000 eens 287 Setting Report ParameterS ooooooooo rh 287 10 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Setting Data Source s Manually for Each Report llli 288 Setting Report Server amp Standard Report Addresses o ocooooooooo 289 Setting the Report Server Address o ooooooooooo eee eae 289 Setting the Reports Directory 0 0 eee 289 Choosing How the Report List is Displayed to Users 289 Creating a Report Group llis 290 Assigning Reports to a Report Group 1 1 ee es 290 18 Configuring Multiple Monitors 05 291 Multi Monitor Prerequisites llis 291 Configuring Multiple Monitors llsse RII 292 Multiple Monitor Examples lisse s 293 A Point Parameters soos ot or ex e n tod 295 Tank Points Process Data 295 Product Transfer Data o ooocoocccooco tee eee 302 Tank Alarms Datars erana ina t a E rhe 303 Scaling and engineering units data ssaa aaaea 310 Tank configuration data a a auaa aaaea 313 Input points process data s anusa 0000 cee ee 318 Output points process data naana aaae 318 Tr
199. ce Bit assigned I O point that the bits defined by the start bit and number of bits will be written to Data Type Translation Translation or scaling table to be applied to this database point Source Units Engineering units that the received data value will be expressed in Data Source System System name that this point is assigned to Device Point Description Description of the device or I O point that this database point is connected to Select Data Source window commands and settings CURRENT TYPES This field displays the current data source type UN ASSIGNED CLEAR Data Source is undefined the data will be tagged as un initialized The Clear button un assigns the data source MANUAL The Manual button assigns the data source such that the operator will manually enter the value COMM Data is to be received from the designated CommManager Input or outputted for output points The Comm button opens the Communications Interface Configuration window allowing you to connect the value of the point to external devices Refer to the previous Data Source description section and the particular Communications Driver manual for procedures CALC Data is to be updated by internal database calculation The Calc button assigns the data source such that FuelsManager will calculate the data value for this point LOCAL Data is to be received from another FMDataManager Po
200. ce Destination designations called units examples could be Pipeline XYZ Truck Rack 123 Pumphouse A2B Units allow the operator to use meaningful names for plant items being utilized for product movements A unit has no measuring device so it has no way of monitoring product movement users cannot enter movement setpoints for a unit and movements involving units will not calculate discrepancies Meter Node A location in a product movement instance where a reading from a physical meter is possible You can associate FuelsManager input and output database points with meter nodes and have the meter data automatically collected or manually entered Receipt pre Receipt via E Meter Node To Tank s One or More Tanks Shipment 1 E Shipment via To Tank s Meter Node One or More Tanks Varec Inc 131 Configuring Product Movement Term Closeout is defined as one of the following Closeout Stopping of the movement either manually OR due to non zero flow If the movement is active at the system specified closeout time default midnight Opening Value is defined as one of the following If a close out has occurred the opening value is the value of the particular variable at the last closeout time If the movement has been started but a closeout has not occurred yet the opening value is the value of the particular variable when the movement started Closeout Value on
201. ce page opens 4 Inthe Name box enter the data source name For standard reports the data source name is FuelsManagerDB Ensure that the Enable this data source checkbox is selected 6 Inthe Connection Type list select the appropriate type If you are adding the FuelsManag erDB data source select Microsoft SQL Server 7 Inthe Connection String box enter a connection string if appropriate If you are adding the FuelsManagerDB data source use the following data source servername initial catalog FM Archive Note Replace servername with the computer name or IP address of the Reporting Services server 8 Under Connect Using select Credentials stored securely in the report server 9 Inthe User Name field enter the user name for the user that your created in Creating a User in Windows for Reports on page 282 The name used in this chapter is RPTUSER 10 In the Password field enter the password that you assigned to RPTUSER in Creating a User in Windows for Reports on page 282 F Report Manager Microsoft Internet Explorer Jal Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ca O Back ix iz e search Favorites 4 2 Mr d Address E http localhost Reports Cluster2DB Pages DataSource aspx ItemPath 2FTank Inventory Reports 2fFuelsManagerDB a Go Links Home My Subscriptions Site Settings Help 2 SQL Server Reporting Services p gs Halo ap Home gt Tank
202. check the Use Local Gravity check box and enter the m Sec2 9 You can also enter the Elevation in feet and Latitude in Degrees Minutes and Seconds You can only enter Latitude if you are not using Local Gravity 10 Enter the Level Offset Edit Tank Data window Vessel 1 tab MAXIMUM FILL This field allows you to configure the maximum safe level to which the tank can be filled FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The maximum fill level can be User Defined user can enter any value High Maximum fill level is the same as the high level alarm limit High High Maximum fill level is the same as the high high level alarm limit Selecting the User Defined option also enables the Maximum Operating limit level alarm This alarm functions independently of the High and High High alarms and is intended to give an additional stage of level alarm monitoring LANDED HEIGHT This field allows configuration of the height at which the floating roof is fully landed on it legs FuelsManager only uses this parameter if the list item Roof Mass not in Strap is selected otherwise this parameter is ignored FLOATING This field allows you to configure the height at which the HEIGHT floating roof is fully floating on the product FuelsManager only uses this parameter if the list item Roof Mass not in Strap is selected otherwise this parameter is ignored ROOF MASS T
203. cient privileges LEVEL LOLO LIMIT CURRENT LO LO LEVEL LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low Low level alarm If the tank level falls below the LoLo Alarm value then a Low Low alarm is activated Varec Inc 303 Point Parameters Tank Alarms Data LEVEL ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High level alarm setpoint is 10 and the level alarm holdoff is 1 the level must return to a value of 9 before the High level alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate ETA ALARMS Estimated Time of Arrival alarms ETA are intended to give the operator a warning a preset time before the relevant level alarm is reached This type of alarm is commonly used in facilities where the tanks are always filled or emptied to high or low levels Since the filling or emptying of large tanks can take days these are alarms are used to alert the operator that a particular tank is approaching a level where some action needs to be taken By default ETA alarms disabled they can be enabled via the Alarms tab of the tank configuration window LEVEL HIHI ETA HIGH HIGH LEVEL ETA This variable is the estimated time to arrive at the High High level alarm setpoint based on the current flow rate The
204. create an alarm limit on page 60 for Before you begin open the Define Global Alarm or Define Alarm Process window as described in Accessing Alarm Limits on page 59 1 If the Build Alarm Limit window is not opened click the Build button in the Define Global Alarm or Define Alarm Process window 2 Click the Test Type button The Alarm Test Codes window appears 3 Select the desired code and click OK The table below describes each code Test Code Description EQU Database Value equal to Test Value NEQ Database Value not equal to Test Value LES Database Value less than Test Value LEQ Database Value less than or equal to Test Value GRT Database Value greater than Test Value GEQ Database Value greater than or equal to Test Value BIT Bit Set in Database Value which matches Bit in Test Value MASK Any Bit s Set in Database Value matches any Bits in Test Value NINT Not Initialized OFLN Off Line DIS Disabled IOFL 10 Fail JODI IO Disabled IOFO 10 Forced JJOWR IO Warning OVR Over Range UNR Under Range INV Invalid ORDE Overridden For these codes only the description is shown in the list 4 Click the Test Value button if it is enabled If the data format is a coded variable the Test Value button will be enabled If the data format is numeric the Test Value button will be disabled Test
205. created Levels 2 or 1 will default to the database level already selected in the Database Edit window if any Note The example window shows a three level database an alternate window exists for four level databases For databases with less than three levels the Level 2 or Level 1 fields will be disabled POINT TYPE The point type group allows you to select the type of point to be cre ated refer to the previous descriptions of the different types points Creating Input and Output Points An Input Point contains data received from field equipment database calculations or another FuelsManager database Both types of points require an input source but you only select an output destination for the Output point Note You must first select a point format before the other attributes can be addressed Once selected the default minimum and maximum values appear in the Minimum and Maximum Value edit boxes if the format is numeric 74 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Continued from the previous instructions Creating Database Points In the Edit Point window select the following Data format Data source s Engineering units Other parameters For a description of these attributes refer to the Edit Point window key field explanations table at the end of this section the brief instructions below or the specific section relating to that topic From the Edit Point window Type in the Description of t
206. croll box so that it appears in the edit box 2 Click Delete The coded variable is no longer a part of the list 34 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Importing coded variables Note Standard Coded Variables cannot be deleted Custom coded variables are the only variables that can be imported or exported 1 From the Configuration window select Resources and click Coded Variables The Coded Variables Configuration window appears 2 Click Import 3 The Import Coded Variables window appears 4 Select the import file and click Open 5 The system imports the file and returns to the Coded Variable Configuration window Modifiers Modifiers are a collection of Coded Variables Modifiers are used to group commands issued in the Operate application For example the OPEN and CLOSE command combination is one type of modifier The FuelsManager system contains a list of predefined modifiers FuelsManager reserves the first 18 modifiers for standard use You cannot edit or delete standard modifiers but you can create custom modifiers You can define up to eight commands for a modifier These commands appear as selections when the operator issues a command Modifiers Configuration window Modifiers can be created edited imported exported deleted inserted or replaced using the action buttons in the Modifiers Configuration window Creating a modifier 1 From the Resources menu in the Configuration window se
207. ct this checkbox the system will prompt the User to change their password the first time that they log in Password must be periodically changed If you select this checkbox the system will periodically prompt the User to change their password at the number of days specified in the Password Aging days field Password Aging days If you select the Password must be periodically changed checkbox enter a number in this field to determine the number of days that will pass before the system prompts the User to change their password Varec Inc 275 Configuring the FuelsManager Web Server Field Description Name This name appears in the Users table on the Users Configuration page E mail Address The value that you enter in this field is only shown in this screen Assigned Groups This field shows the User Groups that this User is assigned to Unassigned Groups This field shows the User Groups that this User is not assigned to 5 If User Groups exist assign the User to the appropriate User Group s as follows 6 a Inthe Unassigned Groups list select any group s that this User should belong to b Click the lt lt button The group s appear in the Assigned Groups list Click the OK button Defining Products Perform this procedure to define the types of fuel handled by the Site s in your organization n A uu N Note Ensure that the Products you add to th
208. ctionality applied to data received by FuelsManager FuelsManager Translation Table Database Point Scaling PLC tly Num ber Process e easel Value 34 6 S Jie res Vahe 169 2 A Application of formula on Database points current B 100 value of 34 6 results in a vahe amp 345 s aeaa value of 169 2b eng written tothe PLC Points Minimum 0 Point s Maximum 100 Scaled range of value n PLC would be Minimum 100 Maximum 300 To configure a scaling function 1 Open FuelsManager Configuration and click Resources gt Translations The Translations window opens and is shown below 42 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas gy Xm we Translations xi Edit Manual B Scaling Functions Scaling Function 10 Decimal C Hex Import Export Apply Close Click Edit gt Add Scaling Function and the Scaling Function is created Right click the name and change it to a more meaningful name Click the newly renamed scaling function and the Select Polynomial area becomes active Select the appropriate polynomial and designate the constants Click Apply to save the Scaling Function Changing the Default Tank Detail Display FuelsManager Operate displays tank details in a Tank Detail window You can choose to view the default Tank Detail display or create one or more custom tank detail displays This section describes how select the default Tank Detail
209. d Alarms illl 46 Predefined Alarms and Alarm Templates 2 20200 00 eee eeeeee 46 Predefined Global Alarms and Alarm Templates l l lesen 46 Predefined Tank Point Alarms 0 00 00 e eee ee 47 Changing Alarm Settings 0 0 illie 47 Changing the Alarm Line Format 2 00 ccc eee eee eee 47 Changing the Alarm Display Mode sss 48 Showing the Date Time and User Name llle ee ees 49 Working with Global Alarms and Alarm Templates oooooocooooooo 50 Understanding Global Alarms and Alarm Templates o o oo oooooo 50 Opening the Global Alarms and Alarm Templates List 50 Creating a Global Alarm or Alarm Template llle 51 Editing a Global Alarm or Alarm Template oooooooocoornoooo 52 Assigning a Global Alarm to a Database POIMt ooooooooooo ooo 52 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Importing and Exporting Global Alarms and TemplateS oo 53 Working with Local Alarms 0 0 00 00 eee 54 Accessing the alarm configuration fora point 0 00 e eee ee eee 54 Creating and Assigning a Local Alarm 1 2 2 0 cee es 54 Editing a Local Alarms cortar eek Ve WwERe e tae etna dot 55 Assigning a Graphic or a Help File to an AlarM o o ooooooooooooo 56 Removing an Alarm from a Database Point liliis 57 Importing and Exporting Points
210. d All A window appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all files 2 Click OK This option unconditionally compiles all files for a project even if they have not changed since the last generation Deleting reports Deleting generated reports This action deletes the report from the Report Index Once deleted it cannot be viewed or printed in the Operate program 1 Select File and click Report Index 2 Select the desired report to be deleted 3 Click Delete Deleting saved reports This action totally deletes the report This process cannot be reversed once the RPT file is deleted 1 Open explorer in Windows 2 Select the drive that contains the FuelsManager directory and then locate the Reports direc tory 3 Delete the report with the RPT and RRT file extensions Note FuelsManager Historical Reports are created using Seagate s Crystal Reports soft ware package and access data from the FuelsManager Archive Database See ArchiveMan ager If order to modify the existing Standard Historical Reports or to create new reports you must purchase and install Crystal Reports version 7 0 or greater Crystal Reports is not included in the FuelsManager product 266 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Historical reports Historical reports are created using Seagate Crystal Reports In order to modify or create new historical reports it is necessary to purchase Seagate Crystal Reports T
211. d from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges TEMPERATURE ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High temperature alarm setpoint is 10 and the temperature alarm holdoff is 1 the temperature must return to a value of 9 before the High temperature alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate DENSITY ALARM COMPOSITE DENISTY ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority density alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High or Low FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current density and the alarms limit configured for the tank point DENSITY HIGH LIMIT CURRENT HIGH DENSITY LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High density alarm If the tank density exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges DENSITY LOW LIMIT CURRENT LOW DENSITY LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low density alarm If the tank density falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with
212. d nodes are listed by name and type From this window you can add delete or modify nodes in the movement system Cancel 3 Select Tank and click OK The Tanks window appears and is shown below This window includes all database points that have not already been selected as nodes Tanks Tank 18 Tank 19 Tank 20 2 Era Note Each node name must be unique for the selected default node name based on the point name level In the example given all level O points are named Tankpoint this would NOT result in a unique node name a better tank point name level selection would be Level 1 Varec Inc 135 Configuring Product Movement 4 Select the database level on which the node name will be based from the Default Node Name Based on Point Name Level selection 5 Select one or more database points and click Select Use the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple nodes The system returns you to the Nodes window 6 Click Save The system saves the nodes you added 7 Click Close The system returns you to the Movement window Adding a Unit Node Note Each Node name must be unique 1 From the Movements window click Nodes The Nodes window appears This dialog lists all the nodes available for selection The defined nodes are listed by name and type From this window you can add delete or modify nodes in the movement system 2 Click Add The Node Type window appears 3 Select Unit the Unit can be a
213. d operate the Automated Data Output section This feature is used to periodically write the contents of several tank point variables to an output file Note Automated Data Output is an optional feature that is available with FuelsManager Standard or Professional Edition Automated Data Output basic functions include Reading specified variables up to a total of 98 from all tank points in the FuelsManager database at specified intervals or when a specific Process Value is triggered Writing these values to output CSV HTML and XML files Program Location The Automated Data Output service starts automatically whenever Windows is started however it can be configured at any time from the Start Programs FuelsManager Automated Data Output The configuration process includes specifying which tank point variables should be logged and what events initiate the log process Up to 98 tank point variables can be logged simultaneously though usually substantially fewer are needed Also there are three different types of triggers that can be defined to initiate the log process Varec Inc 193 Configuring Automated Data Output Output File Types Output File Description Snapshot file A Snapshot file is a CSV file written when a particular point value takes place and is designed as a snapshot of the data at the moment in time at which the trigger was tripped This file can be written whenever a speci
214. d with or to modify any other aspect of the condition 1 qu qM 8 If the Select Global Dynamic Conditions window is not open open it clicking on the Master menu and selecting Condition Index Select the condition that you want to edit Click the Edit button The Edit Dynamic Conditions window opens Change the Description if appropriate This is the name that appears in the Condition Index list Change the Variable Type and or Condition Type if appropriate These may not be available if you are in the process of assigning the condition to an object If appropriate and available change the Display Styles The availability of this option is dependent on the Variable Type selected To change the condition codes do the following a Click the Select button to open the Build Condition Code dialog The available Code types is based on the Variable Type selected earlier Build Condition Code Codes Select Condition Code Select Test Value Palette Select Color 1 Palette Select Color 2 Cancel b To change the Condition Code click the Codes button and select from the list To select a Test Value click the Variable button and select it from the list To select a color for the condition click the Palette button next to Color 1 and select the color you want to represent the condition If you want the object to blink repeat this step with Select Color 2 e Click OK to return to the Edit Dynamic Cond
215. defined Tank Point Alarms Tank points contain predefined alarms that are integrated into the tank point edit window To configure this type of alarm you enable the alarm and enter a value Predefined alarms are available for certain parameters Tank Level ETA Temperature Leak Rate Density Leak Data Tank Flow Vapor Pressure Level Rate Unauthorized Movement Test Mode Reverse Flow No Flow Applicable to systems using the optional Leak Detection feature See Alarm Information on page 86 to modify tank point alarms The Operate application provides a graphical representation to the user for tank point alarms The accompanying figure the product level indicator for a tank appearing in red to signify that a level alarm has occurred Changing Alarm Settings Changing the Alarm Line Format The Alarm Line format can be set to either the default Alarm Line or the alternate Alarm Line The operation of each alarm line is detailed in the Fue sManager Oil Gas User Manual Usually this setting is designated during the installation process however if the need arises to change the Alarm Line format follow the steps below to change the alarm line format for every user Varec Inc 47 Configuring Alarms and Events Note A new user s registry entries are created when the log into Operate the first time If the UseAlternateAlarmLine registry entry is set in the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE the alternate alarm line is presented If the in
216. depends on the OPC server selected You can also set a Deadband to filter out minor changes After selecting the OPC option the OPC Server Source select window appears and is shown below OPC Server Source Select System SIZEMORE Selected OPC Server ArchiveManager 1 Selected Tag Scan Time 1000 mSec 100 10000 DataManager 1 a 1 31 2 Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 Cancel 68 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Within this window the System and Selected Servers are displayed in non editable fields Below these the Scan Time can be entered to set the update rate and the version of OPC can be selected Below these a list containing available OPC servers is displayed When a server is selected from this list the system displays a tree view of the different OPC tags associated with the OPC server selected For step by step instructions on how to Select an OPC server data source refer to Process Data Information Data Format Note You must configure the data format correctly for the range of data expected Attempting to write a value that it too large for the data format defined results in truncation of the value and possible misinterpretation of the data FuelsManager supports several data formats for storage of data Selecting a data format only applies to Input and Output points Tank points have a predefined formats Each numerical data format has a default minimum and maximum
217. designated Japan the floating roof correction is calculated in the following manner If the 4th digit after decimal point of density is Zero such as r15 X XXXO FRA FRW r15 Where FRW Floating Roof Weight If the 4th digit after decimal point of density is other than ZERO such as r15 X XXXO 4th digit after decimal is 1 9 If r15 X XXNX then the density will divided by Low and High Low density is r15L X XXNO and High density is r15H X XXNO 0 001 FRAL FRW r45L Rounding 4th digit after decimal point FRAH FRW r15H Rounding 4th digit after decimal point p15 p15L 1 FRA FRAL 4 FRAL FRAH p15H p15L Note In the Critical Zone Between Roof Landed Height and Roof Floating Height Fuels Manager applies the full amount of the FRA 210 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Bottom Sediment Water BS amp W Product samples are periodically taken to determine its quality and purity Analyzing these samples results in a purity measurement referred to as percentage bottom sediment and water BS amp W The operator usually manually enters this value The BS amp W value differs from the Water volume and Solids volume values in that the BS amp W impurities are suspended in the product the water and solids volumes have settled and rest at the bottom of the tank Volume of Sediment and Water VSW This is the volume associated wit
218. dified PRESS VAPOR UNITS VAPOR PRESSURE UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank vapor pressure process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL RATE MININIUM TANK MINIMUM LEVELRATE SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank level change rate process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL RATE MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMIUM LEVELRATE SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank level change rate process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL RATE UNITS RATE OF LEVEL CHANGE UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank level change rate process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS FLOW MININIUM TANK MINIMUM MASS FLOW SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank mass flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS FLOW MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM MASS FLOW SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank mass flow process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS FLOW UNITS MASS FLOW UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank mass flow process variable This variable can be viewed from
219. displays the vertical coordinate or Y coordinate of the selected object The H displays the height of the selected object The W displays the width of the selected object Varec Inc 151 Creating Graphics Creating user defined colors gv VL AS Select User Defined Colors from the Options menu A warning message appears that changing user defined colors can affect all graphics Click OK The User Defined Colors window appears The window lists the numbers 56 through 63 that are available In the Customized Palette Color box the current color is displayed for the selected number radio button To change the current color you can create a new color by selecting and moving the red green and blue scroll bars All changes are displayed in the palette When finished click OK The user defined colors are saved and now appear in the color pal ette User Defined Colors Select User Defined Color 56 63 56 C 57 C 58 C 59 C 60 C amp t C 62 C 63 Select RGB Values 0 255 Customized Palette Color GREEN 4 0 BLUE 4 Managing Graphic and Symbol Files Opening an existing graphic or symbol l Select Open from the File menu to display the Open Graphic File window This window dis plays the saved Symbol files SYM and Graphic files GRF Select the desired file from the list box and click OK The graphic or symbol appears on the screen Understanding graphic and symbol file types
220. dividual user wants to use the standard alarm line the HKEY_CURRENT_USER registry entry must be modified Caution Using the Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall your operating system Varec Inc cannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of the Registry Editor can be resolved Use the Registry Editor at your own risk To change the Alarm Line format for new users 1 uU BR N 9o 9 On the Windows Start menu click Run Type regedit in the Open field Click OK The Registry Editor window opens In the left treeview select HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Double click the following keys in sequence depending on the operating system you are using For 32 bit operating systems Software Varec SCADA Operate For 64 bit operating systems Software Wow6432Node Varec SCADA Operate Double click the value for UseAlternateAlarm Line In the Value Data field do one of the following Enter a to enable the alternate alarm Line Enter a O default to enable the default alarm Line Click OK Close the Registry Editor To change the Alarm Line format for a single user l Qu MI oro eds P2 AM 9 Shutdown Operate On the Windows Start menu click Run Type regedit in the Open field Click OK The Registry Editor window opens In the left treeview select HKEY CURRENT USER Double click the following keys in sequence Sof
221. duct Movement is an optional feature that is only available with FuelsManager Professional Edition The Standard Edition will not allow access to this feature For addi tional information about upgrading to the Professional Edition and above please contact your Varec representative The FuelsManager Product Movement system is divided into two parts the definition of possible movement paths creating a movement and the operation of the actual product movement operating a movement instance The creation of possible movement paths is performed from the Configuration program and documented in this section while the operation of movement instances is performed from the Operate program and documented in the User Guide for the Operate program Movement types The following table shows the different types of Movements Movement Types From Sources To Destinations Blend One or More Tanks One Tank Charge One Tank One Unit Receipt One Unit One or More Tanks Run Down One Unit One Tank Shipment One or More Tanks One Unit Transfer One Tank One Tank Water Drain One Tank One Unit To assist in setting up complex movements movements can be chained together to produce combined movements The following are illustrations of the Movement Types Blend From Tank s 4 To Single Tank One or More Tanks Varec Inc 127 Configuring Product Movement Charge To Unit Typically Ship Ba
222. e Density Tank Height Hydro Pressure Units Tank Level Hydro Pressure Volume Tank Material Bottom Pressure P1 Tank Radius Leak Rate Tank Volume Leak Rate Units Temperature Lining Material Unrounded Volume Net Overfill Protection Water Level Spill Protection In addition the following ArchiveManager Configuration changes must be made The precision of the Tank Level should be increased to allow Leak Detection to calculate small volume changes ArchiveManager s sample Interval should be set to 5 minutes ArchiveManager s Historical Period should be set to 60 or 90 days For details on how to add the necessary additional tank point variables and configure the precision and historical period see the Archiving information section of this manual The following section details how to override the ArchiveManager minimum sample interval of 10 minutes and set the sample interval to 5 minutes To set the default minimum to 5 minutes 1 Click the Windows Start button and select Run The Run window appears wm BR U N Type regedt32 The Registry Editor appears Select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE the FuelsManager key and the ArchiveManager subkey Close the Registry Editor Double click the MinUpdateTime value set the value to 5 and click OK 184 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE on Local Machine E HKEY LOCAL
223. e Dh2 correction to gauge readout for thermal expansion aw __ coefficient of thermal expansion of gauge wire C am _ coefficient of thermal expansion of gauge mounting tank or well C TV average vapor temperature C TL average liquid temperature C HT total height of mounting tank or well in mm H depth of liquid in mm Note When afloat gauge is used H is the value after the buoyancy correction has been car ried out The use of as the coefficient of thermal expansion of the tank or stilling well depends upon the mounting of the gauge When the gauge is mounted on the tank or on the well but this is not rigidly fixed to the tank base the coefficient of the tank is used The well coefficient is only used when the gauge is mounted on the well and this is rigidly fixed to the tank bottom In this case movement of the gauge relative to the bottom of the tank is governed by stilling well expansion and contraction Typical values of thermal expansion coefficients are Aluminium 0 000023 PC Mild steel 0 000011 PC Stainless steel 0 000017 PC 222 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas The corrected level HC is given by HC H AH AH Step 5 The conversion of corrected liquid level to liquid volume is carried out using stored values of key level volume data points for the tank with Lagrange cubic interpolation between The calculation for liquid value
224. e Clear the Resetable checkbox if you do not want the meter to be resetable Define what the maximum volume and mass the meter is capable of counting to before roll ing over to zero Type these amounts in the Volume Rollover and Mass Rollover fields These parameters are only available if the meter node is not resetable In the Data Sources grid assign the meter node to its FuelsManager database points by clicking the corresponding button in the Select column To clear meter node database point assignments click the button in the clear column adja cent to the assignment you want to clear Use standard point selection processes to select database points After assigning the points Click OK on the Meter Nodes window Click Save on the Nodes window The system saves the meter node to the movement sys tem Click Close The system returns you to the Movements window Defining Sources and Destinations To configure the Movement System you need to specify which nodes you are using as movement sources and you must add destinations to the sources A source can contain multiple destinations l From the Movements window click Add Sources The Nodes window appears This window lists all nodes that you have not assigned as a source and lets you select one or more of those nodes Select one or more nodes and click Select Use the lt Ctrl gt or lt Shift gt key to select multiple nodes Click Select Select the Source from the lis
225. e 15 6 Report Layout window Setting the headers and footers The report header and footer appear on every report page inside the set margins The Edit Font button sets the header font appearance The footer font assumes the header s attributes but the font size remains at a fixed 10 point size These attributes are applied before or after the header is entered 262 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas The date and time appear in the bottom left corner of the first page The page number Page appears in the bottom right corner Its font attributes are the same as the header and footer fonts but at a fixed 10 point size l 2 Select Format and click Headers and Footers Select Edit Font to change the font for the header and footer The header and footer can have different font types Select OK when completed entering all information Report Header Footer Format Header C Footer Sime 10 Font Courier New Bold Size 10 talic cat Fort Figure 15 7 Report Header Footer Format window Setting print times and report status In the Printer list box assign a default printer to the selected report The selected printer can only be changed in the Report Editor window 1 2 3 Select Format and click Report Details Select the print status printer and type in the time and file name To configure a report to print periodically enter the number of minutes betwe
226. e 7 5 RTU8130 Interface Configuration window I O Point connections I O point connections designate the link between the DataManager database point and the field device Each device has its own set of predefined CommManager I O points depending on that device type For data to pass between the CommManager and the FMDataManager the CommManager I O points must be connected to FMDataManager point variables One or more databases can be interconnected with the CommManager over a network 122 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Maintenance 1 0 Point Connections 8130 RTU Device System Name EME Intertace Desc RTU Interface RTU Name RTU1 x Type Number Parameter InputfOuput Description Source Database Point ID Variable RTU Communication Status Internal Comm Status int i RTU System Status internal RTU Status Int CLK 00 SysTime Internal System Time RTU CLK 00 timezone Internal System Time RTU 10 00 10Status1 Input VO Configuration RTU 10 00 1OStatus3 Input VO Configuration RTU 10 00 1OStatus4 Input VO Configuration RTU INMS53 00 Elapse Input NMS53 00 RTU NMS53 00 Command Input NMS53 00 RTU i j a j 10 00 10Status2 Input VO Configuration RTU i i j J i Figure 7 6 1 0 Point Connections window Restrictions to I O points Some devices do not allow the connection of I O points to DataManager point variables of an incompatible type As a re
227. e Categories 3 Click the tag name that is to be deleted from the Tag listing 4 From the Actions menu or right click select Delete 5 Close the Security window Security Actions Wed Security Name f4 Report Manager Printer Start Time 5H Categories Default 00 00 XE Alarm S NewAlarmCategoryl 00 00 O Tag a Groups amp Users Y Audit Prin 0 0 15 Configuring Security The Security window can be used to create delete or rename Security Tag settings Users and Groups FuelsManager follows a user and user group security model All users belong to a group The groups dictate the permissions the user has The system administrator creates the groups and assigns privileges to allow or restrict the specific FuelsManager features for that group The administrator then assigns users to these groups Users are only allowed to belong to one user group By default FuelsManager provides two pre configured user groups Operator and Administrator You can create new user groups to build a security model that matches the needs of the particular facility Note To be added to FuelsManager the user must also exist as a Windows user The par ticular Windows user group and permissions assigned to that group do not matter In addition to defining which categories the user group can access see above the administrator can control the specific system features a user group has permissions to use These pr
228. e Database display field Note You must have permission to access these database systems or the data transfer fails Select DataManager Subsystem Add System DataManagers SIZEMORE Select All Clear Figure 6 2 FMDataManager Subsystem window Add or connect to an archival data source Before ArchiveManager can begin transferring data you must first connect to an archival data source Without the archival data source the system does not have a destination to store the data 1 From the Archive Manager Configuration window click Connect The Select Data Source window appears 2 Click the Machine Data Source tab The default FuelsManager installation creates a machine Data Source called FMSystem Access This is Preconfigured to point to the ODBC data source selected during installation a Microsoft SQL or Access database Select Data Source File DataSource Machine Data Source Data Source Name Type Description Diamond Oracle Database System ECDCMusic System Excel Files User FM Movement Log System FM System Access System FoxPro Files Word User Historical Reports System iTanks Archive System A Machine Data Source is specific to this machine and cannot be shared User data sources are specific to a user on this machine System data sources can be used by all users on this machine or by a system wide service Cancel Help Figure 6 3 Select Data Source window
229. e Next Level or Prev Level buttons C Click the Select button The Select Database Point Variable window appears showing your point selection d Ifthe Variable selection shown is not correct click the Variable button and choose a variable in the Select Point Variable window then click the Select button If any settings are incorrect click the appropriate button s to correct the settings f Click the OK button The Define Object Conditional Data window appears 174 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas If you are building a template graphic use the Template Configuration Dialog window to select the database reference as follows a Select the database reference for the object by using one of these methods Click the Browse button and select a database point then click the OK button The Tag Name Point Type Variable and Format fields display your selection Alternatively use the Tag Name Point Type Variable and Format fields and buttons to manually define the point This may be necessary if your system does not have access to the appropriate site database or if the database has not been created b To display quality codes with the data in Operate select Display Quality Data To make this an absolute reference select Absolute Point Path When you select this option the value will always point to selected database point and value d If any settings are incorrect click the appropriate button s
230. e Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR PRESS P3 VAPOR PRESSURE P3 This process variable is the pressure of the vapor space above the product in the tank This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations VAPOR PRESSURE TIME VAPOR PRESSURE TIME This process variable is the last time the Vapor Pressure P3 was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations MIDDLE PRESSURE P2 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE P2 This process variable is the pressure measured at the same known height in the tank typically at a point such that it is normally below the product level This variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator This data is normally only applicable to tanks containing liquified hydrocarbon or those using hydrostatic or hybrid tank calculations BOTTOM PRESSURE P1 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE P1 This process variable is the pressure measured at the bottom of the tank typically of a point that is always
231. e Web Server match the Products defined in FuelsManager Oil Gas Standard or Professional Edition systems for your Site If you have not already done so log in to FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server as described in section on page 269 In the Sites list select the appropriate Site or Site Group In the left treeview select Configuration gt Products The Configuration page opens Click the Add button A form opens for defining the product Fill out the form fields as appropriate At minimum complete the following fields ID enter a unique product ID The ID can be alphanumeric e Type Select the product type Additive Blend or Component Note The Product ID should exactly match the identifier used in FuelsManager Profes sional this will allow FuelsManager to automatically associate each tank with a Product Click the OK button Renaming Labels with the Data Dictionary As an administrator you can customize the FuelsManager Web Server screens for the Users at your Site by providing alternate text for the labels on the screen You can do this by setting up a Data Dictionary for your Site When the Use Data Dictionary checkbox is selected in the web User interface the FuelsManager Web Server applies the Site s Data Dictionary to change the labels shown in the Web Interface screens You can define a Data Dictionary in two ways Import a Data Dictionary file see section Manually enter the alternate values
232. e and the Site selection in the Site list 4 Click the Edit icon for a Site or Site Group The Site properties Configuration form appears 5 Onthe General tab enter or select the information described in the following table Field Description Name Rename the site if appropriate Number Not used SPLC Code Not used Address Not used City Not used State Not used Zip Not used Country Not used Phone Not used Fax Not used Emergency Contact Not used Emergency Phone Not used User Not used Password Not used Re enter Password Not used Enabled This setting enables the Physical Inventory feature for this Site It is selected by default If selected default FuelsManager Web Server obtains current Physical Inventory data from FuelsManager Oil amp Gas and FuelsManager Professional systems or other systems that you have mapped as described in section Setting Up Tank Farm Monitoring on page 278 If cleared the Physical Inventory screens will show the last data that the FuelsManager Web Server obtains from the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas and FuelsManager Professional system Group Not used 6 On the System tab enter or select the information described in the following table man datory entries are bolded Field Description Maximum Days to Retain If you select the Enable Audit Logging checkbox enter a number in Logs this field to determin
233. e exists Creating a Dynamic Condition To create a condition you associate it with a database point and variable determine what visual change will take place change color or change visibility and set up the detailed instructions for the condition You can add up to 20 separate condition statements for a single condition When you save the condition it is placed in the Condition Index and is available to assign to graphic objects as described on page 174 1 Select Condition Index from the Master menu to open the Select Global Dynamic Conditions dialog Click New to open the Edit Dynamic Conditions dialog Type a Description for the first condition Select the Variable Type Select the Condition Type The Display Styles availability are dependent on the Variable Type selected N D ew Click the Select button to open the Build Condition Code dialog The available Code types is based on the Variable Type selected earlier Varec Inc 173 Creating Graphics Build Condition Code x 10 11 12 13 14 Codes Select Condition Code Select Test Value Palette Select Color 1 Palette Select Color 2 Cancel To select the Condition Code click the Codes button and select from the list To select a Test Value click the Variable button and select it from the list To select a color for the condition click the Palette button next to Color 1 and select the color you want to represent the condi
234. e how many days each log entry will be retained 270 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Field Description Enable Audit Logging Selecting this checkbox causes the FuelsManager Web Server to create a log of User actions available on the left tree view under System Logs Audit Log Mail Server If you will be using Alarm amp Event Mailing enter the network address for the mail server used for Alarm amp Event Mailing Mail User Name If you will use Alarm amp Event Mailing enter the mail server User name for the account that should receive Alarm amp Event Mailing messages Mail Password If you will use Alarm amp Event Mailing enter the mail server password for the account that should receive Alarm Event Mailing messages Connection Mode If you will use Alarm amp Event Mailing choose the connection method LAN or DIALUP necessary to connect to the mail server Dial up Name If you will use Alarm amp Event Mailing and you selected DIALUP in the previous field select the Dial up system name SCADA System Select the network address for the computer system upon which FuelsManager Oil amp Gas graphics screens are stored Refresh Interval seconds Enter a number to determine the frequency with which the FuelsManager Web Server refreshes FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Edition graphics screens Report Directory Set this field when you set u
235. e or Water Table The table grid display will adjust to either choice 3 Enter the strapping table density and temperature in the Density and Temperature fields 4 Select the strapping table type innage or outage in the Strap table Type group 96 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Strap ftin t6th gal US 1 0 00 00 0 00 e 2 40 00 00 1 200 000 00 Stap C Water C Hydro Def Density EM Temperature 60 00 Strap Table Type c e Strap Water Table Mode o n c Number Of Table Entries 2 Export Import d Figure 5 23 Edit Tank Data window Strap Water table tab Edit Tank Data window Strap Water Table tab STRAPPING TABLE GRID COLUMNS These columns display the current tank strapping table information in addition you can edit any particular entry by clicking on and editing the appropriate cell The column headings reflect the current level and volume engineering units for the tank STRAP TABLE This selection allows choice of the table type and alters WATER TABLE the table grid display to list either the Strap Water or HYDRO DEF Hydro definition tables Selection of Water and Hydro Def tables will disable the Strap table Type fields DEN
236. e pressure and Z factor as DENV MW x P 1 013 0 08314 x TV 2732 x Z The units of DENV are kg m3 226 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Step 12 Vapor mass is calculated as the product of vapor volume and vapor density both at tank conditions as MV VV x DENV 1000 Note that MV is in tonnes to match the units of liquid mass Step 13 Total mass is the sum of liquid mass and vapor mass MT MV ML Where MT Total mass MV Vapor mass ML Liquid mass Step 14 Total weight is calculated from total mass and liquid density as WT MT x 1 1 2 DENL15 0 99985 Sample LPG calculation Stored Data Calibration 7 points only m3 mm mm3 H 1 0 V 1 0 H 2 2000 V 2 29 213 H 3 2500 V 3 42 217 H 4 3000 V 4 56 311 H 5 3500 V 5 70 627 H 6 4000 V 6 84 122 H 7 6000 V 7 114 211 Total tank volume VT 114 211 m3 Coefficients of thermal expansion mild steel Gauge wire aW 0 000017 PC Gauge meeting aM 0 000017 PC Tank Shell aT 0 000017 PC Varec Inc 227 Setting Calculation Methods Youngs modulus YOUNG 2 06 x 106 bar
237. e process data upon request from the user interface programs and FMCommManager Real time data can be provided to other FuelsManager or third party programs using industry standard protocols Database storage Process data is stored in a real time data array Each real time data value entry includes the current value time stamp and status Each process data item is associated with a point and each point within the database is assigned a unique name of up to four fields Database time For data received from an FMCommManager the time stamp is established when data is received from the field device For values calculated in the database the database time stamp is based on the latest calculation The format is expressed in seconds and milliseconds and is stored in Greenwich Mean Time This time is available for assignments in graphics and reports and is also viewed in the Operate program All displays and reports correct to local time Varec Inc Introduction CommManager This program controls communications with all field instrumentation and provides updated process data to the FMDataManager The CommManager acquires data from remote devices and communicates this data to FMDataManager The CommManager also loads initializes and supervises individual device interface modules CommManager Functions Allocates hardware ports to devices based on system configuration Loads and manages interfaces based on configured field devices
238. e reason is the last update statement in the FMSystemUpdate window tells you where the corruption was found For example it may list the Movement Data database MoveData dat and MoveSchedule dat Varec Inc 145 Configuring the System Update Utility Troubleshooting A possible solution to the Database is Corrupt error is to rename any database files that the update utility finds as corrupt For example in the screen above rename the MoveData dat to MoveDataold dat and rename MoveSchedule dat to MoveScheduleold dat By doing this the utility will skip these renamed files they are not updated automatically After running the utility you need to manually update these data You can also try updating the software version by version 4 0 to 4 1 then to 4 2 4 3 and then 6 0 service pack 1 This will update the databases as you go along negating the need to use the FM System Update utility As a last resort you can install FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 6 0 service pack 1 to a different CPU This will require you to export all your tank points resources and strap tables from the old system and import them into the new one After Updating the Database Rename Your Database as the Local Machine Name If necessary you can start FMSystemManager and run FMSystemConfig to rename the database to the local machine Checking Your System After you upgrade your database system to 6 0 with the utility open Configuration and verify th
239. e the material expansion coefficient used in the tank shell correction calculations Manual entry of this value is not allowed except when the Tank Material is set to Other Used in tank shell correction calculation INSTALL TEMP This field allows the configuration of the ambient temperature when the tank was installed or built Varec Inc 91 Configuring Database Points Edit Tank Data window Vessel 1 tab CATHODIC This field denotes that the tank is fitted with cathodic PROTECTION protection Used for reporting and information only OVERFILL This field denotes that the tank is fitted with overfill PROTECTION protection Used for reporting and information only SPILL This field denotes that the tank is fitted with spill PROTECTION protection Used for reporting and information only ENABLE TANK SHELL This field allows you to enable the compensation of the Net Std volume for the thermal expansion effects of the CORRECTION tank shell SHELL This field allows you to configure the tank shell INSULATION correction method to use the insulated tank correction equation This field is only available if the Enable Correction option is checked AREACOEF This field allows you to configure the shell area expansion coefficient used in the tank shell correction calculations Manual entry of this value is not allowed except when the Tank Material is set to Other GAUGING SETUP This op
240. each of the available FuelsManager tank point input point and output point parameters and their function Tank point input point and output point parameters are displayed in FuelsManager as an abbreviated parameter name up to twenty characters long and a more complete descriptive name up to forty characters long The two names for each parameter are listed below followed by a more detailed description Tank Points Process Data Tank Points Process Data DESCRIPION POINT DESCRIPTION This process variable is the name by which the tank is known to the user This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but cannot be modified via Operate PRODUCT PRODUCT This process variable is the type of product contained in the tank This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be viewed or modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges The product variable contains a string that is the combination of the 20 character Product Code and the 30 character Product Description PRODUCT CODE PRODUCT CODE This variable is the product code part of the Product process variable PRODUCT DESCRIPTION PRODUCT DESCRIPTION This variable is the product description part of the Product process variable LEVEL TANK LEVEL This process variable is the current level of the tank this variable is usually measured by automatic tank gauging but can be manually entered by the operator
241. ect Data Source Level Source Type Selection Current Type lore Manual Comm Calc Local OPC r Bitfield Properties Start Bit Number of Bits Start Data Source Bit L L r Data Type Translation lt None gt n Source Units Undefined i Deadband 0 050000 Data Source System MTOSXS208XSO753A Device Point Description arec DataManager 1 AnputPoint Input1 Test Process Value OK Cancel Figure 5 17 Select Data Source window When a new Tank Point is created FuelsManager sets the default Data Source s to the most common settings however the Data Sources for Level and Temperature are left unassigned This means that you will have to assign data sources for level and temperature but will not have to modify all the data sources for the tank point Alarm Information l 2 Click the Gauge Alarm button to set a Global Alarm Definition to be used for the tank point Global Alarm Definitions window appears In the Global Alarm Definitions window either select an existing alarm definition or click New to create a new alarm definition Typically the required alarm definitions have already been created see Building an Alarm Process for more information In the Edit Tank Data window enter the required alarm setpoints for the tank point Note In addition to the Level alarms defined on the Edit Tank Data Alarms tab Fuels Manager supports a Minim
242. ect the Template option 5 Click File in the File Name group box The Template Graphic Database Select window appears 6 Inthe upper list box under Graphic Description select the template graphic that you want to open with the append button When you select a graphic the database points defined as options for this template graphic appear in the lower list box These are referred to as Tem plate Database Defines 7 Inthe lower list box under Template Description select the database point to associate with this append button If the point that you want to associate with the append is not listed you can add it by clicking the Browse button Select the point and click the OK button You can now select this point 8 Click the OK button The Append Attributes Dialog window appears showing the graphic file name and the selected point under File Name 9 Click the OK button The append is placed in the drawing Creating a Linked Template append This option button opens a floating template graphic when the append is clicked The floating graphic is linked to the parent graphic it remains open while the parent graphic the graphic that contains the append button remains open If the operator closes the tabbed window for the parent graphic the linked template floating graphic closes also You must define one or more floating template graphics before performing this procedure Refer to section on page 153 for more information 1
243. ection Factors NA Standard Density Il l O A Figure 3 6 Edit Product Definition Standard Density options enabled Use Temperature Limits Temperature Limits let you set specific temperature parameters You can enter the specific temperature alarms that you want tied to the product Edit Product Definition Product r Assignment Options Name 20 chars Use Correction Method CRUDE Description 30 chars cue od Y Use Temperature Limits Use Standard Density Correction Method Temperature Alarms Type Specific High High e f v No YCF y Standard Temperature Correction Factors High NA Standard Density Low Low Low Hold Off Cancel Varec Inc 31 Setting System Parameters Strings Edit Product Definition Temperature Limits options enabled Importing exporting product definitions Product definitions can be imported or exported Importing allows the use of product definitions previously defined while exporting provides a backup of the product definitions All files for importing and exporting are comma delimited text files csv To import or export a product definition 1 In the Product Configuration window select Import or Export to import export a product definition file 2 The Choose a File to Import window appears or Export Products window appears To Import Select the file to import in the correspondin
244. ed but no alarms of this type will be activated Enabled Alarm limits are shown and alarms are processed by FuelsManager None Alarm limits are cleared and no alarms of this type will be activated HIGH HIGH This column displays the current High High alarm limit COLUMN In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column you can change the High High alarm limit High High alarm limits are available for Level and Temperature process variables only HIGH COLUMN This column displays the current High alarm limit In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column you can change the High alarm limit High alarm limits are available for Level Temperature Density Flow Level Rate and Vapor Pressure process variables Also the High limit is available for the Movement alarm in this case the High limit value defines how much the tank level volume has to move before an illegal movement alarm is activated Varec Inc 87 Configuring Database Points Edit Tank Data window Alarms tab LOW COLUMN This column displays the current Low alarm limit In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column you can change the Low alarm limit Low alarm limits are available for Level Temperature Density Flow Level Rate and Vapor Pressure process variables LOW LOW This column displays the current Low Low alarm limit In COLUMN addition by clicking on the appropriate
245. ed by a user or operator When setting up the Security module all FuelsManager users are placed into an appropriate User Group operators administrator etc and each User Group is assigned a Tag Category Refer to the Security documentation for further information Varec Inc 69 Configuring Database Points OPC Server Support What is OPC server support in FuelsManager provides Collection of field data from remote I O PLC and other devices via Varec or 3rd party OPC servers Access to measured and calculated tank data via LAN An interface to host systems DCS which provide an OPC client Easy configuration of interchanged data using one window OPC OPC OLE for Process Control is an open technical specification that defines a set of standard interfaces based on Microsoft s OLE COM technology The standards are defined and maintained by the OPC Foundation an industry group with over 300 members from around the world including nearly all of the world s major providers of control systems instrumentation and process control systems The open OPC standard and the participation of the majority of the world s key automation and control providers makes OPC a powerful option in the inter operability field devices automation systems and business office applications OPC Data Access FuelsManager implements the OPC Data Access specification used to move real time data from PLC s DCS s and other control devices to H
246. efault tank detail display however if you require an alternate tank detail display for this tank enter the name of the tank detail 3 Select the required engineering units for all variable types 4 If required enter the minimum and maximum scaling limits for all variable types Note FuelsManager will give you the option to automatically re scale the minimum max imum alarm strapping tables and all other values if you change the engineering units Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank Genetal Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 WEM Strap Water Table Leak Detection Tag Category Default Y Display Quality Data Description Tank 4 Detail DetailMCR_StdDn Variable Type Minimum Maximum Level Temperature 0 00 Volume 0 00 Mass 0 00 Density 0 00 Standard Density 0 00 Flow 4 000 00 Pressure Units 0 00 Level Change Rate 10 00 Mass Flow 3 000 00 Vapor Gas Density 0 00 Leak Rate 10 00 Engineering Units 40 00 00 ftfinchi 6th 300 00 Degrees Fahrenheit 1 200 000 00 L S Gallon 10 000 000 00 Pound 100 00 Degrees API 100 00 Degrees API 1 000 00 L S Gallon min 30 00 poundisg in PSI 10 00 feet per minute 3 000 00 pounds per hour 100 00 pounds cu foot 10 00 U S Gallon hour Cancel Figure 5 14 Edit Tank Data window General tab Edit Tank Data window General tab DESCRIPTION Enter a descriptive name to be used for the point
247. efer to the Values section for more information 7 Click the OK button 8 Click the OK button Creating a Graphic append A graphic append button displays a selected graphic in a tabbed window when clicked You can use a Graphic append to open a full sized fixed size or floating graphic see page 154 with the exception of template graphics If the graphic that you open is not a floating graphic clicking the append button closes the graphic that contains the append 1 Select the Append tool or select Add and click Append Click on area to define corner and hold down mouse button 2 Dragthe cursor to define the size of the append and release the mouse button The Append Attributes window appears 3 To display the append as a visible button in your graphic click on the Button is visible under Style and then select a button color 166 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 4 Under Type select the Graphic option 5 Click File in the File Name group box The Select Graphic Index Entry window appears 6 Select a file from the list and then click OK to return to the Append Attributes window 7 Click the OK button Creating a Linked Graphic append A Linked Graphic append button opens a floating graphic when clicked The floating graphic is linked to the parent graphic it remains open while the parent graphic the graphic that contains the append button remains open If the operator closes the tabbed w
248. elected Deselect the Alarm Defined checkbox A message appears asking you if you want to delete the alarm definition Caution Clicking Yes removes the event immediately in the database Click Yes The event assignment is removed Varec Inc 63 Configuring Alarms and Events Alarm amp Event Logs All alarms and events are recorded to the same log file and can be viewed via the FuelsManager Log File Browser feature in Operate FuelsManager creates one alarm and event file per day By default this file is written to the following folder Program Files FuelsManager FMProject Log Printing Alarm and Event Logs Alarms and events can be printed manually or at specified times depending on the configuration of the Alarm Category to which the alarms belong see Working with Alarm Categories on page 13 Viewing the Alarm and Event Log 1 Open Operate 2 Onthe Alarm menu click Show Log File Browser 3 Select the appropriate options and then click the Open button See the user manual for more detailed instructions for viewing the alarm and event logs Disabling Event Logging from OPC Data Sources You can reduce the number of events logged to the event log by disabling the logging of events from OPC data sources 1 Create the DWORD value LogOPCcommands under the following registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE FuelsManager DataManager 2 Do one of the following Set the value to one 1 t
249. en compensating the Net Std volume for the thermal expansion effects of the tank shell If the option is not selected the non insulated tank correction equation is used TANK SHELL CORRECTION AREACOEF This parameter defines the shell area expansion coefficient used in the tank shell correction calculations Manual entry of this value is not allowed except when the Tank Material is set to Other PRESSURE TRANSMITTER SETUP These parameters define the position of the top middle and bottom offsets for the respective pressure transmitters in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations MINIMUM LEVEL This parameter defines the lowest level of which Hydrostatic Hybrid tank calculations can be performed DENSITY DEADBAND This parameter defines the minimum change in density that will cause the Hydrostatic Hybrid tank calculation to be executed LOCAL GRAVITY Enables the entry of the earth s gravity in meters sec2 at the tank s specific location used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations ELEVATION Defines the elevation above sea level at the tank s specific location used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations LATITUDE Defines the Latitude in deg mins sec of the tank s specific location used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations LEVEL OFFSET Defines the offset value to be applied to the level calculations as part of the Hydrostatic calculations MAXIMUM FILL This parameter defines the maximum safe level to w
250. en print times in the print interval field In addition enter the number of minutes past the hour that you want the print interval to synchronize to in the Print Time field To configure a report to print at a particular time of day enter the required time in the Print Time field If the print time is midnight type in 24 00 instead of 00 00 The Print Status section allows you to set the initial print status The Inactive option keeps the report from printing In Operate the operator is able to enable an inactive report An Active report will print at its designated time once the file is saved and generated The report does not have to be opened in the Operate program nor does the Operate program have to be active in order for it to print at its scheduled time Select OK when completed Varec Inc 263 Administering Reports Report Details Print Status Print Time C Active Print Interval in Minutes Ate Inactive Print Time HH MM Printer File Name Print To File Figure 15 8 Report Details window Editing reports FuelsManager enables you to edit reports of both categories Dynamic and Summary Any item that was created in the reports can be edited such as labels values and tables as well as report formats and print times After a report is edited and the changes are saved it is necessary to regenerate the report so the changes appear when printed or displayed in the Operate pr
251. ensate for the size of the LPG float These fields are only available when the LPG volume correction method is selected on the Volume tab Edit Tank Data window Vessel 2 tab MAXIMUM FILL This field allows you to configure the maximum safe level to which the tank can be filled FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The maximum fill level can be User Defined user can enter any value High Maximum fill level is the same as the high level alarm limit High High Maximum fill level is the same as the high high level alarm limit Selecting the User Defined option also enables the Maximum Operating limit level alarm This alarm functions independently of the High and High High alarms and is intended to give an additional stage of level alarm monitoring Varec Inc 93 Configuring Database Points Edit Tank Data window Vessel 2 tab MINIMUM EMPTY This field allows you to configure the minimum safe level to which the tank can be drained FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The minimum empty level can be User Defined User can enter any value Low Minimum empty level is the same as the low level alarm limit Low Low Minimum empty level is the same as the low low level alarm limit Selecting the User Defined option also enables the Minimum Operating limit level alarm This alar
252. erator commands to field devices i e Open Close Start Stop PROCESS VALUE PROCESS VARIABLE OR SETPOINT This process variable is the current value of the output point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems but can also be manually entered by the operator ALARM STATUS COMPOSITE ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority alarm for the output point Possible values depend on the format of the alarm definition associated with the output point FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current process value and the alarm definition configured for the output point This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified UNITS ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units of the output point s process variable This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate TIME TIME OF LAST VALUE UPDATE This process variable is the last time that the output point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TICKS MILLISECONDS OF LAST UPDATE This process variable is the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since output point s process value was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MAXIMUM MAXIMUM
253. erisis Reset Holdoff 0 00 Display Style Decimal e c cC Figure 4 3 Define Global Alarms window 3 Modify the settings as appropriate To edit the alarm conditions refer to Working with Alarm Limits on page 59 Note When building an alarm limit for an Alarm Template the Test Value must be entered as a per centage from 0 00 to 1 00 4 Click the OK button to save your changes Assigning a Global Alarm to a Database Point After you assign a global alarm to a database point FuelsManager Oil amp Gas checks the database point regularly and presents an alarm if the alarm conditions are met To remove an alarm assignment see page 57 1 From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Points com mand The Database Edit window appears 2 Select the input or output point for which the alarm is to be defined and then select Edit The Edit Point window appears 52 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas A OY 10 11 12 Select the Details tab in the Edit Point window Click the Alarm Defined option button in the Edit Point window Click the Edit Alarm button The Alarm Assignments window appears Under Alarm Limits select the Global Alarm option and then click the Select Global button The Global Alarm Definitions window appears Select a global alarm in the list and then click the Done button In the Alarm Assignments window the alarm limits conditions defi
254. erval is 5 minutes 4 Inthe Historical Period field enter the numbers of days you want from 1 through 9999 days This is the time period for the archive in days Any record older than this time period will be overwritten by newer data 5 On startup ArchiveManager takes the start time the interval and the current time com pares these values and determines when the archive should be updated In the following example ArchiveManager writes the first archive at 08 15 and then every ten minutes there after Start Time 08 15 Interval 10 minutes Current Time 10 08 Note You can set the Archive Manager to both Archive on data change and Archive with a static interval When both archive options are set anytime the point data changes the data archives even if the static interval start time has not been reached ArchiveManager EOM Backup The EOM Backup option is only available if the selected archival data source is a Microsoft SQL Server based database If another data source is selected the option will be disabled If selected the EOM backup option backs up the entire contents of the archive description tables and the last month of data from the archive data tables The data is backed up to files located in the SQL Server backup directory typically C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL BACKUP This option will create two files named as follows lt tablename gt lt date gt dat Point Variables Arch
255. es the system uses to store and access FuelsManager files These selections are described in the Setting Up FuelsManager File Directories The Auto Start Mode option allows you to select an automatic startup mode for each of the subsystems You can select None Standby or Active For example suppose Active is selected for the FMDataManager If FuelsManager shuts down and then restarts the FMDataManager starts up in the Active mode If a remote system is selected the Startup Options window displays the defined attributes of that system Selecting a different system only allows you to set the system options this does not change the local FuelsManager Configuration application Shutdown Mode Effect ARCHIVEMANAGER The system is not archiving data into the ArchiveManager database DATAMANAGER User cannot configure the system database COMMMANAGER User cannot configure the communication interface Any associated I O points are not available for data transfer to or from the database REPORTMANAGER Reports cannot be opened in Operate program Report is still enabled for creating and editing reports Standby Mode Effect ARCHIVEMANAGER The system is not archiving data into the ArchiveManager database just like Shutdown Mode DATAMANAGER Database is available for configuration Cannot configure for real time data COMMMANAGER CommManager and all of its interfaces are
256. ese engineering units are used to calculate the value and used to represent the value in graphics and reports If engineering units are changed you are given the option of automatically recalculating the scale limits Scale Limits Scale limits can be defined for all point types They are only available for numeric process variables such as level temperature volume density standard density mass and flow Scale limits are defined for a couple of reasons One they define the ranges used for bar graphs and trend plots Second they define the ranges used by Operator Commands Inside the Operate Command window is a scroll bar that is used to manually set a new value Scale limits determine the minimum and maximum values of the scroll bar Data Source Each point must be assigned a data source As the name implies the data source defines how data is received to update the point s current value Input points are assigned one source the source of incoming data Output points are assigned two sources one for the source of incoming data and the other for the output destination Each process variable in a Tank point is assigned a source The Data Source Level window is shown below as an example Select Data Source Level Source Type Selection Current Type orc Manual Comm Calc Local OPC Bitfield Properties Start Bit Number of Bits Start Data Source Bit Data Type Translation None
257. eter Field Description Parameter Name The actual report parameter used by the application This does not appear on user screens Not editable Data Type The data type of the parameter Not editable Has Default Select this checkbox to use the value entered in the Default Value field Do not select this checkbox for the following parameters Site Sitelndex LoginSitelndex and Userlndex Varec Inc 287 Configuring Web Server Reporting Parameter Field Description Default Value If the Has Default checkbox is selected this value is entered automatically when the report is generated Clear this field for the following parameters Site Sitelndex LoginSitelndex and Userlndex Null Not used Hide If the parameter should not be displayed to users clear this checkbox This will disable the Prompt User and Display Text fields Prompt User Select this checkbox for any parameters that are not hidden see the Hide option description If you clear this checkbox you must select the Hide checkbox or an error will occur when users attempt to view the report Display Text If blank the parameter will not appear on the report screen If text is entered here the text appears on the report screen to prompt the user Parameter Field Description Parameter Name ReportDate This field is not editable Data Type Not editable Has Default Do not se
258. ew llle 272 Adding a User Group ote dedu ee ulum Ree s bra ON aano 272 Adding a User ou zuo idum due E a d Run e ea E va ded 275 Defining Products ngei imi ie te ei UE Pes es 276 Renaming Labels with the Data Dictionary 0 0 00 eee eee 276 Defining a Data Dictionary Automatically Importing 277 Defining a Data Dictionary Manually o o oooooooooroooooo o 277 Exporting a Site Data Dictionary to a File o o ooooooooooo 277 Setting Regional Settings 0 0 llle 278 Setting Up Tank Farm Monitoring o oooccoocccoooccnac eee 278 Adding Tanks with AutoCreate llle 278 Adding Tanks Manually 0000 cece eee eee 279 Configuring Web Server Reporting 4 281 Before You BEJI uror ere tter ETT elle hh nhe 281 Prerequisites ooo Lr s ER uM Era I Eis edo ey ue i ded 281 Key Informatiornizzz A e CLE eR SES 281 Task Overview Configuring Web Reporting ooooococccconccco mo 281 Task Overview Configuring Reports aasa aaaea 282 Creating a User in Windows for Reports 0 0 eee 282 Create a User in SQL Server for Databases 00 0 eee eee 282 Creating a User in Report Manager for ReportS o ooococcoooooooo 283 Opening Report Madagere irede renee i i E a E 283 Create a Reports Directory in Reporting Services 0 000 eee eae 284 Creating a Data Source in Report ManageT o oooccoc
259. f when you installed Reporting Services you selected an alternate name for the Report Server application you will need to enter this alternate here i e FuelsManagerReportServer 4 Click the OK button Setting the Reports Directory 1 Log in to the Web Server as an administrator In the left treeview select Configuration gt Sites In the Sites table click the Edit field for your site The Configuration page opens Click the System tab uU BR W N In the Report Directory field enter the path to the directory that contains the deployed reports See section on page 284 for more information about this directory For example if the report directory is Standard Reports enter Standard Reports 6 Click the OK button The Sites table appears Choosing How the Report List is Displayed to Users When a user opens the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server Interface the available reports are displayed in groups You must define these report groups and set which reports will appear Varec Inc 289 Configuring Web Server Reporting under each group name This section describes how to create a report group and how to assign reports to the group Note This procedure does not apply to Managed Reports Creating a Report Group n bh uu N Log in to the Web Server as an administrator In the left treeview select Configuration gt Reporting Click the Add Modify Groups option Click the Add button to add a group
260. factor is the resolution and stability of the temperature sensor Changes in both the product and the tank shell temperature will affect the volume of the product in the tank Currently Leak Detection is approved with three different level probes for volumetric leak detection Manufacturer amp Model Volume Leak Rate Test Time MTS DDA 0 75 000 gallons 2 gal hr 24 hour test L amp J 8100 0 75 000 gallons 2 gal hr 24 hour test Barton Instruments 0 75 000 gallons 2 gal hr 24 hour test Mass Analysis Mass based leak detection is based upon measuring the pressure of the product and applying the conservation of mass principle In bulk storage tanks the Total Observed Volume will fluctuate with changes in the temperature of the product The mass of the product in the tank is a constant so changes in the temperature of the product have no effect on the total mass in the tank Currently Leak Detection is approved with one probe for mass based leak detection Manufacturer Volume Leak Rate Test Time Barton Instruments 0 3 000 000 gallons 3 0 gal hr 48 hour test Tank Analysis Types The analysis type selected by the operator determines the method used to search for a leak When configuring a tank the following analysis types can be set Static Continuous Real Time Static Analysis Note A tank typically requires 24 hours to become stable for adequate Static analysis A Static an
261. fic FuelsManager database value is met whenever a specific file exists or at two individual static trigger times Trigger Point A trigger point and a trigger value can be entered Automated Data Output will wait for that specific database point value to equal the trigger value and will then write the snapshot file Trigger Time 1 2 Two trigger times can be specified directly These times indicate exactly when the snapshot file should be written This option is very useful for things like daily inventory reports or statements Trigger File This option triggers a snapshot file whenever a specific file is detected The file is then deleted as soon as the operation is complete to reset the trigger Periodic File The Periodic file is a CSV file written at regular intervals as specified in the Periodic Interval field There is a check box option to export the column headers with the data as well as an option to include a custom Version column HTML File The HTML file is a hypertext markup language HTML file and it is written periodically according to the Periodic Interval field There is an option to include another HTML file as a header so that company logos etc can be included on the output This option can be used to publish data directly to a local or web server on a periodic basis XML File The XML file is an extensible Markup Language XML file and it is written periodically according
262. file is not checked then the data is written without a header This affects both the Snapshot File Parameters and the Periodic File Parameters HTML File The HTML file is a hypertext HTML file and it is also written periodically according to the Periodic Interval field This option can be used to publish data directly to a local or web server on a periodic basis HTML Header File This field is used to specify another HTML file as a header for the output HTML file This option can be used to include company logos or other information at the top of the web page OK Clicking on this button saves any changes that have been made and closes the Automated Data Output configuration dialog Cancel Clicking on this button discards any changes that have been made and closes the Automated Data Output configuration dialog Test Clicking this button causes all specified output files to be written immediately This is very useful for verifying tank variables header files and other options before saving the configuration data Varec Inc 197 Configuring Automated Data Output Configuring Automated Data Output This section describes how to configure Automated Data Output to export the desired variables to the proper output files Initial Setup Refer to the Dialog Descriptions section for field explanations on the configuration window used in this procedure ll 10 11 12
263. file is now available for assignment Removing a help file This section describes how you to remove a help file from the list of available files so it is no longer available for assignment 1 From the Resources menu in the Configuration window select the Help File Names com mand The Help Files Configuration window appears 2 Inthe help file list select the file that you want to remove 36 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 3 Click the Delete button 4 Click OK The file is no longer available for assignment Note For more information about the fields and buttons in the Help Files Configuration window see section on page 37 Managing the available help files list This section describes how you to use the Help Configuration window to manage the list of available help files 1 From the Resources menu in the Configuration window select the Help File Names com mand The Help Files Configuration window appears Help Files Configuration Edit Name Strings Windows Format Context Names Format Context Number None gt Graphics Standard 00000 Products Standard 00000 Strings Standard 00000 Figure 3 10 Help Files Configuration window Use the fields and buttons to add edit or remove entries as needed Refer to the table below for detailed information about each field and button 2 Click OK Button or Field Description Name Field for entering t
264. fines which tank detail template is to be displayed for this particular tank If this value is not defined FuelsManager will use the tank detail template defined in the registry key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINEY1SOFTWARE FuelsManager1Detaill Tank CORRECTION TYPE These two parameters define the volume correction method to be used in the calculation of Std Density and Net Std Volume The selection made in the first parameter constrains the available options in the second parameter For example if you select API C the second parameter is constrained to American Petroleum Institute tables that are valid for temperatures expressed in C STD TEMPERATURE This parameter defines the temperature to which the gross volume value will be corrected The majority of the correction types define the standard temperature for these types this field is for display only KO K5 These parameters are only visible when the correction type polynomial is selected these parameters define the constants to be used in the polynomial calculation ALPHA This parameter is available when an American Petroleum Institute table of type C table 54C or table 6C or a Japan Chemical table is selected This parameter defines the thermal co efficient of expansion to be used in the volume correction method VCF ROUNDING This parameter is only available when a Japanese correction type is selected The rounding options are None 0 0001 and 0 000001 and
265. follows Hybrid Calculation Pp Py Gx D DA XAH D Density Reni G x L Hj y Where P Bottom Pressure P Top Pressure G Local Gravity D Vapor Density D Air Density L Product level H Corrected height of bottom pressure instrument The calculation for the height DH depends on whether FuelsManager is configured to use a top pressure instrument or not If the top pressure is used AH H H If the top pressure is not used AH 0 Varec Inc 231 Setting Calculation Methods Hydrostatic Calculations D Density Py Pj Gi x D DA x AH rt Dy G H Hy Where P Bottom Pressure P Top Pressure G Local Gravity D Vapor Density D Air Density H Corrected height of bottom pressure instrument H Corrected height of middle pressure instrument The calculation for the height AH depends on whether FuelsManager is configured to use a middle pressure instrument or not If the middle pressure is used AH Hm Hb If the middle pressure is not used AH 0 For hydrostatic calculations it is also necessary to calculate the level value from the measured pressures Py Pi Ly Level H x H n Hp P P m Where H corrected height of the bottom pressure instrument H corrected height
266. g a start time and print interval to print alarms In the Start Time field enter the time of day that the alarms in this category should print Or in the Print Interval field enter the number of minutes between periodic printings of alarms in this category Select Print Enabled to activate alarm printing Click OK or Apply to have the properties stored for the alarm 10 Close the Security window Use the Start time Field in conjunction with the Print Interval field to synchronize what time periodic print outs will occur For example set Start Time to 00 10 and print interval to 60 minutes to have alarms for the category printed 14 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Alarm Properties Security Categories Alarm New larmCa E General Report Manager Printer 00 00 hh mm jo minutes r Start Time Print Interval Print Enabled Cancel pr Alarm Properties window can be used to create delete or rename Security Alarm settings Creating Deleting or Renaming Tag Categories This example deletes a Tag Category but you can also follow the instructions to Create or rename a Tag Note The Name column can be sorted by clicking the Name column heading An A indi cates the column is sorted in ascending order a D indicates the column is sorted in defend ing order To delete a tag 1 Click the plus next to Categories to expand the tree structure 2 Select Tag under th
267. g a template graphic use the Template Configuration Dialog window to select the database reference for this object as follows a Select the database reference for the object by using one of these methods Click the Browse button and select a database point then click the OK button The Tag Name Point Type Variable and Format fields display your selection Alternatively use the Tag Name Point Type Variable and Format fields and buttons to manually define the point This may be necessary if your system does not have access to the appropriate site database or if the database has not been created b To display quality codes with the data in Operate select Display Quality Data To make this an absolute reference select Absolute Point Path When you select this option the value will always point to selected database point and value d If any settings are incorrect click the appropriate button s to correct the settings Click the OK button The Dynamic Bar Attributes window appears In the Dynamic Bar Attributes window define the attributes of the bar graph such as color and style You can also edit the data source for the bar graph Communication Interface Maintenance System Name WSIZEMORE Select System Run Mode ACTIVE Interface Status Interface Description Interface Type Port Status INTERFACE 004 Modbus Master UNASSIGNED STANDBY INTERFACE 007 Varec 8130 RTU UNASSIGNED STANDBY Change Interface Mode
268. g directory and then click Open 4 To Export Select the path to save the file to Type in a name for the file and click Save User defined strings are messages that may be used in the Operate program These strings or messages can be used to instruct an operator to perform a specific task FuelsManager provides you with the ability to create User defined string types that may be assigned to Input and Output points For example if an alarm becomes active a message may be displayed instructing the operator to close a valve User defined strings can also be used to display advisory messages concerning equipment status For example a User defined string may be used to display Client Names Client Document Numbers and Destinations The string appears as a data format type in the database The User defined strings are added to the bottom of the data format list In the list the first string type label is USERO Each additional string type is labeled USER1 USER2 etc The string type name appears next to the label There are no standard FuelsManager strings All strings are user defined FuelsManager allows up to 16 unique User defined string types Creating strings 1 In the Configuration window select the Strings command from the Resources menu From the Strings sub menu select Add Type The String Configuration window appears 2 Enter the name of the user defined type Type in the maximum length of each string in the
269. g mouse coordinates 0000 cee eee eee 151 Displaying object coordinates liliis 151 Creating user defined colors 2 2 2 2 000 eee eee 152 Managing Graphic and Symbol Files 1 0 0 0 0 0 c cece eee 152 Opening an existing graphic or symbol 222000 cee eee eee eee 152 Understanding graphic and symbol file types 200000 eee eee 152 Before You Begi eens eee de eda peal AR a EP ds RAE 153 Creating agraphic 000 0 cc ee 153 Creating a template graphic naaa aa ee 153 Defining Templates for a Template Graphic 20000 eee eee 154 Setting the size Of a graphic 0 0 ee 154 Creating a Symbol ei 5 44 Semis A I ERES 155 Generating files euii 9224509 e eO b ade TESI EE 155 Generating multiple files llle 155 Using file indexes 30004 Li cilii a A oe ns a ri 156 Saving fil s il b ard e I a t Ll tod eh ard 157 P rging files 2 n nd aet Zur teta Races Rl sched YO esie x Bde ape ber AD d 158 Merging files 2 aa iS Eu ERE RATER EAR REB ee 158 Using the Draw Tools iyu ee ee m RR teg ees 158 Basic Techniques x4 Lodge 448 ll deni EE 158 Changing the Default Settings 0 0 0 eee 159 Drawing Simple Shapes llli 160 Drawing a labels uii a A di 161 Inserting a Value 162 Inserting a bar graph 2 ass zo nk sa pU pu e x a aoa dee dre GRR d 163 Placing a symbol in a graphic lille 165 Placing an append button in a graph
270. g procedures Defining Nodes Defining Sources and Destinations Defining Groups Optional Before you start Before you start configuring Movements make sure that the database is not in SHUTDOWN mode Otherwise you will not be able to access the configuration dialogs The database mode can be altered from the System Menu of the Configuration program Select System and click Startup Options The dialog containing the startup modes is displayed Accessing the movement configuration 1 Open the FuelsManager configuration program 2 Select Movement from the menu bar Varec Inc 133 Configuring Product Movement Movements Source Destination Groups Ed Tank 2 bd Tank 3 Nodes Tank 1 fad Tank 8 Ed Tank 11 Ed Tank 13 Bd Tank 12 Tank 13 Tank 17 PA m 400 Add Sources Add Destinations Tank 19 Export PBI m 401 Tank 20 Import BA m 401 EEE Check Products History Closing Time HH MM 00 00 History Period Days 30 Close The window above lists all the Sources and associated Destinations found in the system Each Source and corresponding Destination constitutes a valid movement path You can add and save Sources and Destinations from a series of configuration dialogs Selected Sources and Destinations can also be deleted The configurations defined by this dialog control the movement line ups available for selection by the operator from the FuelsManager Operator interface If t
271. ge 128 coded variables 34 CommManager 8 119 communications interfaces creating 119 maintenance 123 communications port configuring 121 communications configuring 119 conditions dynamic 173 Configuration 292 Configuration application 8 exiting 25 opening 25 copying points 105 creating graphic 153 symbols 155 template graphic 153 customizing tank detail screens 176 D Data Dictionary 276 data format points 69 data source 67 data sources Varec Inc assigning 99 bit field 104 database introduction 65 levels 72 real time 4 updating 143 database points accessing alarms configuration 54 copying 105 creating 72 74 78 82 data sources 99 exporting 57 importing 57 parameters 295 removing alarm from 57 removing event from 63 renaming 105 translation tables 39 types 66 DataManager 7 default settings Draw 159 deleting reports 266 device configuration 122 Draw appends 151 165 application 9 bar graphs 163 bitmaps 170 buttons 151 165 conditions 173 default settings 159 drawing shapes 160 drawing space setup 149 editing 171 exiting 148 grid 149 keyboard shortcuts 179 labels 161 opening 148 redrawing screen 172 symbols 165 toolbar 149 tools basic techniques 158 values 162 window 148 drawing space 149 dynamic conditions 173 dynamic reports 259 E editing graphics 171 objects 171 reports 264 edition features comparison 2 engineering units 67 EOM Backup ArchiveManager 114 error me
272. ger Configuration application Configure Operate Ul Ability to change the appearance of operate components such as modifying columns on the alternate alarm line icon size on tool bar and the ability to dock or undock navigation pane Configure Realtime Trend Configure the real time trend data for the graphical display of the trend and what points to graph using Operate gt Display Configure Reports Configure any reports using FuelsManager Configuration gt User Interface gt Create Reports Note The reports created using Configure Reports are real time reports Historical reports are configured using Crystal Reports Configure Security Configure Categories Groups Users and Audit Configure Start Definitions Configure start definitions within the resources menu to define shortcuts to external applications using FuelsManager Configuration gt Resources gt Start Definitions 20 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas System Permission Description Configure Startup Options Configure Startup Options using FuelsManager Configuration gt System gt Startup Options to set the sub systems are active standby or shutdown Also set the Project Directory Default Tank Detail directory Graphics Directory and the Reports Directory Configure System Resources Configure the products strings coded variables modifiers translations and help f
273. gging it to the new location To resize a cell in a table position the cursor over the line horizontal or vertical The cursor changes to a double headed arrow Click and drag the line to the new position Managing report files Once you save a report the next step is to generate the report so it can be available for printing and display in the Operate program Generating a report converts it into a format that can be understood by ReportManager and Operate Saving reports All report files are located in the Report subdirectory of your project directory Generated report files contain the RRT file extension and saved report files contain the RPT file extension 1 mde sm Select File and click Save As The Save Report window appears Type in the Filename plus the RPT report extension Click OK Saving an existing report Select File and click Save Generating reports 1 Select File on the menu bar and click Generate Run Files A message box appears briefly on the screen If the report has not been generated the Generate Report Run Files and the Search of Report Index windowes appear Click Yes The Edit Report Index appears Type in the description name This name is used as the description when opened in the Operate program Click OK The Select Report Index Entry window appears Click OK Generating multiple files Report provides an automated method for generating run files One of three methods of
274. gure Tank Schedule Commands Allows you to change the tank command schedule on the bottom of the tank point vessel 2 tab Correction Factors Allows you to enter correction factors Density High Low Limit Allows you to set the density High or Low alarm limit Density Temperature Allows you to enter the density temperature Density Allows you to set the density of the product Density High Low Limit Alows you to set the Density High and Low alarm setpoints Engineering Data Flow High Low Limit Allows you to set the flow High or Low alarm limit Gas Density Allows you to enter the gas density Gauge Command Allows you to send a command to a gauge or serve Gauge Status Alarm Allows you to override the feedback from a servo device Issue Output Command Level High Low Limit Allows you to set the level High or Low alarm limit Level HiHi LoLo Limit Allows you to set the level HiHi or LoLo alarm limit Level Rate High Low Limit Allows you to set the level rate High or Low alarm limit Level Allows you to set the level in a tank Mass Allows you to set the mass of the product 22 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas User Privilege Definitions Movement Deadband Allows you to set the amount the tank level is allowed to change before alarm notification Movement Holdoff Allows yo
275. h the percentage of impurities suspended in the product BSW and is calculated as follows VSW TOV FW x BSW 100 0 Where VSW Volume of Sediment and Water TOV Total Observed Volume BSW Percentage of Bottom Sediment and Water Free water This is the amount of water in the bottom of the tank and Tank Bottom Solids if any This is calculated as follows FW H20VOL SOLVOL Where FW Combined Water and Solids volume H20VOL Water Volume SOLVOL Solids Volume Correction volume This is the un measurable volume associated with line segments and manifolds connected to the tank The operator usually manually enters this value Volume Correction Factor VCF This is the correction factor calculated via one of the methods defined in the table s above The value is used to correct the gross volume for the effects of temperature Tank Shell Correction CTSh Volume correction for the temperature of the shell Compensates for the effect of ambient and liquid temperature effects on the shell of the tank Varec Inc 211 Setting Calculation Methods CTSh is calculated as follows CTSh 1 ExpCoef x DTs AreaCoef x DTs x DTs Where ATs Ts Ref Temp 60 F ExpCoef MILD STEEL 12 4 x 10 6 STAINLESS STEEL 9 6 x 10 6 ALUMINUM 13 0 x 10 6 AreaCoef 4 0 x 10 9
276. h the report pages 1 Select Page from the menu bar and click on Next Previous First or Last Select Next or press Page Up to maneuver to next page Select Previous or press Page Down to maneuver to previous page Select First or press lt Home gt to maneuver to first page n BR U N Select Last or press End to maneuver to last page Formatting reports Summary and Dynamic reports can have the default font report layout headers and footers defined Varec Inc 261 Administering Reports Setting the default font 1 Select Format and click Font The Select Text Font window appears 2 Select the type of font size and attributes for the default font setting 3 Click OK when completed Select Text Font Font Font Size C Arial Size Standard C Times New Roman 10 Size 8 iv Courier New Attributes Bold talic Figure 15 5 Select Text Font window Setting the report layout 1 Select Format and click Report Layout to display the Report Layout window 2 Set the margins in inches The report header and footer will adhere to the top and bottom margins if they are defined 3 The Paper Type option allows you to select either a legal 81 2 x 14 inches or letter 81 2 x 11 inches setting Report Layout Margins in inches Left 125 Right 0 2 Top D 5t Bottom D 5t Orientation Paper Type e Portrait Letter 8 5 x 11 y C Landscape Cancel Figur
277. has stopped unexpectedly If the tank command mode is Filling or Emptying and the flow value is zero then a No Flow Alarm is activated NO FLOW HOLDOFF NO FLOW HOLDOFF TIME This variable is the amount of time in minutes by which the no flow condition must exist before an alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges TEST MODE ALARM This variable is used to generate an alarm if the tank command mode is selected to be Test The tank mode can be commanded to Test mode this is used by the operator in order to disable all level alarms typically used during tank gauge maintenance Enabling the Test Mode alarm ensures that an operator alarm will be generated when the test mode is selected thereby ensuring the mode is not selected accidentally LEAK RATE This variable shows the statistically calculated rate of leakage from a specific tank LEAK DATA Allows an Enable Disable State This alarm when enabled will alert every day at 12 00 AM to notify the operator that there is not enough valid data or quiet time data from the configured tank to produce a valid Leak Test Report Varec Inc 307 Point Parameters Tank Alarms Data DIGITAL ALARMS STANDARD TANK ALARM FLAGS This variable is the current standard digital alarm statuses associated with the Tank Available status are
278. he Check Products check box is selected the system checks for product mismatch The History Closing Time field lets you enter a time of day that the system logs in the Movement data to the movement database Two scenarios that may arise are Scenario 1 consists of a movement that is still activate The system writes the amount transferred for that day into the Movement History database and tags the movement as Active Scenario 2 consists of a movement that is completed in this time frame The system writes the total amount transferred during the entire movement to the Movement History database The Historical Period field allows you to enter the numbers of days worth of data you want to be maintained in the movement history 1 through 999 days The system overwrites data that has exceeded this History Period with new data Defining nodes All available Source and Destination elements are called nodes You can add nodes anytime during the configuration process There are three types of nodes Tanks Units and Meters Tank nodes represent the facility s tanks Unit nodes represent a vehicle or other temporary storage container and Meter Nodes represent a flow meter through which the product is being moved 134 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Adding a Tank Node 1 From the Movements window click Nodes The Nodes window appears and is shown below This window lists all the nodes available for selection The define
279. he Database Copy Rename Status window will indicate which points were successfully renamed and which failed 10 Click OK Changes or new points appear in database Point Copy Rename window SOURCE POINTS These fields define the FuelsManager database point to be used as the source for the copy rename action Wildcard characters allow you to copy an entire database level at once DESTINATION POINTS These fields define the FuelsManager database point to be created by the copy rename action Wildcard characters allow you to copy an entire database level at once 106 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Point Copy Rename window COPY Copy the description of the source point to the DESCRIPTION destination point COPY ALARMS Copy the alarms associated with the source point to the destination point COPY TANK Copy the tank strapping table of the source point to the STRAP TABLE destination point COPY PRODUCT Copy the product assigned to the source point to the destination point Varec Inc 107 Configuring Database Points 108 Administrator Manual 6 Archiving Information ArchiveManager ArchiveManager is a FuelsManager subsystem that extracts information from FMDataManager and stores itto an alternate data source which is usually a third party ODBC compliant relational database This section describes how to configure Archive
280. he Software Seal Parameters that are effected by the application of a software seal are shown in an alternate color MM EDIT POINT Point Tag NMS53 00 Weights amp Measures Seal Disable External Module Address 255 Channel for Communications 0 Tank Gauge ID 0x00 Gauge 7 Scanning Mode 0x0000 F Ft M Meters m millimeters F Fahrenheit C Celsius G 9 mLA API L lbs Ht3 Gauge Command Undefined Dynamic Matrix Group 0 Vertical Matrix Position 0 Horizontal Matrix Position 0 Write Data Undefined Command Reply Data Undefined Status of Last Command Undefined Tank Level 0 0 Displacer Position 0 0 Tank Temperature 0 0 Minimize Next Examine Download Connections Previous Exit Upload 1 Double click the WMSeal parameter in the CONFIG section of the Edit Point dialog 2 If prompted for a password then the WMSeal value is currently Disabled Enter the W amp M password 3 If prompted with an Update Seal dialog asking for confirmation then the WMSeal value is currently Enabled Click Yes to confirm 4 After entering the W amp M password or clearing the seal a Modify Value dialog is appears 5 Change the value of the WMSeal parameter Varec Inc 241 Using Weights and Measures W amp M Password Prompt E Enter Password Figure 14 1 W amp M Password prompt Update Seal Are you sure you want to dear seals Yes No Figure 14 2 Update seal confirmation Once the point is sealed the para
281. he name of a help file to add a new help file to the list or to modify an existing entry When you select a help file in the list the name appears in the Name field Windows format Select this checkbox to indicate that the file is a Windows Help file Context For Windows Help files only to open a help file to a particular topic enter the topic number in this field If the Context is set to O the Help file will open to the initial or Contents topic Edit Click this button to copy the selected help file information to the Edit fields Replace Click this button to transfer the Edit field information to the help files list If a help file is selected before you click this button it is replaced with the file defined in the Edit fields Add Click this button to add a new entry in the help files list using the file described in the Edit fields Varec Inc 37 Setting System Parameters Button or Field Description Delete Click this button to remove the selected help file from the help file list Start definitions Start Definitions provides access to other programs through the Operate program This allows the Operate program to always be running while users need to use other programs For example you can run Windows Calculator Excel for spreadsheet editing or Notepad for shift logs Start Definitions window Start Definitions Display Name Application Definition Simulator C Program FilesFue
282. he point From the Edit Point window Select a Tag Category if applicable and select whether you want to display quality data with the point If necessary enter applicable Variable Format Details and Input Source information See sections below and the Edit Point window table for more information Description valy Disabled Tag Category Default T Display Quality Data Variable Format Details Input Source Coded Coded Variable Bitfield Data Units Modifier Undefined Min Value Max Value te x Figure 5 4 Edit Point window input Output Entering Variable Format information for an input or output point 1 From the Edit Point window Variable Format tab click Format to select the data storage for mat The Select Data Storage Format window appears Make the Data Storage format selection and click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog You can select to use Bitfield Data for the point Or click the Units button to display the Select Engineering Units dialog to use for the point Just select the appropriate type unit and click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog Varec Inc 75 Configuring Database Points Select Data Storage Format US Select Engineering Units FuelsManager Data Formats Select Unit Type Signed Shit 128 to 127 Unsigned 8 bit Oto 255 Signed 16 bit 32767 Unsigned 16 bit Oto 65535 Signed 32bit 2 147 483 6
283. he text Setting Up the Drawing Space Displaying and Setting Up the Grid You can display a grid in Draw to precisely position objects on the screen and to align objects with each other When you drag objects with the mouse the objects snap to the grid This section describes how to turn the grid display on or off and how to set the grid dimensions position and line colors 1 From the Options menu select Display Grid The Grid Spacing window appears Varec Inc 149 Creating Graphics Grid Spacing Save Options on Exit Horizontal 20 Ortset 10 Vertical 20 offset 10 Major Div s Grid Colors Grid Lines Grid Major Divisions Major Center Line Center Cencel 2 Enter or select the options as appropriate Each field is described in the following table Field Description Display Grid Select this checkbox to display the grid in the drawing area Clear the checkbox to remove the grid from the display Save Options on Exit Select this checkbox to save your grid settings when you exit the Draw application Horizontal The number in this field determines the horizontal spacing size of each grid square in pixels For example entering 5 causes each grid square to be 5 pixels wide Offset Horizontal This field sets the number of pixels that the entire grid is offset horizontally from the center of the Draw drawing area A positive offset moves the grid to the r
284. her reports will be similar but some details may vary The reports discussed in this chapter are On Demand Reports they are generated when they are requested through the browser interface Varec Inc 281 Configuring Web Server Reporting Task Overview Configuring Reports This section describes the tasks involved in providing access to the standard reports included with your Web Server installation Task Application Used Refer to 1 Create a user in Windows for access to the Report Server Operating System page 282 2 Create a user in SQL Server with access to the reporting data SQL Server Enterprise Manager page 282 bases 3 Create a user in Report Manager with the role permissions SQL Server Reporting Services Report page 283 and required to obtain reports from the Report Server Manager page 283 4 Create a directory in Report Manager for reports SQL Server Reporting Services Report page 284 Manager 5 Create data sources and deploy them to the Report Server SQL Server Reporting Services Report page 284 Manager 6 Deploy predefined reports to the Report Server SQL Server Reporting Services Report page 286 Manager 7 Set the report properties parameters and data source s for SQL Server Reporting Services Report page 286 each report Manager 8 Set the Report Server address FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server page 289 9 Determine how the report list is displayed to users
285. here are nine default report types that can be utilized for the Operate program Current Tank Inventory Report Tank Inventory Repeat by Date Active Tank Report Inactive Tank Report Last Full Day Tank Change Report 7 Day Tank Change Report Last Full Week Tank Change Report Last Full Month Tank Change Report Month to Date Tank Change Report By default FuelsManager installs the Crystal Report Print Engine the files necessary to preview and print Crystal Reports This means it is not necessary to install Crystal Reports on your FuelsManager machine in order to view and print reports It is only necessary to edit existing or create new reports In order for new reports to be available in the Operate program they must be placed in the FMProject Reports Historical Folder Historical reports run against the FuelsManager Archive database see Archiving Information section If the necessary data has not been archived the report will be incomplete For example running a last full month report before the archive database has accumulated a month or more of data will result in an incomplete report All the default FuelsManager historical reports access the archived information through an ODBC data source called Historical Reports This data source must point to the FuelsManager archive database This can be confirmed and if necessary edited with the Windows Administrative Tools Data Sources ODBC applet Varec Inc 267
286. hich the tank can be filled see Level Maximum Fill FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The maximum fill level can be User Defined user can enter any value High maximum fill level is the same as the high level alarm limit High High maximum fill level is the same as the high high level alarm limit Note Selecting the User Defined option also enables the Maximum Operating limit level alarm This alarm functions independently of the High and High High alarms and is intended to give an additional stage of level alarm monitoring 316 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank Configuration Data MINIMUM EMPTY This parameter defines the minimum safe level to which the tank can be drained see Level Minimum Empty FuelsManager uses this value in the calculation of remaining and available volume s The minimum empty level can be User Defined user can enter any value Low minimum empty level is the same as the low level alarm limit Low Low minimum empty level is the same as the low low level alarm limit GAUGE TYPE This parameter defines the type of automatic tank gauge used by this tank FuelsManager uses this parameter for display only This parameter can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified GAUGE TYPE MODIFIER This parameter defines the commands available to the operator for a particula
287. his field allows you to configure the weight of the floating roof This value is used together with the Roof Type selection and the current density and strapping density values to calculate the volumetric effect of the floating roof 90 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Edit Tank Data window Vessel 1 tab ROOF TYPE This field allows you to configure the type of floating roof possible values are No Tank Roof No floating roof correction Fixed Roof No floating roof correction Roof Mass in Strap Roof mass is accounted for in the tank strapping table Roof Mass not in Strap Roof mass has not been included in the tank strapping table Kaiji Kentei Kyyokai See the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukail See the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai2 See the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai3 See the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab TANK GEOMETRY This field allows you to configure the shape of the tank Fue
288. ia log If needed you can select a modifier by clicking the Modifier button Select the appropriate Modifier and click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog If you are using a numeric format you can set the minimum and maximum value by enter ing the parameters in the Min Value and Max Value fields 78 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Entering Details for a triggered point Variable Format Details Output Destinations Input Source Alarm E ri Configuration id E dit Alarm Trigger Setup 0 Minimum Repeat Interval Secs 0 Maximum Repeat Interval Secs Input Translation Table None via E Output Translation Table None y Figure 5 11 Details triggered point 1 From the Edit Point window select the Details tab 2 You can make Alarm Event configurations for the input output point here by clicking Edit Alarm and setting up alarms for the point Click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog 3 In the Trigger Setup you can set how frequently the triggered point checks the input source 4 Theinput source and the output source can be set to different translation tables Select the Input Translation Table and the Output Translation Table from the lists You can also view and edit translation tables by clicking the browse button next to the input list Entering Output Destinations for a triggered point For triggered points the output destinations are the poin
289. ibutes 1 From the Attributes menu select Pen Attributes Assign a palette color Select a line type invisible dashed or dotted Change the line width uU d N The change is displayed in the Pen amp Brush Box Setting the default brush attributes 1 From the Attributes menu select Brush Attributes 2 The brush may be any available palette color or may be hollow to allow objects with just a border 3 In addition the brush may be hatched horizontal vertical or diagonal or patterned 4 The change is displayed in the Pen amp Brush Box Drawing Simple Shapes Note To move or modify an object see Selecting an object on page 171 Drawing a line The Line tool draws straight lines at any angle 1 Select the Line tool or select Add and click Line Click on area to define start point 2 Dragthe cursor and release at desired length Drawing a polyline The Polyline tool draws multiple connected lines grouped as a single object 1 Select the Polyline tool or select Add and click Polyline 2 Click on area to define first point 3 Move the cross hair cursor to the next point and click again 4 As you move and click the polyline appears Clicking the right mouse button deletes the last line segment Note Holding down the SHIFT key while drawing forces orthogonal movement of the line vertical horizontal or at 45 degrees from previous point 5 Repeat above step for each additional point 6
290. ic llle 165 6 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Inserting a bitmap i csc hese a aa ee ines Qe Reebok o a 170 Editing objects oci ee Peasy bist m xac uat xao Beye ae a Bald 171 Selecting an object 224 2 v ELLA A AA og A 171 Deleting ar Object 000 Oe A a a 171 Next amp previous z e 12st pia a dat isa ida 171 AltribUtes c soe sosta ds rd tac ata enon dd 171 Push to back amp pull to front ccce 171 Copying single objectsin i225 eia eov png e deed dances 172 Moving deleting and copying multiple ObjectS o oo oooooooo 172 Undolast ud des Re NR PES iss a le edo epa 172 Redrawing the screeri usos a RIMIS VES ENS 172 RESIZING objects uo eee epo dor uh ee wie due p arx AR SU 172 Using Dynamic CONdItiONS o oooooocccoocco rh 173 Creating a Dynamic Condition s a a aa aaa eee ee 173 Assigning a condition csse s 174 Editing a Dynamic Condition 0000 oo 176 Customizing Tank Detail screens llle 176 Process overview 2 2 i24 4d Add ome beg Ad oe lt ci tula 177 Creating a custom tank detail llle 177 Keyboard shortcuts for Draw tools liiis 179 11 Configuring Leak Detection LLLLLLuuuuuuuuuuuuuuse 181 Volumetric Analysis c lt 80 tee dha See eeu ele tis ded Po eg hie aoe OR 181 Mass Analysis 2r ra be taeda d wa deed VR ee ee d 182 Tank Analysis Types oooocococco res 182 Static Analysis
291. ic report 1 If you are not in table creation mode select Edit click Add and click table or 2 Click where you want the table to be placed to display the Table Format window otherwise 3 Inthe Tabular Format window you can set the number of rows and columns in the table as well as the dimensions of the table cells These options vary between types of reports the differences are noted below 4 Type in the number of rows and columns as well as the dimensions of the table cells or select Auto sizing 5 Click OK Creating labels in a dynamic report 1 Select Edit click Add and click Label 2 Click where you want the label to be displayed This can be within a table or no 3 The Label Attributes window appears 4 Inthe Label Attributes window enter the label name An Edit button is available to format the appearance of the label The table Snap option buttons aligns the label within a cell Enter the text in the Label Text edit box 6 Click Edit to format the font appearance of the label These changes can be made before or after the text has been entered into the label text edit box 7 Align the label by selecting the appropriate option button This option only applies to labels placed in the table with the Snap to table option selected in the table pull down menu 8 Click OK A label appears in selected area Creating values in a dynamic report When creating a value for a Dynamic report only individual point
292. ictionary on page 276 Set Regional Settings Setting Regional Settings on page 278 7 Set Up Fuel Tank Monitoring Setting Up Tank Farm Monitoring on page 278 8 Configure Web Reporting Chapter 17 on page 281 Logging In to the Web Server as an Administrator To set up your FuelsManager Web Server you will need to access the Web Server with an administrator account as described in this procedure 1 Open Internet Explorer 2 Goto the FuelsManager Web Server address for your organization This will be provided by your site administrators The FuelsManager login screen opens Enter your administrative user name and password 4 Click the Login Now button The FuelsManager Web Server Interface opens in your browser Varec Inc 269 Configuring the FuelsManager Web Server Defining Site Properties 1 Ifyou have not already done so log in to the FuelsManager Web Server as described in Log ging In to the Web Server as an Administrator on page 269 Log in as an administrator with full authority for the Site you will be editing or log in as Administrator to SiteAdmin 2 Inthe Sites list select All Sites or an actual Site This selection determines which Sites appear in the Sites Configuration list in the next step 3 Inthe left treeview select Configuration gt Sites The Configuration Sites page opens show ing the list of Sites and Site Groups available within the context of the login Sit
293. iggered points process data 0 2 0 eee 320 UNIS A A Bh a th d ER oh ate ii 321 Point Tormat austral halk 328 Coded VariableS oooooocccocccoo KA E A A a AE 329 MOGIfIGIS i iaaea ea a aa ue e ea a tu eaae A 332 Tank strapping table n n annaa aa 333 Varec Inc 11 12 Administrator Manual Getting Started The FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Administrator manual explains how to configure the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 7 5 SP3 suite of products Using This Manual Before reading this guide you should become familiar with the operation of Microsoft Windows This manual is intended for system administrators managers engineers and other top level management A separate guide entitled Fue sManager Oil amp Gas 7 5 SP3 User Manualis available for operators Windows Terminology FuelsManager user interface is based upon the Microsoft Windows Graphical User Interface GUI standard and is SAA compliant System Application Architecture standard for open systems All top level menus dialog boxes and mouse driven interfaces adhere to the published standards for Microsoft Windows This manual uses the terms described in the following tables when describing operator actions and windows elements for step by step instructions Actions in Windows Actions Description Point To move the mouse pointer until it rests on the item of choice Click To quickly press and release the mouse but
294. ight a negative offset moves the grid to the left The offset number must be less than the number entered in the Vertical The number in this field determines the vertical spacing size of each grid square in pixels For example entering 5 causes each grid square to be 5 pixels in height Offset Vertical This field sets the number of pixels that the entire grid is offset vertically from the center of the Draw drawing area A positive offset moves the grid down a negative offset moves the grid up Major Div Major divisions are colored horizontal and vertical lines separated by a specified number of grid squares The number in this field determines how many grid squares separate each major division line Grid Lines Grid Click this button to change the color of the grid squares Choose a color in the Select Operation window and then click OK This setting does not change the color of the major division lines or the center lines Major Divisions Major Click this button to change the color of the major division squares Choose a color in the Select Operation window and then click OK This setting does not change the color of the grid lines or the center lines 150 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Field Description Center Line Center Click this button to change the color of the grid Center lines Choose a color in the Select Operation window and
295. ilable to the Operate program Note Any time changes are made to a graphic or symbol it has to be regenerated Generating multiple files Before a graphic created in Draw can be displayed it must be generated to create a file that is optimized for the Draw application If you have more than one file to generate you can save time by using one of the procedures in this section Varec Inc 155 Creating Graphics During generation FuelsManager checks all dynamic data records to verify the validity of all point names and variables used in each graphic 1 Select Batch Run Files from the File menu item Select either graphics or symbols The Batch Compile window appears for either graphics or symbols The Altered Files list box displays all files that have been modified since the last compilation 2 Select the files for generation To select all the files in the list box click Select All Clicking Unselect All deselects the files 3 Follow one of the below procedures Using Do Selected command 1 Click the Do Selected command A window appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all selected files 2 Click OK to proceed with the compilation of the files you have selected Using Make command Note This generation process does not prompt you if the graphic is not in the Graphic Index You must use the Master menu to add graphics to the index 1 Click Make command A window appears asking you t
296. ile names resources Copy Database Points Capable to copy database points Must have Configure Database permission Delete Database Points Capable to delete database points Must have Configure Database permission Edit Database Points Capable to edit database points from original content Must have Configure Database permission Execute Macros Execute existing macros using Operate gt Tools gt Macros Execute Start Definition Execute start definitions in Operate under the Tools menu Global Silence Audible Silence all alarms on all clients of the system Graphics Access Allow Operate program to open up different graphics to display Import Export Capable to Import Export alarm groups from different data bases Must have Configure Database permission Override Database Value Allows the operator to override a calculation or field input values with FRC superscripting when Display Quality data is enabled Print Display Configure the capabilities to print the display using Operate gt Display Rename Database Points Capable to rename database points Must have Configure Database permission Run Leak Detection Tests Run Leak Detection tests on your tanks using the settings that exist in the Configuration Setup Movements Configure new product movement paths via the Operate program Without this user right all new movement paths must be co
297. in this version View Inventory Data When a User with this right logs in the User can view Physical Inventory data for the Site selected in the Site field The following nodes are available on the left tree view Inventory Management Physical Inventory View Load Rack Data This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version View Personnel Data This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version 274 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Field Description View Product Data When a User with this right logs in the User can view Products and related data including Product Messages The following nodes are available on the left tree view Products Additive Profiles Products DOT Hazardous Messages Products Product Groups Products Product Groups Entry Messages and Products Product Groups Exit Messages View Reports When a User with this right logs in the User can view Reports using the Reports node on the left treeview This right is not required to view reports using the View Printable button on the Transaction Detail View Sites and Site Groups When a User with this right logs in the User can view Sites and Site Groups and related data The following nodes are available on the left tree view Sites Sites Entity Ownership Sites Stations Sites Tanks View Ticketing Data This right i
298. indow appears Type in a description of the symbol in the Description text box Click OK to display the Select Symbol Index Entry window Generate the file as described in section You must generate a symbol before it can be used in a graphic Generating files Before a graphic created in Draw can be displayed it must be generated to create a file that is optimized for the Draw application Generating a symbol makes it available for placement in a graphic During generation FuelsManager checks all dynamic data records to verify the validity of all point names and variables used in your graphic l 2 Select Generate Run Files from the File menu item The system displays a message box advising you that it is verifying the point dynamics of your graphic If there is not already an entry in the Graphic Index in the Master menu item for your graphic a window appears asking if you want to create one Click Yes The Edit Graphic Index window appears Type in a description of the graphic in the Description text box If you click on the Preload on Start option box Operate loads the graphic into memory on startup rather than access ing it from disk when the display is requested this can improve performance when switch ing between graphics on slower systems Click OK to display the Select Graphic Index Entry window The graphic that has been gen erated as a run file is now listed in the Master Index Now the graphic will be ava
299. indow for the parent graphic the linked floating graphic closes also For more information about floating graphics see page 154 1 Select the Append tool or select Add and click Append Click on area to define corner and hold down mouse button 2 Drag the cursor to define the size of the append and release the mouse button The Append Attributes window appears 3 To display the append as a visible button in your graphic click on the Button is visible under Style and then select a button color 4 Under Type select the Linked Graphic option Click File in the File Name group box The Select Graphic Index Entry window appears showing the floating graphics in the index 6 Select a file from the list and then click OK to return to the Append Attributes window 7 Click the OK button Creating a Report append A Report append button displays a report when clicked Refer to Chapter 15 for information about FuelsManager reports 1 Select the Append tool or select Add and click Append Click on area to define corner and hold down mouse button 2 Drag the cursor to define the size of the append and release the mouse button The Append Attributes window appears 3 To display the append as a visible button in your graphic click on the Button is visible under Style and then select a button color 4 Under Type select the Report option 5 Click File in the Report File Name group box The Select Report Index En
300. int The Local button opens the Database Edit window allowing you to select another FuelsManager database point to be used as the data source for the point This option is only available for the Tank Point Ambient Temperature process variable OPC Data is to be updated from the assigned OPC Server Presently output to an OPC server is not supported The OPC button opens the OPC Server Configuration window allowing you to select an OPC Server tag to be used as the data source for the point Varec Inc 101 Configuring Database Points Note Varec is a OPC Foundation Member For additional information on OPC visit http www opcfoundation org or contact a Varec representative Clearing data source 1 Open the Data Source window for the point you want to clear See Opening the Database lO Connections window steps 2 Check the Current Type field If the field displays the message Not Assigned then the data source is already clear and no action is needed 3 If the Current Type field displays a different message then click Clear The Not Assigned message appears 4 Click OK to close the Select Data Source dialog Selecting a Manual data source 1 Open the Data Source window for the point you set See Opening the Database IO Connec tions window steps 2 Click Manual The Current Type changes to Manual Entry 3 Click OK to close the Select Data Source dialog Selecting a Comm
301. int The default is unchecked i e the point is processed TAG CATEGORY Each database point can be assigned a Tag Category which works with the Security module to determine the level of access for the viewing and changing of database point values FORMAT Configure the data format for the input output point for a list of possible data formats refer to the Glossary If the data Storage format is a Coded Variable the Modifier button becomes available within the Edit Point window For all other options except for Time and Date combinations the Units button becomes available BITFIELD DATA Enable or disable FuelsManager processing of individual bits with this point UNITS Configure the engineering units for the input output point for a list of possible engineering units refer to the Glossary You can add input sources from a specific data source Manual Comm or OPC Click Add to display the Select Data Source dialog and select any data source Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Edit Point window Input Output and Triggered Point MODIFIER Configure the command modifier to be assigned to the input output point for a list of standard modifiers refer to the Glossary The Modifier button on only available for the Coded data type MIN VALUE MAX VALUE Configure the minimum and maximum scaling limits for the input output point DISPLAY QUALI
302. ion A local alarm is an alarm set up specifically for a single database point Local alarms are the procedures for creating and using them are provided on page 54 Alarm Templates An alarm template is an alarm definition that can be used to create local alarms Templates are designed to be used when multiple database points require the same alarm test conditions but the actual test values differ for each point See page 50 for details Predefined or User Defined Alarms Predefined alarms are those that are included with your FuelsManager installation The predefined alarm templates and global alarms are described below Alarms for tank points are also predefined see page 47 for more information User defined alarms must be created by a FuelsManager administrator You can define global alarms local alarms and alarm templates used for building local alarms Alarms for input and output points are not predefined If your system requires alarms for tank parameters that do not have predefined alarms you can create them For example the water level parameter does not contain an alarm To compensate you first define an Input point for water level and then define the alarm Predefined Alarms and Alarm Templates Predefined Global Alarms and Alarm Templates Your system contains several predefined Alarm Templates and Global Alarms which are listed below These alarms cannot be removed from FuelsManager Alarm Description Analog
303. iple views of the FuelsManager software The multiple monitor function allows you to configure up to 4 monitors that act as one continuous monitor or designate a specific function in each monitor The individual Operate displays you can place in a monitor are Graphics Tank Detail Alarm Summary Real Time Trends defaults to the Primary monitor Historical Trends defaults to the Primary monitor Tank Groups Movement Summary Movement History Multi Monitor Prerequisites To use this feature you need to install a graphics card that supports the number of monitors you want to configure You also need to install the required drivers and perform the configuration required by the graphics card Instructions can be found in the documentation supplied by the graphics card manufacturer Varec Inc 291 Configuring Multiple Monitors Configuring Multiple Monitors To configure multiple monitors l Open Configuration 2 Click User Interface gt Multiple Monitor Setup The Multiple Monitor Setup window opens and is shown below x Mode Monitor Setup Seperate Conjoined Operate Display Monitor Number r Monitor 4 Graphics feo oW IB s Resolution 1680 x 1050 Tank Detail 92 ys J Use i ETEA adc c Alarm Summary Real Time Trends Ol gia ae NES Historical Trends Oi ge CO CH Monitor 1 EM Tank Groups 1409 120812 1201315 Resolution 1680 x 1050 Resolution 1680 x 1050 Movement S
304. iption Group 5 QI Categories 3 Administrator Administrator XE Alarm leINewUserl 9 Tag 2 schaalb Administrator sf Groups amp Users Al Audit Figure 2 2 The security window Action menu Note To select multiple users simultaneously use the lt Ctrl gt key in conjunction with the mouse to select the users you want to add or delete Defining User Properties Further details for each individual user can be added through the Properties window This allows the entry of the user s full name and other details to help describe the user Note The properties that are defined within the FuelsManager program are not linked to any of the user information defined in the system Refer to your Windows documentation for further instruction To add user properties 1 Click on the Users icon to display a list of users in the right side window Select the user you wish to modify from the User list From the Actions menu select the Properties command 2 3 4 The User Properties window appears 5 Type in the user s Full Name and Details in the corresponding fields 6 Click OK or Apply to apply changes Creating and Editing User Groups Creating Deleting or Renaming a Group After the group has been created users permissions alarms and tags can be modified for the group along with deleting and renaming the group In this example we Rename a Group but you can also follow the instructions to Create or Delete a Group Note Whe
305. is alarm is calculated by FuelsManager based on the current temperature and the alarms limits configured for the tank TEMP HIHI LIMIT CURRENT HI HI TEMP LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High High temperature alarm If the tank temperature exceeds the HiHi Alarm value then a High High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges TEMP HIGH LIMIT CURRENT HIGH TEMP LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High temperature alarm If the tank temperature exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges TEMP LOW LIMIT CURRENT LOW TEMP LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low temperature alarm If the tank temperature falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges 304 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank Alarms Data TEMP LOLO LIMIT CURRENT LO LO TEMP LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low Low temperature alarm If the tank temperature falls below the LoLo Alarm value then a Low Low alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modifie
306. is selected The following additional options are available GOV TOV FW FRA 1 0 BSW 100 0 CORRVOL Where TOV Strap Volume at the current tank level FW Free water Tank Bottom Solids if any FRA Floating Roof Adjustment BSW Percentage of bottoms sediment and water impurities CORRVOL Un measurable volume associated with tank pipe work Water not subtracted The value of FW in the gross volume calculation is always zero Water Subtracted from Gross Volume The FW value is subtracted from the TOV as defined above Water Subtracted from Net Volume The FW is zero in the gross volume calculation it is subtracted from the Net Volume see below VSW not subtracted The value of BSW in the gross volume calculation is always zero VSW Subtracted from Gross Volume The BSW value is subtracted from the TOV as defined above VSW Subtracted from Net Volume The BSW is zero in the gross volume calculation it is subtracted from the Net Volume see below Roof Type Kaiji Kentei Kyoukai The FRA value is zero it is applied to the Net Volume calculation see below Roof Type Shin Nihon Kentei Kyoukai 1 2 or 3 The FRA value is zero it is applied to the Net Volume calculation see below Varec Inc 213 Setting Calculation Methods Net Standard Volume NSV Default Net volume net st
307. is the default value for new tanks and measures the actual fluid in the tank displaying the Level measurement values from low to high When the Innage option is selected the following applies Alarm settings under the Alarm tab are recalculated to reflect your Innage selection High High must be greater than High and activates when the tank level is equal to or greater than the setpoint High must be greater than Low but less than High High and activates when the tank level is equal to or greater than the setpoint Low must be greater than Low Low but less than High and activates when the tank level is equal to or less than the setpoint Low Low must be less than Low and activates when the tank level is equal to or less than the setpoint Volume calculations are based on the Strap table OUTAGE The Outage option button measures the actual free space in the tank displaying the Level measurement value from high to low When the Outage option is selected the following applies Alarm settings In the Alarm tab are recalculated to reflect your Outage selection High High must be less than High and activates when the tank level is equal to or less than the setpoint High must be less than Low but greater than High High and activates when the tank level is equal to or less than the setpoint Low must be less than Low Low but greater than High and activates when the tank level is equal to or greater than the se
308. is the name by which the output point is known to the user This variable is entered when configuring the output point but cannot be modified via Operate OUTPUT OUTPUT POINT COMMAND This process variable is the value of the last command issued via this output point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems and is used to send operator commands to field devices i e Open Close Start Stop PROCESS VALUE PROCESS VARIABLE OR SETPOINT This process variable is the current value of the output point This variable is usually linked to automatic tank gauging systems PLC s or DCS systems but can also be manually entered by the operator ALARM STATUS COMPOSITE ALARM STATUS This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority alarm for the output point Possible values depend on the format of the alarm definition associated with the output point FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current process value and the alarm definition configured for the output point This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified 318 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Output Points Process Data UNITS ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units of the output point s process variable This variable is entered when configuring the output point but
309. itions window f Click Append to add your selections to the Conditions list g Continue appending conditions until your Dynamic Condition is complete On the Edit Dynamic Conditions window click OK Customizing Tank Detail screens The Tank Detail not only displays tank point information but also is used to perform tank transfers and tank calculations You have the option of using one of the defaults provided with your system or creating one or more user defined Tank Details One of the FuelsManager default Tank Details is typically used as a template You can rearrange the contents delete sections and create new values labels appends buttons and other objects You can use any of Draw s drawing tools to redesign the Tank Detail 176 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Two common reasons for using custom Tank Detail screens are To make the tank image reflect the actual tank type You could apply a custom Tank Detail depicting a bullet tank for all bullet tanks and a different Tank Detail for all cylindrical tanks To build control buttons for specific gauge types installed on specific tanks The only difference between creating a Tank Detail and creating any other graphic is how the Value tool is used See Editing a Value below for more details Note Multiple Tank Detail templates can be created you can define which template will be used on a tank by tank basis refer to the Configuring Database chap
310. iveManager lists the current point variables in the Tank Point Variables list in the ArchiveManager Configuration window You can add edit and delete the point variables with the Add Edit and Delete buttons Adding point variables to ArchiveManager 1 From the Archive Manager Configuration window click Add The Select Point Variable win dow appears 2 Click on the point variable you want to add The selection is highlighted 3 Click OK The system adds the variable you selected and returns to the Archive Manager Configuration window 114 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Select Point Variable Type Tank Point Variable LBS Bottom Sediment and Water Advisory Units Transter Advisory SP Units Air Density Air Density Alarm amp Ack Density Density Alarm amp Acknowledgement Alarm amp Ack Digital Digital Alarm amp Acknowledgement Alarm amp Ack Flow Flow Alarm amp Acknowledgement Alarm amp Ack Gauge Gauge Alarm amp Acknowledgement Alarm amp Ack Level Level Alarm amp Acknowledgement Figure 6 6 Select Point Variable window Editing point variables Note When adding numeric variables to Archive Manager you should also add the vari ables min max units and engineering units Failure to do so prevents FuelsManager from displaying historical trend plots for the variable and will make the data archived less useful to external systems 1 Click on the point variable
311. ivileges are divided into two sections System permissions these apply to the overall FuelsManager system and control general access to features such as configuring the database Tag permissions these apply to defined tag categories and control access to features specific to a database point such as setting the level high high alarm limit or executing a gauge command Note A complete list of system and tag permissions is provided later in this section Creating and Editing Users User accounts can be created in the Security window Once the FuelsManager user account is created the user can then be added to a User Group Furthermore the administrator can delete rename or define properties for the user Note The Name column can be sorted by clicking the Name column heading An A indi cates the column is sorted in ascending order a D indicates the column is sorted in descending order Creating Deleting or Renaming a User 1 Click on the Users icon to display a list of users in the right side window 2 Thislist contains all the FuelsManager users and their corresponding groups FuelsManager is capable of supporting fifty 50 different users 3 From the Actions menu select the Add command 4 Enter the case sensitive user name as it appears in Windows 5 Close the Security window 16 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Security Actions war E ffi Security Name f Fuli Name Descr
312. ke Summary reports that list all the points found in a selected database Dynamic reports can contain any number of individual database points You can also display multiple column row totals and averages Object Functionality of dynamic reports OBJECT Functionality in Dynamic Reports TABLE No tables one table or multiple tables can be created OF ROWS IN Defines the numbers of rows to be included in a table TABLE LABELS Can be inserted outside or inside a table VALUE User can select an individual point Tank Input or Output of any active database Only one database can be selected at a time COLUMN ROW Can display column totals column averages Averages as TOTALS AND well as row totals and total averages Can also contain multiple averages totals Creating a new dynamic report By default the Report program is placed automatically in the Dynamic Report mode Make sure that the Dynamic Report option is selected 1 2 From the Report Editor window select File Select New and then select Dynamic Report option Varec Inc 259 Administering Reports 3 At this point you have the freedom to create the contents of the Dynamic report Listed below are procedures used to create tables labels values column row totals and aver ages and pages As mentioned earlier you have the option of using one or more tables to display database point data Creating tables in a dynam
313. kup utility or a method for making bulk changes to the configuration Varec Inc 57 Configuring Alarms and Events Creating a csv file involves entering the column headers and entering the associated point parameters These files can only exist as comma delimited files csv The parameters found in the file vary based on the type of data exported The file types are described in the following table Import Export Data Type window INPUT POINTS Files contain all the attributes associated with an Input point OUTPUT POINTS Files contain all the attributes associated with an Output point TRIGGER POINTS Files contain all the attributes associated with a Triggered point TANK POINTS Files contain all the attributes associated with a Tank point STRAP TABLES Files contain tank and strap table file names SOURCE Files contain the Database tag variable data source type ASSIGNMENTS database system interfaces device and connected I O communication point entries For example Tank 1 Low Stop VALUE NONE Tank 1 Gauge LEVEL COMM GRAY1 TSU 1 Tank 1 Level Tank 1 Gauge TEMP COMM GRAY1 TSU 1 Tank 1 Temperature Tank 1 Gauge DENSITY CALC Tank 1 Gauge LVL_H20 MANUAL MANUAL VALUES Files contain the Database tag variable and value entries The value is an assigned command for example STOP Tankfarm Tank A301 BSW 0 Tankfarm Tank A301 STD_DENS 67 10898 FORCED VALUES Files
314. l as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Using This Publication The Fue sManager Defense Dispatch and Fuels Accounting User Manual explains the basics of working with FuelsManager Defense Version 6 0 including set up menus queries and reports It also provides detailed steps and procedures required for using the Dispatch and Accounting applications Before reading this publication you should become familiar with the operation of Microsoft Windows This manual is intended for system administrators and local administrators For additional information about the FuelsManager Defense application contact the Help Desk in Atlanta at DSN 697 6733 or at the toll free number 1 800 446 4950 Varec Inc iii Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Getting Started os cir a es vii Using This Manual v5 eee ohh ei ti ti vii Windows Terminology oce eresi perierit kreret IR 3 n vii Actions in WIndOWS luce emet a es Dt ate eaten svat ea vii Window Elements wes ob E Ptas rad ENS viii T introduction S25 ciceystawedcuntat es be a Ue DA 1 ud PC Dea A eae eh ee eS 1 New Options Available 0 eee rr 1 Licensing OPUS s esses aet ra Pade tah Bath Ma cava eget Pea ete RG aoe eS 1 Standard Edition ean de Baas we ay EOM Pale te
315. l report properties page for the report as described in Opening the Report Properties Page on page 286 3 To rename the report type a new name in the Name field If you are configuring the stan dard reports you do not need to rename the report Note When you register a report FuelsManager automatically assigns the report layout file name without the extension as the report name 4 To hide the report select the Hide in List View checkbox 5 Click the Apply button Setting Report Parameters Parameters are variable data values that define each report when it is generated This section describes the general steps for configuring parameters Only one of the standard reports TankInventoryByDate has parameters that you need to set Refer to the table on section on page 288 for parameter settings for this report 1 Connect to the Reporting Services Report Manager on the server hosting the Report Server ReportServer database as described in Opening Report Manager on page 283 2 Openthe General report properties page for the report as described in Opening the Report Properties Page on page 286 3 In the command list on the left side of the page click Parameters 4 Setthe parameters as appropriate The table below describes each parameter setting field in general If you are setting up standard reports See the table on page 288 to set the parameter values for the standard report TanklnventoryByDate Param
316. lays the Attributes window for the selected object Ctrl K Displays the Conditions window for the selected object Ctrl P Sends the selected object to the back of the drawing space All objects that were behind the selected object will then be in front of it Ctrl F Brings the selected object to the front of the drawing space All objects that were in front of the selected object will then be behind it Ctrl W Lets you select multiple objects that you can move or copy with the Move Window and Copy Window menu items Alt M Lets you move objects selected using the Window command Ctrl W Alt C Lets you copy F12 Displays the Draw online help system Varec Inc 179 Creating Graphics 180 Administrator Manual 11 Configuring Leak Detection Leak Detection is designed to monitor tank farms and pipelines for leak conditions and alert you to a potential environmental hazard Note Leak Detection is an optional feature that is available with FuelsManager Standard or Professional Edition Using the Remote Terminal Unit the Leak Detection system communicates with various leak detection systems such as interstitial monitoring vapor monitoring and pipeline leak detection systems while bringing all information back to one central computer for monitoring and reporting ease and convenience Monitoring Level Temperature Water Level and Density from field ins
317. ld down the Ctrl key while you drag the cursor Drawing an arc The Arc tool draws arcs and chords filled arcs 1 Select the Arc tool or select Add and click Arc Chord Click on area to define center point and hold down the mouse button Drag the cursor to make an ellipse for the arc and then release the mouse button at desired size and shape Position the cursor on the ellipse where you want the arc to start and hold down the mouse button The Message Window directs you to Define Arc End Point Drag cursor to point on ellipse where you want the arc to end and release the mouse button Drawing a label A Label is used to place text inside the graphic Labels may be left center or right justified and may include an optional background rectangle Also you have a choice of fonts and various sizes l 2 3 Select the Label tool or select Add and click Label Click on area of insertion The Label Attributes window appears Varec Inc 161 Creating Graphics Label Attributes Label Text Current Font Edit Text Color Font Arial Pala A Size 13 Background Color Options o Palette v Bold talic BackGr Rectangle Cancel Transparent 1 Enter the Label name format appearance of the label or set up the label alignment 2 Click Edit to format the font appearance of the label 3 Center Text in Rectangle only applies when Back Ground Rectangle is used 4 Selec
318. le can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM MASS SCALING This variable is the maximum range for all tank mass process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified MASS UNITS MASS ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for all tank mass process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified 310 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Scaling and Engineering Units Data DENSITY MININIUM TANK MINIMUM DENSITY SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank observed density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM DENSITY SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the tank observed density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY UNITS DENSITY ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the tank observed density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY STD MININIUM TANK MINIMUM STD DENSITY SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the tank corrected density process variable This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified DENSITY S
319. le or enable individual alarm tests as appropriate To do this select a code and then click the Enable or Disable button Under Alarm Event Category select a category if appropriate For more information see Categories on page 12 The alarm event category determines which users will Under Event Definition select the Event Enabled checkbox and then further define the event if appropriate To apply a deadband to each limit condition enter the deadband value in the Deadband box To show a message to the operator each time the event occurs select the Advise on Event checkbox Click OK Editing an Event You can modify a local alarm to change the alarm conditions and reset other parameters such as alarm graphics and alarm categories 1 Open the Alarm Assignments window for the database point to which the event is assigned as described on page 54 Modify the settings as appropriate For detailed information about each setting see Creating an Event on page 62 Click OK to save your changes Removing an Event from a Database Point JA From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Points com mand The Database Edit window appears Select the input or output point for which the event is defined and then select Edit The Edit Point window appears Select the Details tab If an event is assigned to the point the Alarm Defined checkbox under Alarm Event Configuration will be s
320. lect Default Value Leave blank Null Not used Hide Leave blank Prompt User This checkbox must be checked Prompt String Enter Report Date This text appears on the report screen to prompt the user 5 Click the Apply button to save the changes 6 Proceed to the next section Setting Data Source s Manually for Each Report Each report in SQL Server Reporting Services must be associated with at least one data source Each standard report must be associated with the FuelsManagerDB data source If you created data sources before you deployed reports as described in section on page 284 the data sources are automatically configured for each report If not associate the data source s manually using the following procedure Note Before you begin you must have deployed the reports as described in section on page 286 1 Connect to the Reporting Services Report Manager on the server hosting the Report Server ReportServer database as described in section on page 283 2 Open the General report properties page for the report as described in section In the command list on the left side of the page click Data Sources 4 UnderA Shared Data Source click the Browse button and locate the first data source asso ciated with this report For standard reports locate FuelsManagerDB 5 Select the data source file For standard reports select FuelsManagerDB 288 Administrator Manual FuelsM
321. lect the Modifiers command the Modifiers Configuration window appears 2 Type in the name of the custom modifier and click New 3 Select a coded variable from the coded variables selection list and click Add Repeat until all coded variables for the custom modifier has been added to the Contents List 4 Click OK to save the changes Modifiers Configuration Dialog Standard Modifier Name Contents List Active Inactive Cancel Import Figure 3 9 Modifiers Configuration window Varec Inc 35 Setting System Parameters Managing Help files Entering a help file name as a system resource makes the existing help file available for different purposes There are two types of Help files that are supported Text Help and Windows Help Format Help file entries can be assigned to Input and Output points in the database in the Operate program Buttons in the Draw application Input and output points in the database You may want a particular help file to appear in the Operate program when the associated database point alarm becomes active The operator selects the HELP button in the Alarm toolbar or Alarm Summary to display the help file This help file could be used to instruct the operator to perform a sequence of steps in response to the alarm Buttons in the Draw application You may want a particular help file to appear when the operator selects a button in a graphic When creating a graphic in
322. lected a Triggered Point Follow the appropriate procedure to create Triggered point Database Edit Current Database System SIZEMORE Active Levels 3 Database Point Name Valves V 110 Status I Valves v 110 E Command Prev Level Active Tag Levels 3 New Point Name Level 2 Level 0 Valves I Point Type Bl e input El C Triggered Bi C Tank Figure 5 2 Top Add Point to Database window Figure 5 3 Bottom Database edit window Database Edit window CURRENT The Current Database System displays the system DATABASE database on which the Database Point list is based SYSTEM ACTIVE LEVELS The Active Levels field displays the number of database tag levels for the selected database DATABASE The Database button allows you to select an alternate BUTTON FuelsManager database to configure POINT NAME AND The Point Name and the Point List display the tagname POINT LIST for the currently selected database point The icon at the left of the point list defines the type of point Users can search for known database point names by typing in the tagname in the Point Name field Varec Inc 73 Configuring Database Points Database Edit window PREV LEVEL AND The Prev Level and Next Level buttons allow you to NEXT LEVEL navigate up and down through the FuelsManager database tree You can also move down to the next level by double clicking on the p
323. ll Protection Shell Spill Protection AreaCoef C Hydrostatic Hybrid Tank Geometry Vert Cylinder v Pressure Transmitter Setup OffSet Tank Volume 0 00 gal US M 0 Top Tank Height 0 00 00 ftin 16th Tank Radius 0 00 00 ftin T6th Middle 0 Bottom fos n Height ft in 16th ni Shell Thickness 0 00 00 ftin T8th Lining Material Date Installed 10 21 2004 v Tank Material Mild Steel y ls ExpCoef 1 24e 005 Elevation Install Temp 0 F Level OffSet Vessel 2 Minimum Level Density Deadband P000 ftind amp th D wn we ie FCT ows en fein16th Cancel The type of gauge probe used on the tank is configured from the Vessel 2 page You have the option to chose from all current FuelsManager supported gauges from the Gauge Type drop list Edit Tank Data gt MSIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel Vessel 2 wen Strap Water Table Leak Detection Transfer Limits High High Maximum Fill l ft in 1 6th High User Defined Low Low Minimum Empty 2004 ft in 1 6th Low User Defined Gauge Gauge Type Undefined Modifier Undefined LPG Float Characteristics Float Mass I g Float Density 0 API Float Diameter JU ft in 16th Varec Inc 189 Configuring Leak Detection Leak Detection page Note The Leak Detection page will not appear if the Leak Detection
324. ll configuration changes to shared resources are directed to the master server instead of the local system During start up the FMSystemManager on each FuelsManager computer loads system files If the registry designates another computer as the server a link to the server is established so that all changes to the system shared resources are updated on the local computer If the local computer is the master system server additional functions are used to transmit changes to all Client computers Maintaining local disk images of shared resources ensures that a viable image of all shared resources is available even if the designated server is temporarily unavailable Any changes to shared resources are automatically updated to local storage when the server is available DataManager The FMDataManager service maintains real time process data and provides highly efficient event driven communications with other FuelsManager programs for data acquisition DataManager functions Provides security functions to limit user interaction with the database based on Windows XP and FuelsManager Configuration Accounts Provides the means to create and modify the system database Updates data values upon requests from the FACommManager or the user interface programs Performs functions to detect and report alarms and events related to changes in the database Performs database calculations based on changes to the database Performs Server functions to provid
325. lsManager uses this value to determine how to interpolate between strapping table points possible values are Vert Cylinder Horizontal Cylinder End Caps Horizontal Cylinder Flat Ends Standard Sphere and Polynomial Sphere Selecting Polynomial Sphere causes the strapping table tab of the tank configuration window to change to Polynomial Sphere TANK VOLUME This field allows you to configure the total internal volume of the spherical tank Used in the LPG calculation method TANK HEIGHT This field allows you to configure the total height of the sphere at the point at which the automatic tank gauge is installed Used in the LPG calculation method TANK RADIUS This field allows you to configure the radius of the sphere Used in the LPG calculation method SHELL THICKNESS This field allows you to configure the thickness of the sphere s shell Used in the LPG calculation method LINING MATERIAL This field allows the configuration of the type of tank lining material For reporting and information only DATE INSTALLED This field allows the configuration of the date the tank was installed or build For reporting and information only TANK MATERIAL This field allows you to configure the material from which the tank shell is constructed This field is only available if the Enable Correction option is checked Used in tank shell correction calculation EXP COEF This field allows you to configur
326. lsManagerFMTools FMSim exe Throughput Calcs C Program FilesiFuelsManageriTanks exe Add Delete Update Display Name Adobe Acrobat Reader Application coProgram FilesVAdobeVcrobat 5 O4crobati4crobat exe Browse Initial Path Parameters OK Cancel Figure 3 11 Start Definitions window Field Description DISPLAY NAME Name of the defined application to be seen in the Operate program APPLICATION Name of the application to run when the display name is selected in the Operate program INITIAL PATH Beginning path of the application PARAMETERS Parameters to be passed into the application Creating a start definition 1 From the Resources menu in the Configuration window select the Start Definitions com mand The Start Definitions window appears 2 Enter the display name application initial path and parameters Clicking browse next to Application allows you to locate the application 3 Click Add The new program is then added to the display name list 38 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Configuring Translation Tables Translation tables define how data received transmitted by FuelsManager is scaled or converted to the data required by the device with which FuelsManager is communicating FuelsManager provides two types of translation tables Lookup Tables a simple table defining mapping of one set of values to another set of
327. lso follow the instructions to delete or rename an alarm 1 Click to expand the Categories tree Select Alarm under the Categories From the Actions menu select the Add command Enter the name of the alarm uU BR U N Close the Security window Varec Inc 13 Configuring Security Actions Wam a ff Security Name fA Report Manager Printer Start Time Print B Categories Default 00 00 0 Alarm b SNewAlarmCategoryl 00 00 0 X9 Tag m Groups amp Users A Audit Figure 2 1 The security window Defining Alarm Category Properties The properties of the alarm category define which server will be used to print alarms for this category and printer settings such as print time and print intervals l 2 8 9 Click to expand the Categories tree Select Alarm under Categories and click on the category name from the right window to define its properties From the Actions menu select the Properties command The Properties window appears Enter in the name of the server or click on the button next to the Report Manager box to browse for servers Select a printer using the list box or by typing in the name of printer Note In previous years a printer with fan folded perforated sheet paper was used to print alarms one per line as they occurred With the advent of laser printers printing every alarm as it occurs may use a sizable amount of paper Therefore Varec recommends settin
328. ly exists after a closeout event has occurred If the movement remains active and further closeout events occur the closeout value will be updated Start Value is the value of the particular variable when the movement was initiated The following are possible movement states along with their meanings Inactive the movement has been setup but has not been initiated by the operator Active the movement has been initiated by the operator and is not configured to use Start on Non Zero Flow Disabled the movement cannot be initiated because one or more of the tanks involved in the movement are currently in use by another movement and this movement cannot be combined Halted the movement has been paused by the operator Failed during the start up of the movement a failure occurred the movement is neither active nor inactive The operator must use the Reset menu option to clear this state Starting The movement has been initiated by the operator but the movement has been configured to Start on Non Zero Flow and no flow has been detected yet Stopping The movement has been configured to Stop on Non Zero Flow and zero flow has not existed for a time greater than the Zero Flow Hold Off Value Combined Movement is a combination of movements that involve one or more common tanks the following combinations are NOT allowed A combination that involves the same node
329. m functions independently of the Low and Low alarms and is intended to give an additional stage of level alarm monitoring GAUGE TYPE This field allows you to configure the type of automatic tank gauge used by this tank FuelsManager uses this parameter for display only MODIFIER This field allows you to configure the commands available to the operator for a particular automatic tank gauge For example Raise Lower FLOAT MASS This field allows you to configure the mass of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge Used when LPG volume calculation method is selected FLOAT DENSITY This field allows you to configure the density of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge Used when LPG volume calculation method is selected FLOAT DIAMETER This field allows you to configure the diameter of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge Used when LPG volume calculation method is selected Polynomial Sphere Information The Polynomial Sphere tab replaces the Strapping table tab when you select the Tank Geometry option Polynomial Sphere Note FuelsManager performs all polynomial sphere calculations in millimeters You must enter the Correction Level in millimeters to obtain accurate polynomial sphere calculations 1 Review the Level Constant grid value
330. m tank nodes unit nodes meter nodes movements and groups import the tank unit and meter nodes before the movements Exporting Movement Elements You must export tank unit and meter nodes or movements separately However you use the same process for each of them 1 From the Movements window click Export The Import Export File Types window appears 2 Select either Tanks Units Meters Movements or Groups and click OK A window appears asking for the filename and location for the export 3 Selectthe directory for the export enter the file name and click Save The system saves the selected movement information to the file 140 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Importing Movement Elements You must import tank unit and meter nodes or movements separately However you use the same process for each of them 1 Select Movements from the Configuration menu bar The Movements window appears From the Movements window click Import The Import Export File Types window appears Select either Tanks Units Meters Movements or Groups and click OK Toce cM Select the directory for the export enter the import file name and click Open The system imports the Tank nodes Unit nodes Movements or Groups from the file Varec Inc 141 Configuring Product Movement 142 Administrator Manual 9 Configuring the System Update Utility If you are upgrading FuelsManager version 4 0 4 1 o
331. m leak rate value maximum leak rate value and leak rate units for the tank are configured on the General page of the dialog Edit Tank Data gt MSIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Tag Category Default Display Quality Data Maximum Engineering Units 40 00 00 300 00 10 000 00 10 000 000 00 100 00 100 00 1 000 00 30 00 10 00 3 000 00 100 00 10 00 ft nch 6th Degrees Fahrenheit U S Gallon Pound Degrees API Degrees API U S Gallon min poundisq in PSI feet per minute pounds per hour pounds cu foot U S Gallon hour Note The fields described in this section for the Edit Tank Data dialog only apply to those related to Leak Detection For descriptions of other fields on the Edit Tank Data dialog refer to the Databases section of this manual Leak Detection Variables Assignment Options Leak Rate Minimum values Maximum values and Engineering Units Process Data The Leak Rate value can be set to a communication source assignment an OPC Data Source can be calculated from ArchiveManager data 186 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Alarms Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 Variable 5 Level Temperature Density Water Level LBS Volume Gross Volume Net Volume Remaining Net Volume Avail
332. maps bar graphs values and labels El Fuets Manegor Draw Filo C Program FilesWFuelsMenaper MP ro jectGrap hice SiteQverview GRE Fin Fb Add Ateste Master Cine Hep NESST EENAO E E TEXT In this example each tank name has an associated button append which when clicked displays a Tank Detail window Tank levels are indicated by dynamic bar graphs representing the associated data point variables Each valve indicates current status with standard color codes Command buttons may be added to each tank or valve that would open a standard FuelsManager Operator Command window Operator Commands are defined for selected points in database edit If defined a window is displayed allowing the operator to enter a value or issue a command In this example the operator can issue valve open close commands The pipeline objects are animated such that they change color to indicate flow within the particular segment Varec Inc 147 Creating Graphics Opening and Exiting the Draw Application Opening Draw 1 From the FuelsManager Configuration application select the Draw Graphics command from the User Interface menu 2 The Draw application window appears Exiting Draw Select Exit Draw from the File Menu Understanding the Draw window This section describes the basic Draw window and components This window consists of a drawing space menu bar and a toolbar Note Only one graphic or symbol may be opened at a time
333. meaning that a level rate of 10 in min would trigger a high level rate alarm if the High level rate limit was 9 This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL RATE LOW S P LOW LEVEL RATE SETPOINT This variable is the limit for a Low level rate alarm If the tank level rate falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated Please note that FuelsManager compares the value of the level rate variable regardless of it s sign meaning that a level rate of 10 in min would trigger a high level rate alarm if the High level rate limit was 9 This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges LEVEL RATE ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High level rate alarm setpoint is 1O and the level rate alarm holdoff is 1 the level rate must return to a value of 9 before the High level rate alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate PRESS VAPOR ALARM VAPOR PRESSURE ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority pressure alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High or Low FuelsM
334. measure the properties of the product in the tank the resolution amp stability of the instruments and how the tank is used Leak Detection has two basic methods for detecting tank leaks Volumetric and Mass Volumetric Analysis Volumetric leak detection involves measuring the level and temperature calculating the Net Standard Volume analyzing the tank data during periods of inactivity and searching for losses Detection of leaks in bulk storage tanks using volumetric changes depends upon a number of factors including the dimensions of the tank and the Net Standard Volume derived from the level amp temperature The resolution stability and accuracy of the level amp temperature instruments play a major role on how effective this method is An accurate gauge with high resolution yields the best results for static measurement The accuracy of the tank strapping table will also affect the accuracy of the volume calculation Errors in the strapping table could appear as leaks Some factors have more influence than others depending upon the application In large tanks over 50 000 gallons the resolution of the level measurement is the limiting factor For example for a 1 000 000 gallon cylindrical tank 40 feet in height a sixteenth of an inch 1 Varec Inc 181 Configuring Leak Detection 16 equates to almost 150 gallons This means that a long time period is needed to effectively detect a leak Another limiting
335. meters that could affect the data integrity are disabled and cannot be modified without removing the seal Any attempt to edit one of these parameter results in a error message box informing you that the W amp M Seal is Enabled for this point All ViewRTU point displays indicate the disabled status in the same manner ml SPREADSHEET MODE ES Point Edit Options C e D u Module LevelUnits TempUnits Den o w o fumss3 00 Enable z Figure 14 3 ViewRTU spreadsheet mode E VIEW POINT DATA NMS53 00 Point Tag NMS53 00 Weights amp Measures Seal Enable icat Figure 14 4 ViewRTU Edit Point Data W amp M Checksums In order for the W amp M official to verify that the sealed point has not been tampered with the 8130 RTU calculates a WMChecksum for all points that have a WMSeal parameter This WMChecksum is calculated by performing a CRC16 on all the point parameters that can affect the data integrity Users can make changes to other point parameters without affecting the WMChecksum value In order to allow the W amp M official to easily view the WMChecksum values for all the sealed points ViewRTU includes a View Weights amp Measures List menu option under the Options menu item This opens a Weights and Measures List dialog displaying all points in the 8130 RTU their WMSeal statuses and the WMChecksum value W amp M Seal Communications The status of the WMSeal parameter is communicated to Fuels
336. moved To finish setting up the global alarm alarm template or local alarm refer to one of the sections listed at the beginning of section Applying a Reset Holdoff to Alarm Limits Some database point values such as level or temperature can fluctuate frequently causing alarms to be generated too frequently In this situation you can apply a tolerance range called a reset holdoff to each limit condition in the alarm definition An alarm will be activated only if the relative change is equal to or greater than Reset Holdoff amount 1 In the Define Global Alarm or Define Alarm Process window under Alarm Reset Holdoff select the Use Hysteresis checkbox 2 Inthe Reset Holdoff box enter a tolerance An alarm will only be generated if the change in value exceeds the reset holdoff amount If you are working with an alarm template you must enter a percentage as a number equal to or less than 1 00 When the template is applied to an alarm this percentage in 60 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas each limit is translated to a number equal to the actual value of the point variable times the percentage Building an Alarm Limit using the Build Button You can create an alarm limit by using the Build button to select limit options from lists FuelsManager only presents options that are appropriate for the applicable data format and that fit other options Building an alarm limit is part of the procedure To
337. n 8 Inches in 025 Kilometers km 023 Meters m 022 Mile statute mi 029 Millimeters mm 020 Yard yd 028 Mass English Tons ton e 065 Gram g 060 Kilogram kg 061 Long Tons ton I 067 Metric Tons ton m 062 Ounce oz 063 Pound Ib 064 Short Tons ton s 066 Pounds thousands Mlbs 068 Varec Inc 323 Point Parameters UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Mass Flow Rate Grams per Hour g hr 145 Grams per Minute g min 144 Grams per Second g sec 143 Kilograms per day kg day 149 Kilograms per Hour kg hr 148 Kilograms per Minute kg min 147 Kilograms per Second kg sec 146 Long Tons per Day ton l day 142 Long Tons per Hour ton l hr 141 Long Tons per Minute ton l min 140 Metric Tons per Day ton m day 136 Metric Tons per Hour ton m hour 135 Metric Tons per Minute ton m min 134 M pounds per Day M pounds per Hour M pounds per Minute M pounds per Second Pounds per Day Ib day 133 Pounds per Hour Ib hr 132 Pounds per Minute Ib min 131 Pounds per Second Ib sec 130 Short Tons per Day ton s day 139 Short Tons per Hour ton s hr 138 Short Tons per Minute ton s min 137 Power Heat Transfer BTU IT per Hour BTU hr 212 BTU IT per Minute BTU min 211 BTU IT per Second BTU sec 210 Calories per Minute cal min 213 Horsepower HP 217 KiloVolt Ampere kVA 216 Kilowatt kW 215 Watt Ww 214
338. n a new group is created the permissions default to Operator group rights Varec Inc 17 Configuring Security Note The Name column can be sorted by clicking the Name column heading An A indi cates the column is sorted in ascending order a D indicates the column is sorted in descending order To create a group 1 n A uu N Click on Groups icon Click on the group name that is to be renamed in the Groups listing From the Actions menu select the Rename command Enter a new name for the Group Close the Security window The groups within FuelsManager are Not linked to the groups in Windows XP or 2000 The security window can be used to create delete or rename Security Group settings Gi Securty Description Categories amp Operator 2 Groups l Administrator amp NewGroup1 Operator a Administrator NewGroup1 Users hg Audit Adding Users to a Group Note A user can only belong to one group A user can be added to a group after the group is defined A user does not have to already exist under the Users option in order to be added to a group When the user is added to a group the user name is automatically added to the list under Users To add a user l u A U N Click on the next to the Groups icon to expand the tree structure Click on the group name that the user will be added to From the Actions menu select the Add command Enter a name for the new user
339. n access databases from other network machines On Line Configuration FuelsManager also allows users with the correct privileges to configure local or networked DataManagers You can configure the database while FMDataManager is active and fully operational as On line Configuration does not interfere with normal real time database functions Alarms Alarms can be set in FuelsManager that essentially compare a current database value against preset conditions If an Alarm is defined for a database value the comparison is be made each time the value changes Each Alarm has an associated priority that may be indicated by a distinctive audible tone and color and user access to alarm groups may be restricted through the Security setup All alarms returns to normal and acknowledgements are automatically logged to a daily alarm and event log disk file and the system can be configured to automatically generate a printout Refer to chapters on FuelsManager Configuration and Reports for further Alarm and Security information Events And Event Logging Events are based on changes to a database value by a defined amount or by operator command All Events are automatically logged to a daily alarm and event log disk file and can be configured to automatically generate a printout to a specified printer Trends present data in a time versus magnitude format simulating a conventional strip chart recorder Varec Inc Introduction On line
340. n checking the Weights amp Measures seals Sealed modules that are changed in any way in the system will not appear with the W amp M approval indicator The module seals are read when the particular module is started and loaded So any changes in W amp M seal indication will only be effective when the module is restarted reloaded FMCommManager will mark data as sealed if both the driver library and FMCommManager exe modules are sealed Specifically for the 8130 RTU the files cmdc81 30 dll and the cmds81 30 dll in addition to the RTU point must also be sealed FMDataManager will mark data as sealed if the FMDataManager exe module is sealed and the process variable is sealed for the respective Tag If the process variable is calculated then the VolumeCorrection dll library module must be sealed If the process variable is an input from FMCommManager then the data must also be sealed by the driver FMArchiveManager will mark data in the archive as sealed if the FMSystem dll library the DCSComm dll library and FMArchiveManager exe modules are sealed and the data is sealed by FMDataManager Varec Inc 247 Using Weights and Measures FMOperate will display data as sealed on graphics tank details and real time trends if the FMSystem dll library the DCSComm dll library and OperNT exe modules are sealed and the data is sealed by FMDataManager FMOperate will display data as sealed on historical trends if the FMSystem dll li
341. n port Configure Database Configure the database These changes are instantly configured into the database Configure Graphics Configure any graphics run Draw gt FuelsManager Configuration gt Draw Graphics Configure Groups Format Modify the format of existing tank group displays add delete insert and modify columns select column units set column headings add tanks remove tanks set tank data Configure Groups Configure the tank groups within Operate Also create delete and modify tank templates Configure Historical Trend Configure the historical trend data for the graphical display of the trend and of what points to graph Configure Leak Detection Configure the Leak Detection operations in FuelsManager Configuration Configure Macros Create Record and Delete macros using Operate gt Tools gt Macro Configure Movement History Data Ability to edit movement history data Configure Movement History Data Table Ability to change the appearance of the movement history screen such as resize reorder add and delete columns Configure Movement View Modify the format of the existing summary add delete insert and modify columns select column units set column headings Configure Movements Configure new product movement paths via the Operate program Without this user right all new movement paths must be configured using the FuelsMana
342. nager graphic is sized when it is displayed in Operate by associating one of the following settings with the graphic l Use Client Area graphic appears in a tabbed window and is automatically sized to fit the window area This is the default setting Floating Graphic graphic appears in a separate window that appears above the Operate tabbed window display Fixed Size Graphic graphic appears in a tabbed window but has a fixed size independent of the window size Select Graphic Size Options from the Edit menu item 154 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Select one of the options If you select Floating Graphic or Fixed Size Graphic enter the exact size for the graphic in pixels in the Width and Height fields Caution If you change a Use Client Area graphic to a Floating or Fixed Size graphic ele ments in the graphic could be lost if you set a smaller size for the graphic Click the OK button Creating a symbol Select New Symbol from the File menu item Construct the symbol using the geometric tools as well as other symbols Save the symbol by selecting Save As from the File menu Enter the symbol name including the SYM file extension Once the symbol is saved you must generate the file Select Generate Run Files from the File menu If an entry does not exist in the Symbol Index in the Master menu item a window appears asking if you want to create one Click Yes The Edit Symbol Index w
343. nd you can set the trigger value The Trigger Point that you use must be an Input point and must be set toa Manual Data Source When the trigger point equals the trigger value Automated Data Output will write the snapshot file This method can be used to manually initiate the log process when needed or to cause the log process to initiate automatically whenever a particular event takes place Reset Value After the Trigger Value is reached and a snapshot file is created Automated Data Output sets the Trigger Point value to the Reset Value Trigger Time 1 Trigger Time 2 Two distinct trigger times can set so that the log process runs once or twice every 24 hours To seta trigger time check the box to the left of the time field you want to set and then enter the trigger time into the appropriate field Trigger File This field specifies an optional trigger on the existence of a specific file If a file with the full path to the file is specified then the log process is initiated whenever the existence of this file is detected This file is subsequently deleted to reset the trigger The button next to this field opens a browse window to make it easier to specify the trigger file Snapshot File A Snapshot file is an CSV file written when any of the above Trigger events take place and is designed as a snapshot of the data at the moment in time at which the trigger was tripped This file can be used
344. ndard coded variables that came with your FuelsManager system Coded Variables 1 January 27 gt 53 Disable Input 79 High 2 February 28 Abort 54 Disable 80 High High 3 March 29 Active 55 Disabled 81 Hold 4 April 30 Adv Low 56 Down 82 Holiday 5 May 31 Adv High 57 Early 83 Hour 6 June 32 Advisory Low 58 Emer Shutdown 84 Hours 7 July 33 Advisory High 59 Enable I O 85 In 8 August 34 All 60 Enable Input 86 Inactive 9 September 35 Auto 61 Enable 87 Increase 10 October 36 Automatic 62 Enabled 88 Increasing 11 November 37 Average 63 Error 89 Indirect 12 December 38 Both 64 Executing 90 Initialize 13 Sunday 39 Bottom 65 Extend 91 Kill 14 Monday 40 Cascade 66 Failure 92 Late 15 Tuesday 41 Clear 67 Failed 93 Left 16 Wednesday 42 Close 68 False 94 Load 17 Thursday 43 Closed 69 Fault 95 Local 18 Friday 44 Closing 70 Flow 96 Locked 19 Saturday 45 Cool 71 Force 97 Lock 20 Normal 46 CoolDown 72 Forced 98 LOS 21 Alarm 47 Days 73 Halted 99 Loss of Signal 22 DB Config Error 48 Decrease 74 Halt 100 Critical Zone 23 Tank Calc Error 49 Decreasing 75 Heat amp Cool 101 Movement Alarm 24 Acknowledged 50 Default 76 Heat 102 Low 25 Unacknowledged 51 Direct 77 Strap Error 103 Low Low 26 lt 52 Disable I O 78 API Corr Error 1
345. ned in the global alarm appear in the Alarm Limit Enable list You can also create new global alarms edit alarms or perform other tasks if needed at this stage Under Alarm Limit Enable disable or enable individual alarm tests as appropriate To do this select a code and then click the Enable or Disable button To assign a graphic to the alarm use the Alarm Graphic options as described on page 56 To assign a help file text or Windows Help to the alarm use the Alarm Help options as described on page 57 Under Alarm Event Category select an alarm category if appropriate You can assign alarms to alarm categories see the Security section to ensure that operators are only presented with the alarms that apply to them For more information about alarm categories including instructions for adding categories see Categories on page 12 Click the OK button Importing and Exporting Global Alarms and Templates Global alarms and alarm templates can be imported or exported as a comma delimited text file with the csv extension This is useful if alarms are defined for another database or as a backup method Importing Global Alarms and Templates 1 2 3 From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Alarms com mand the Global Alarm Definitions window appears Click Import the Import Alarm Definition File window appears Select the comma delimited text file you want to import and click O
346. nfiguration window The range information is used as the default minimum maximum values for display objects like bar graphs and trends in addition to the minimum maximum values for operator command windowes LEVEL MININIUM TANK MINIMUM LEVEL SCALING This variable is the minimum range for the level water level solids level and gauge position process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL MAXIMIUM TANK MAXIMUM LEVEL SCALING This variable is the maximum range for the level water level solids level and gauge position process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified LEVEL MININIUM EMPTY MINIMUM TANK EMPTY LEVEL This variable is the minimum level to which the tank can be safely drained This variable is entered when configuring the tank point it can viewed but cannot be modified via Operate LEVEL MAXIMUM FILL MAXIMUM TANK FILL LEVEL This variable is the maximum level to which the tank can be safely filled This variable is entered when configuring the tank point it can be viewed but cannot be modified via Operate LEVEL UNITS LEVEL ENGINEERING UNITS This variable is the engineering units for the level water level solids level and gauge position process variables This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified TEMPERATURE MININIUM TANK MINIMUM TEMP SCALING
347. nfigure via the FuelsManager Configuration application Permissions that are set as the default for the operator group Varec Inc 21 Configuring Security Security x Actions Wad Secufly TN a H Q Categories 19 Bsw Alarm MU Ambient Temperature A 0 Tag OY Configure Tank Product Figg Groups OO Configure Tank Scheduled Commands B Administrator D9 Correction Factors amp ff Access OW Density EEE Permissions LI Density High Low Limit 93 Systems OO Density Temperature amp amp Operator OO Engineering Data SENA E19 Flow High Low Limit E ccess i GA ems OO Gas Density ERE Permissions dl System MO Gauge Command 0 Tag OO Gauge Status Alarm E MU Issue Output Command pep Default OO Level ie ln Systems 29 Level High Low Limit de Users OO Level HiHi LoLo Limit i Audit OO Level Rate High Low Limit OO Mass OF Movement Deadband OO Movement Holdoff OO No Flow Holdoff OS Operations Data 19 Pressure High Low Limit OO Process Connection Data zj Figure 2 3 The security window showing a list of permissions Permissions that are set to the default for the operator group are marked with an asterisk in the table below User Privilege Definitions BSW Allows you to enter the percentage of Bottom Sediment and Water Ambient Temperature Allows you to enter ambient temperature Configure Tank Product Allows you to change the product in the tank Confi
348. nformation about each setting see Creating and Assigning a Local Alarm on page 54 To edit the alarm conditions refer to Working with Alarm Limits on page 59 3 Click the OK button to save your changes Assigning a Graphic or a Help File to an Alarm When you assign a local or global alarm to a database point You can set up your alarms to make help graphics and help files available when an alarm occurs You can select from a number of standard graphics to display or use a help files htx to give the operator more information or instructions regarding the alarm Before You Begin All alarm help files must be properly assigned and entered into Fuels Manager with the Help Files Configuration feature see Defining System Resources Graphic files must have been generated and must be included in the Graphic File Index before they can be associated with alarms Refer to section Using file indexes on page 156 for more information Assigning an Alarm Graphic to an Alarm Any graphic included in the Graphics Index can be assigned to an alarm for a specific database point During the assignment process you can decide if the graphic will automatically appear when the alarm occurs or if the operator must take an action to show the alarm For more information about the Graphic Index see section Using file indexes on page 156 Before you begin open the Alarm Assignments window as described in section on page 54 1 In
349. ng the FuelsManager Configuration application System Shutdown Shutting down FMSystemManager closes all FuelsManager programs such as the FMDataManager FMCommManager ArchiveManager and the ReportManager System Resources As mentioned previously FMSystemManager manages certain system resources that are maintained in files These files may be managed independently on each computer or cooperatively for a network of computers The SERVER value under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software FuelsManager in the registry controls this functionality System Manager accomplishes this by using either Independent system files or Master system files Independent System Files By default the local computer independently maintains all system resource files The SERVER registry key contains the local computer system name Configuration changes are applied to the local files and are not visible to other FuelsManager stations on a Local Area Network LAN The default Independent method is normally used for single computer FuelsManager systems This method is also used when interconnected systems are using different languages or when Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas the client computer is connected to the main FuelsManager system using low speed serial communications Master System Files Under this method a master server maintains multiple computer systems The SERVER registry key contains the master server s computer name A
350. nt Options Font Courier New Bold Size 10 Edit talic Table Snap Lefi t eH Cancel Creating values in a summary report When creating a value for a Summary report the first step is to establish the Independent Variable for which all the database points will be derived Then select the point variables to be placed in the remaining columns In runtime the points and corresponding database are listed in the first column The remaining columns contain variables such as level and temperature Refer to the Summary Report Summary window displayed from the Report Menu to review the defined specifications if necessary Refer to the Values section for an elaborate description 1 Select Edit click Add and click Value 2 Click on the first column cell in the second row 3 The Database Value Attributes window appears 4 The Database Value Attributes window allows you to set the appearance field width and positioning of the Independent Variable The Independent Variable or tag cannot be changed from this window The databases were selected earlier in the Summary Report Setup window In runtime the database points assume the Independent Variable s appear ance attributes 5 Click OK when complete Example Database Point Tag appears in the selected cell This step only occurs once per report 6 Click on the next column cell in the second row The Select Point Variable window appears 7 Choose the desired point vari
351. nt window 138 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Editing Movement Paths This section describes how to edit defined Movements Sources and Destinations can only be added or deleted Nodes the basic component of Sources and Destinations can be deleted or modified Modifying Nodes This feature is used mostly when users want to enter a name other than the default level name available during Tank Note Each Node name must be unique 1 From the Movements window click Nodes The Nodes window appears This window lists all nodes and lets you select one or more nodes Click on the desired node The Node is highlighted and the Modify button is enabled Click Modify The Node Name window appears as shown below Type in the new name and click OK uU bh uu N The system returns you to the Nodes window highlighting the new node name in alpha betical order The Save button becomes enabled 6 Click Save The system saves your changes Node Name T Cancel Deleting Nodes Note Only those nodes that have not been assigned as a source or destination can be deleted If you have chosen a node assigned as a source or destination the Delete button will not be enabled 1 From the Movements window click Nodes The Nodes window appears This window lists all the nodes 2 Click one or more nodes Use the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple nodes Click Delete The selected node or nodes are erased
352. ntenarce ticos a Ede RR Ae st e e Ut 123 Change interface mode eee ras 124 Device maintenance lille 124 8 Configuring Product Movement LLLTTLLuuuuuuuuesn 127 Movement ypes cirer irie tiaan le heh hh ees 127 Blend la M aS 127 Charge tee rias EA AA A ria 128 Receipt tala as 128 unm PP 128 Shipment uus ara Oi lt gets Da 129 A eed ae CE Set le Sa es as 129 Walter drail icon lA Ai dise Ed 129 To A seats Se te E ee ace heres Sh ce aed oae D ite tend edi teed 129 Transfer by Level cuu fae e a ee ee ee 130 Transfer by Volume orMass llle 130 Definitions 2d cse ER eth RR da dg ERR RR PY DR dod 131 Movement summary sss 131 Receipt 5 cus Aint ata dents Zoe Sec oan da ale has ares o xA Matt need 131 Shipment aru A REA exe eem A mad is 131 Movement history c ria a dad 133 Defining Movement Paths ooocccccccc n 133 Before you start i eve ith ak ped e ai REY Nd eae ae edad Pee eS 133 Accessing the movement configuration 2 00000 les 133 Defining nodes aise ciety Mes tex esque ER DER eas m EAR RR E oot 134 Defining Sources and Destinations llle 137 Defining gro ps zoe seein ect ce RP e Hle Datis Gg ca rele bcp d 138 Editing Movement Paths oooocccccccoc rn 139 Modifying Nodes ssl ls RE ARR EE ERR hd Ron RUE Rn dd 139 Deleting Nodes rude ESSA REEL 139 Deleting Sources and Destinations llle 139 Exporting amp Importing Movement Element
353. nts window for a specific database point When you use this method the data format of the global alarms and templates that you can create or modify is constrained to the data format of the point that you are editing See Assigning a Global Alarm to a Database Point on page 52 for more information Creating a Global Alarm or Alarm Template 1 Open the Global Alarm Definitions window In the Used column template indicates an Alarm Template A number appearing in the Used column identifies the number of database points using the Global Alarm Click New the Define Global Alarm window appears Define Global Alarm Alarm Name Description Analog Alarm Template for Standard Analog Data Format Global Process Type Global Definition Select Undefined x C Template Edit Test Condition ri Ln iE Alarm Reset Holdoff IV Use Hysterisis Reset Holdoff 0 00 Display Style Decimal JS cC E Help Cancel Figure 4 2 Define Global Alarms window 3 Type the alarm name and description The name and description appear in the Global Alarm Definitions window Under Global Process Type Select the Global Definition option to create a global alarm Select the Template option to create an alarm template Under Data Format click Select and select a format This determines which database points this global alarm or template can be assigned to points with the same format Under Edit Test Condition set
354. ny Destination or Source node such as a pier barge or pipeline 4 Click OK The Node Name window appears and is shown below Node Name D Cancel 5 Type in the Unit Node name and click OK 6 Click Save The system saves the unit node to the Movement system 7 Click Close The system returns you to the Movements window Adding a Meter Node 1 From the Movements window click Nodes The Nodes window appears This window lists all the nodes available for selection The defined nodes are listed by name and type From this window you can add delete or modify nodes in the movement system 2 Click Add The Node Type window appears 3 Select Meter and click OK The Meter Node window appears and is shown below Meter Node Name IV Resetable Volume Rollover Mass Rollover Data Sources 136 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 10 11 12 Note The reset data source is typically connected to a FuelsManager output point which is used to send a command to a PLC RTU to cause the flow meter accumulator to be reset Note Meter nodes should be assigned to FuelsManager Input type points Connections are only allowed to input points of data type double In addition the input point must be con figured with engineering units that match the meter node variable being connected Volume units for Gross Net Volume Type the Name of the meter node Make the necessary settings for the meter nod
355. o allow the logging of events from OPC data sources Set the value to zero 0 to disable the logging of events from OPC data sources 64 Administrator Manual 5 Configuring Database Points Introduction to Databases The FuelsManager database is an arrangement of data files that work together to retain real time and calculated data This data is represented by elements called Points and are arranged in a tree like structure with up to four levels The levels are arranged from broad Level X to specific Level 0 the default is three levels To set the number of levels see page 72 On each execution cycle the controlling system called the DataManager performs tank calculations database calculations and alarm detection data conversion and or reporting based on a points value change Configuring a database involves creating points Alarms and events can be assigned to these points Once the point is defined it becomes available to the FuelsManager subprograms and subsystems Note The FuelsManager Configuration application contains most of the configuration pro cesses you use to configure a FuelsManager database The database is mainly accessed through the FuelsManager Configuration application but depending upon your user privileges the database can also be edited from several other areas of the application 1 To access the database start the FuelsManager Configuration application 2 From the Database menu select the P
356. o confirm your request to compile all altered files 2 Click OK This option generates all files that have changed since last generated This option is useful if you are unsure of which files have been modified Using Build All command 1 The Build All option is useful for either initial project development or if the system database has been modified System database modification often requires re verification of database references 2 Click Build All A window appears asking you to confirm your request to compile all files 3 Click OK This option unconditionally compiles all files for a project even if they have not changed since the last generation Using file indexes The Draw application uses indexes to record graphics symbols and conditions that are ready for use You can manage these indexes to view edit or delete the items listed and to add new items The Graphic Index all of the generated graphics that can be displayed in the Operate program The Symbol Index includes generated symbols symbols in the index can be inserted into graphics The Conditions Index includes dynamic conditions that can be applied to objects in graphics Opening an index Each time that you need to select a generated graphic or symbol in Draw or apply a condition to a graphic an index window is shown You can also use the Master menu to access the indexes directly On the Master menu click Graphic Index Symbol Index or Condi
357. o define the method to be used for the calculation of product mass AVERAGING This group defines the number of samples time between FILTER GROUP samples and the value below which changes in data are ignored The parameters entered control how FuelsManager calculates the Flow Level Rate Mass Flow and Net Flow process variables FuelsManager calculates flow by sampling the tank s volume and then calculating a rate of change volume i e Gal hr Users can tune how FuelsManager calculates this flow rate by the Sample Rate Sample Size and Deadband parameters on the General tab FuelsManager will sample the volume at the rate defined by the sample time parameter calculate a flow rate based on this volume change then average the individual flow rates over the number of sample defined by the Samples parameter Samples tu Avg 6 Sample Time 30 secs Time secs Average over 6 samples 2 10833 gals sec 84 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas If FuelsManager calculates an individual flow rate that is below the deadband parameter the value is treated as zero for the purposes of averaging the flow rate Users should tune the deadband parameter such that normal gauge movements caused by product surface ripples or wind movement are not be considered in the flow average calculation Process Data Information 1 Click on the appropriate button under the Source column to
358. o make this an absolute reference select Absolute Point Path When you select this option the value will always point to selected database point and value If any settings are incorrect click the appropriate button s to correct the settings Click the OK button The Value Attributes window appears Value Attributes Database Point Data Database MSIZEMORE Point TankFarm Tank 4 Tank Variable Leak Rate Minimum Tank Minimum Leak Rate Scaling Type Double Units Font Style Arial 13 point Eont v Bold talic Color Selection Data Format Field Width Precision Convert Units o Background Align Lett Use Bkg Rectangle m C Center C Right Ok Cancel 5 Setthe value appearance formatting and the positioning of the value 6 Click the OK button The value appears in the selected area Inserting a bar graph The Bar tool is used to draw a vertical horizontal or deviation bar graphs based on the range of a FuelsManager database point variable To create a bar graph you select the database point variable to associate with the graph and you define how the graph will appear When you create a dynamic object such as a bar graph in a Template Graphic the database point variable that you assign to the object is relative by default The database point will be selected dynamically when the graphic is opened and the Value of the variable for that point You also have the
359. o the selected object appears This window is the same one that appears when first creating the object Make the desired changes and click OK when you have finished 4 Your changes will then be displayed on the screen Push to back amp pull to front Use the Push to Back and Pull to Front commands to change an object s relation to another in your display If one object appears in front or on top of another on the screen you can modify that arrangement so the objects switch places in relation to each other If you wanted to push an object from the front or on top to the back or behind another object choose the Push to Back command from the Edit menu or press Ctrl P The Pull to Front Ctrl F command works in the opposite direction Varec Inc 171 Creating Graphics Copying single objects The Copy command allows you to duplicate objects on the screen 1 Select the object and then select Copy from the Edit menu or press Ctrl C 2 Click on the copied object and drag the cursor to another area of the display screen When you hold down the mouse button the cursor becomes a four sided arrow This indicates that you can move the object in any direction When you release the mouse button a copy of the object appears at the location to where you dragged the cursor Moving deleting and copying multiple objects The Window option enables you to select and edit multiple objects This option creates an
360. o the current display screen Using the Draw Tools Below is an example of a custom graphic of a fuel tank facility Sea Lora E e Select Operation IEEE TI ImES Basic Techniques Before you begin creating a graphic make yourself familiar with the following commands or functionality 158 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Command Description Functionality Undo To undo the last operation select Edit and click Undo Last Delete If you need to erase an object click the Edit button and select the object Click Delete from the Edit menu Object color Before drawing an object you may want to set a default color or style This process eliminates having to select the object and modify the attributes from the Edit menu item Refer to the Setting Defaults section Changing tools The existing tool does not change until another button is selected Note Holding down the SHIFT key while drawing forces orthogonal movement of the line The standard geometric tools provided by Draw include the line rectangle square polygon ellipse circle and arc The tools are available in the toolbar and in the Add menu Changing the Default Settings Draw allows you to set or change various default settings of any object These defaults apply to text font size and color text background mode and color pen color thickness and appearance and brush style and color These defaults
361. of the middle pressure instrument P Bottom Pressure P Top Pressure P Middle Pressure In addition FuelsManager provides for the configuration of a level offset to allow you to calibrate the hydrostatically measured level this is called the Level Offset The find level is calculated as follow Level Lofft Ly Where Loff Level Offset Typical Tank Calculation Analytical and Measured Data Level ft in 16 12 3 12 Water Level ft in 16 0 9 5 Solids Level ft in 16 0 1 3 BS amp W 0 232 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Level ft in 16 12 3 12 Product Temperature F 75 6 Product Density Ibs US Gal 6 8 Density Temperature F 70 8 Standard Density 5 Ibs US Gal 6 84 Ambient Temperature F 56 2 Tank Point Configuration Parameters Volume Correction Method API F Table 6B 5B Floating Roof Type Roof Mass Not in Strap Roof Mass Ibs 589 Tank Shell Material Mild Steel Coeff of Expansion 1 24 x 10 5 Tank Insulated No Maximum Fill Volume US Gal 850 000 00 Minimum Empty Volume US Gal 150 000 00 Calculated or Derived Data Symbol Action Values Units Values used in Reported calculations rounded unrounded Total Observed Volume TOV 435 218 32 US Gals Water Volume H20VO
362. ogram Opening an existing report 1 Select File from the Report Editor menu bar and click Open 2 Select the desired report 3 Click OK The report is displayed in the Report window 4 Editing FuelsManager standard reports Since all of FuelsManager s Standard reports are Summary reports the editing procedures used are the same Editing a standard or Summary report includes changing the attributes of the Independent Variable creating new point variables editing tables labels and column totals Editing report objects Note You cannot move a table to another page or outside the margins Note A label created in a table cannot be moved outside the table in a Summary report Note You cannot move a line past the positions of adjacent lines These procedures apply to both Summary and Dynamic reports Follow the appropriate procedure Ctrl S gt or Select from the Edit menu option to be placed in edit mode Click on the object to be edited the border of the object becomes dashed to indicate it has been selected 264 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas lt Ctrl A gt or Attribute from the Edit menu A dialog specific to the selected object appears This dialog is the same as the one used to create the object refer to the previous sections that detail the creation process To delete an object select Delete from the Edit menu or lt Ctrl Del gt To move an object click and hold the mouse button while dra
363. oint If Source Units are not defined FuelsManager assumes that the data received from the I O point is in the same units as the FuelsManager database point and no unit conversion is performed The following example shows data received by FuelsManager the same functionality applied to data transmitted by FuelsManager FuelsManager Data Source x Database Point Definition Dialag Level Gauge AA Tanki Level RES Level Level Units feet Babies PASO 1200mm Source Units and Datahase Point units do _ Value of 1200 sent from not match so value of Level Gauge 1200 mm is corverted to 3 937 feet FuelsManager Data Source 3 Database Point Definition Dialog Level Gauge i Tanki Level Source Units Level Level Units feet undefined 1200mm Source Unitsare not Value of 1200 sent from defied so no conversion is performed and a value of 1200feetis read Level Gauge Configuring Bit Field Data Sources The concept of Bitfields allows you to configure how individual bits within an integer value are manipulated To enable bitfield processing you select the Bitfield Data option on the Input Output or Triggered edit point dialogs this option is only available for integer type data formats including Char Byte Short Word Long DWORD When the Bitfield Data option is enabled for a particular point the Start Bit Number of Bits and Start Data Source Bit parameters on the Select Source dialog are enabled
364. oint in the point list SELECT The Select button picks the current point and closes the Database Edit window This option is only applicable when the Database Edit dialog is opened from Operate or CommManager CLOSE The Close button closes the Database Edit window EDIT The Edit button opens the Edit Point window for the selected point The format of the Edit point window differs depending on the type of point selected NEW The New button opens the Add Point window allowing you to select the type of database point to be created COPY The Copy button opens the Point Copy Rename window allowing you to either make a copy of the selected point or rename the selected point DELETE The Delete button deletes the selected point EXPORT The Export button opens the Import Export Data Type window allowing you to select which particular data is to be exported to a CSV formatted file IMPORT The Import button opens the Import Export Data Type window allowing you to select which particular data is to be import from a CSV formatted file Add Point to Database window WINDOW TITLE The title of the window displays the Current Database System to which the point will be added ACTIVE TAG The Active Levels field displays the number of database LEVELS tag levels for the selected database LEVEL 2 1 0 The Level 2 Level 1 and Level 1 fields allow you to enter the database tagname for the point to be
365. oints command as shown below Alarms Source Assignments ArchiveManager 3 The Database Edit window appears as shown below Database Edit Current Database System SIZEMORE Active Levels 3 Database Point Name Meters M 400 Density Ml Meters M 400 gt FlowRate E Tem EJ b Volume lt lt Prey Level 4 To edit a local or remote database confirm the following User has permission to access the target machine Machine is currently running FuelsManager DataManager on target machine is active Varec Inc 65 Configuring Database Points Point Types Also if database resides on a remote system confirm Network connection exists between your machine and the remote machine 5 Follow the instructions later in this chapter for creating and editing database points Tank Input Output Triggered rap Tank Point A Tank point includes predefined variables specifically designed for tank gauging applications The behavior of the tank point is configured via the tank configuration windows A tank variable is any component of the tank such as tank level flow and temperature Each tank provides process values or tank variables which may be entered manually received from a field device or internally calculated These process variables are listed in the Glossary Input Point Input points are used to receive data from generic field equipment database calculations or manual input Ty
366. oints in the Current Database System Input Points displays all input points in the Current Database System Output Points displays all output points in the Current Database System Triggered Points displays all triggered points in the Current Database System Varec Inc 99 Configuring Database Points Database IO Connections window CONNECTION TYPES This option buttons allows filtering of the types of connections displayed on the Database Point list None displays all unassigned connections Manual displays all manual data source assignments Calc displays all calculated data source assignments Comm displays all CommManager data source assignments OPC displays all OPC Server data source assignments SELECT SOURCE BUTTON The Select Source button allows a data source to be assigned to a database point Clicking on this button displays the Select Data Source window and is only enabled when a Database Point has been selected REFRESH The Refresh button the Database Point to be renewed based on the current options selected in the Selected Point Type and Connection Types options Opening the Database IO Connections Window Note For a description of the Database IO Connections refer to the table below Note The Select Data Source dialog may also be opened directly from the Input Output Trigger or Tank Point edit dialog 1 Open FuelsManager Configuration uU d
367. olidatedDB database security node add the RPTUSER user with the following database role membership db_datareader db_datawriter and db_owner Add the RPTUSER user to each stored procedure that is used by the reports and grant RPTUSER Execute permission for each stored procedure Creating a User in Report Manager for Reports The Reporting Services Report Server uses two SQL Server databases ReportServer and ReportServerTempDB to store data it uses to manage reports Other databases may also be used to obtain data for reports This section describe how to set up a database user that Reporting Services will use to access these databases l Connect to the Reporting Services Report Manager on the server hosting the Report Server ReportServer database as described below Select the Properties tab A list of Groups and Users is be displayed with their roles Select the New Role Assignment link A page is displayed for adding a new user and assign ing a role or roles to the user In the Group or user name field add the RPTUSER user along with the domain name DOMAIN RPTUSER In the Roles list select the checkbox for the Browser role only Click the OK button to add the user The new user appears on the Security page with the Browser role assigned Opening Report Manager Report Manager is the administrative utility provided with SQL Server 2005 Reporting Services You will use Report Manager to perform most of the config
368. on The configuration of the local serial port and dial up modem involves the definitions of the baud rate data bits stop bits parity bit handshaking and the port identification 120 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Communication Port Configuration RS232 485 Serial Port System Name SIZEMORE Interface Desc INTERFACE 001 Y Baud Rate r Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Handshaking 38400 C 1Bits C Odd None cC C 15Bit C Even E C 7Bits C 2Bits None C RTSICTS 8 Bits C Cancel Help Figure 7 4 Communication Port Configuration window LAT Terminal Server Port Local Area Transfer LAT systems support is for legacy systems running on NT systems only with the 900DSL communication server and the 8130 RTU Communications port configuration The communications port configuration is specific to the type of hardware the system utilizes to communicate with field devices In the case of a serial port interface parameters such as baud rate and number of data bits are available for configuration An interface must have a valid configuration for a hardware port before communications with a field device can occur The window used to configure a port is first displayed during initial configuration The port can be edited by selecting the Port button inside the Device Configuration window The port list box displays the selected communication ports from the list of available ports
369. on Assigning an Alarm Graphic to an Alarm on page 56 1 2 Select New Template Graphic from the New sub menu in the File menu Set the size of the graphic as described in section Setting the size of a graphic on page 154 Build the graphic using the techniques described in this chapter including section Using the Draw Tools on page 158 Determine which database points can be dynamically associated with this template graphic by selecting Template Database Defines from the Edit menu Varec Inc 153 Creating Graphics Save the graphic by selecting Save As from the File menu Enter the graphic name including the GRF file extension Generate the file as described in section on page 155 You must generate a graphic or tem plate graphic before it can be displayed in Operate Note Draw verifies database connections when generating a file If you do not have access to the database or databases associated with the graphic do not generate the file The file must be generated at a later time before it can be displayed in Operate Defining Templates for a Template Graphic Before a template graphic can be displayed in Operate you must define which database points can be dynamically associated with the graphic when it is displayed This can be done in two ways with Draw By opening the template graphic and selecting a menu command as described in the procedure in this section During the creation or editing of
370. ons of any tag Changes to Group Monitor and record any changes made to the Permissions permissions of any group Changes to Users Monitor and record any changes made to the list of Users Changes to Groups Monitor and record any changes made to the list of Groups Changes to W amp M Monitor and record any changes made to the W amp M Calibration Seals Calibration Seals Changes to W amp M Module Monitor and record any changes made to the W amp M Seals Module Seals Security Authentication During normal operations the client system manager downloads a copy of resource host files from the System Manager host which includes security products alarm definitions and so on The client normally does not use the copy if the connection to the resource host is maintained If that connection is broken between the client system manager and the resource host system manager operations continue with the client system using the downloaded copy of the host files When the connection is re established the client updates the resource host system This operation is transparent to the user 24 Administrator Manual 3 Setting System Parameters Working with Configuration Top level users such as administrators system engineers and maintenance personnel use the Configuration application to configure and control the FuelsManager system Configuration and control features include defining start up options FuelsManager users system
371. operties Page 1 Connect to the Reporting Services Report Manager on the server hosting the Report Server ReportServer database as described in Opening Report Manager on page 283 2 Open the reports folder that you created when you registered the reports in Deploying Reports to the Report Server on page 286 If you are configuring the standard FuelsMan ager Oil amp Gas Web Server reports select the folder containing the standard reports 286 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Note An error message appears because you are opening the report before you set the report properties Close the message 3 Click on a report If you are configuring the standard reports select one of the standard reports listed in the table on page 286 The Connect To window appears 4 Log in using your Windows user name and password 5 If prompted click on the Properties tab The General report properties page appears Renaming Hiding or Showing a Report You can determine the name by which the report is known in Reporting Services When you configure the reports in FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server you can give them different names and descriptions In general there is no need to change a report name in Reporting Services 1 Connect to the Reporting Services Report Manager on the server hosting the Report Server ReportServer database as described in Opening Report Manager on page 283 2 Open the Genera
372. ou must enter the Level O tag name exactly as it appears in the database From the File menu click Detail Data from the sub menu select the Use Template option Click on the Hand selector icon in the toolbar and then select the desired value Select the Attributes command from the Edit menu The Value Attributes window appears Click Select next to the Variable entry The Template Configuration window appears In the Tag Name edit box enter the Level O database name Input or Output point as it appears in the system database In our previous example you would enter Valve Status or Pump Status In addition to the Tag Name select either the Input or Output point type select which parameter should be displayed i e Process Value Engineering Units etc and select the data format of the parameter Click OK 178 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Template Configuration Dialog Tag Name Point Type Input Variable IV Display Quality Data C Output pe Alarm Alarm Status Keyboard shortcuts for Draw tools Keyboard Shortcut Function Shift Del Deletes the selected object Pg Dn Moves the selection to an object that lies beneath the current object Pg Up Moves the selection to an object that lies in front of the current object Ctrl C Creates a copy of the selected object and places the copy directly on top of the original Ctrl A Disp
373. ows 1 In the Add Specify Points area click the Select Points button and the Add Specify Points window opens as shown below 112 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Add Specify Points x Current Real Time Database System WSER 1552 TLSRG Filter Unassigned Points By Type TT Tanks IV Flow Meters Y Pipeline Y Inputs v Outputs Refresh Unassigned Points Assigned Points AlarmTest StdPoints InputFloat AlarmTest StdPoints Inputiord AlarmTest StdPoints RTUAlarm AlarmTest StdPoints RTLIStatus AlarmTest Tanks InputyWord Conditions Inputs Coded Conditions Inputs Coded2 Conditions Inputs Double Conditions Inputs Dword Conditions Inputs Float 2 Conditions Inputs Word FlowMeter FMeter10 MeterPoint FlowMeter FMeter11 MeterPoint FlowMeter FMeter12 MeterPoint FlowMeter FMeter13 MeterPoint FlowMeter FMeter14 MeterPoint FlowMeter FMeter15 MeterPoint FlowMeter FMeter16 MeterPoint FlowMeter FMeter17 MeterPoint FlowMeter FMeter18 MeterPoint FlowMeter FMeter19 MeterPoint zi Import Export FlowMeter FMeter1 MeterPoint lt lt ERE gt i Cancel Figure 6 5 Add Specify Points Window Select the points by using the check boxes in the Filter Unassigned Points By Type area Note Ifyou have selected to Archive All Points for a type Tanks in the above example the Tanks check box is unavailable in this window Select the Unassigned Points in the left pane and use the right arrow button
374. p web reporting as described in Chapter 17 Manage Reports Set this field when you set up web reporting as described in Chapter 17 Managed Report Directory Set this field when you set up web reporting as described in Chapter 17 7 Onthe Units tab you can modify the way the Web Server shows measurement units Change these settings if appropriate 8 Click the OK button Defining Users and User Groups As a FuelsManager administrator you must ensure that only authorized individuals can access the system Each person s access should be limited to the information that they need to know and the functions that they need to perform You can accomplish this by setting up Users and User Groups as described in this section Introduction to Users User Groups and Security In the FuelsManager Web Server Users represent the individuals who will use the software through the web browser interface User accounts include login names and passwords To control each User s access to features and information you associate them with one or more User Group User Groups are collections of Users that share the same role in your organization By assigning the appropriate security rights to a User Group you make these rights available to each User in the group e By default your Site has four User Groups Accountants Administrators Dispatchers and Operators Varec Inc 271 Configuring the FuelsManager Web Ser
375. peration of the interface is interrupted just long enough to modify its configuration and then normal operations resume This time period varies from one device to the next Varec Inc 121 Configuring Communications Device configuration Device configuration varies widely between different types of devices Consult the device user s documentation for further instruction Ifan interface has a valid port configuration as well as a valid device configuration the interface can be placed in an active mode so that communication with the field device can occur If the device was not configured when the interface was created the device can be subsequently configured through the Communications Configuration window 1 Select Devices in the Communications Interface Configuration window 2 The device specific configuration dialog appears 3 Enter configuration parameters for the particular device There may be multiple windowes that need to be completed for the configuration 4 Click OK in the Device Configuration window after all configurations have been made for the device 5 Click OK in the interface type configuration window once all devices have been defined 8130 RTU Interface Configuration System Name SIZEMORE Interface Desc INTERFACE 005 Delays Port Between Polls Port 1 COM1 0 3 Seconds Port 2 UNASSIGNED Configured RTUS Name Address Configuration New RTU Run VIEWRTU Figur
376. phic referencing Template page 168 a database point that you select Open a floating template graphic Linked Template page 169 referencing a database point that you select Closes with parent graphic Varec Inc 165 Creating Graphics Append Attributes Dialog Database Point Data Database database system Select Point point tag Variable var name Type var type Type a Command 9 10 11 12 13 14 E C Graphic i Linked Graphic oie Pa C Report C Help File Name C Detail C Template C Linked Template Cancel Creating a Command append A command append displays an Operator Command window when clicked From the window the operator can issue a command or type in a new value 1 Select the Append tool or select Add and click Append Click on area to define corner and hold down mouse button 2 Drag the cursor to define the size of the append and release the mouse button The Append Attributes window appears 3 To display the append as a visible button in your graphic click the Button is visible under Style and then select a button color 4 Under Type select the Command option 5 Under Database Point Data in the upper right corner of the window click the Select button The Select Database Point window appears 6 Select the appropriate database point and corresponding variable by clicking the Data base Point or Variable buttons R
377. pically these points are used to hold data for equipment that is not tank specific i e pumps values or motors However they can also be used to store tank information not covered by the FuelsManager Tank Point Output Point Output points are used to transmit data from the database to field equipment Typically outputs are derived from an operator issuing commands however they can also be derived from an internal calculation process Output points may be configured to update the local process value immediately from the command value or to update the database point value based on inputs from the field equipment Triggered Point Triggered points are used as an intermediary between points FuelsManager uses a triggered point to monitor another point When it sees a change in the point the point gets sent to another point in the database Triggered points are typically used to monitor database input from a gauge Once the point changes the triggered point sends it to another point such as an output point for an OPC server or a PLC Point Attributes When creating FuelsManager database points you must define certain point attributes These attributes define how the data is stored the source of the data the range and type of data any alarm or event processing and who can access the data 66 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Engineering Units Engineering units can be configured for all point types Th
378. ption GSI Model 2000 No ITT Barton 3500 No L amp J MCG1000 No L amp J MCG1500 No L amp J MCG2000 No NMS53 Yes Module External Module Address Chan Channel for Communications ID Tank Gauge ID Mode Controls operation of this point Model 8203 Reserved for future use Model 8213 0x8000 MDP Protocol 0x4000 DX Protocol 0x0004 Change Contacts 0x0002 Ignore S Command 0x0001 Ignore R Command LevelUnits F ft M Meters m millimeters TempUnits F Fahrenheit C Celsius DensityUnits K kg m3 A API L Ibs ft3 SAAB L 2 Radar Yes Module External Module Address Chan Channel for Communications ID Tank Gauge ID LevelUnits m millimeters s sixteenths LevelConvert Convert Level to standard LevelDeadband Change of State COS Level Deadband Tank Side Monitor Yes Module External Module Address Chan Channel for Communications ID Tank Gauge ID BaudRate Baud Rate Data bits amp Parity ComParams Operating Mode ModeLevel Change of State COS Level Deadband Deadband Temp Deadband Change of State COS Temp Deadband Sakura Level Transmitter No TankPoint No TI 111 No TI 121 No TI 150 No Tokyo Keiso FM9000 No 240 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Point Type WMSeal Parameters Sealed Parameter Description Veeder Root TLS 350 No Whessoe Bus 2046 No Whessoe Bus ITG No Whessoe Varec 6500 No Whessoe Varec ATT4000 No Whessoe Varec MFT 4100 No WV1900 No Applying t
379. ption of these attributes refer to the Edit Point window key field explanations table at the end of this section the brief instructions below or the specific section relating to that topic From the Edit Point window Type in the Description of the point From the Edit Point window Select a Tag Category if applicable and select whether you want to display quality data with the point If necessary enter applicable Variable Format Details Output Destinations and Input Source information See sections below and the Edit Point window table for more informa tion Edit Point gt WSIZEMORE Walves V 401 tregger Description Disabled Tag Category Default Display Quality Data Variable Format Details Output Destinations Input Source Undefined r Units Undefined Modifier Min Value Max Value Cancel Figure 5 10 Edit Point window Triggered Entering Variable Format information for a triggered point l From the Edit Point window Variable Format tab Click Format to select the data storage format The Select Data Storage Format window appears Make the Data Storage format selection and click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog You can select to use Bitfield Data for the point Or click the Units button to display the Select Engineering Units dialog to use for the point Just select the appropriate type unit and click OK to return to the Edit Point triggered d
380. r building other alarms Alarm templates are reusable alarm definitions consisting of one or more alarm limit conditions Templates are used to create local alarms Templates are designed to be used when multiple database points require the same alarm test conditions but the actual test values differ for each point Limits for numerical data are specified in percentages When a template is applied the percentage values are converted numerical values based on the maximum value of the database point variable Editing an alarm template does not affect points that have used the template For a definition of global alarms and alarm templates refer to Types of Alarms on page 46 Opening the Global Alarms and Alarm Templates List FuelsManager Oil amp Gas maintains an index or list of global alarms and alarm templates that you can access directly using the procedure below You can also access the list of global alarms and templates through a database point This section describes how you can access the list of global alarms and alarm templates so you can create edit import export or delete them In the FuelsManager Configuration window on the Database menu click Alarms The Global Alarm Definitions window appears Use this method to obtain access to all defined global alarms and templates for all data formats 50 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas You can also access global alarms through the Alarm Assignme
381. r 4 2 you will need to update the database system to the 7 0 version To do this you need to run the FuelsManager System Update FMSystemUpdate utility If you are upgrading from version 6 0 you do not have to run the FuelsManager System Update utility The FuelsManager System Update utility will not update any version before version 4 0 Before Updating Your Database Before running the FuelsManager System Update Utility do the following Update your version of the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas software to the latest version version 7 0 Shut down FMSystemManager and do not restart it until after you have completed the update Make a backup copy of your existing FMProject database file If you have not already done so copy the FMProject database you want to upgrade into the current FMProject folder Important Copy the FuelsManager act file from your old FuelsManager folder to the new FuelsManager folder If you do not do this the update utility will not be able to update any of your user user groups or security permissions data Items not updated The FuelsManager System Update utility will not update previous versions of communications driver configurations In order to upgrade this part of your configuration you should export all the source assignments prior to starting the upgrade upgrade your database using the FMSystemUpdate utility recreate your communications configuration then re import the source assignments
382. r automatic tank gauge For example Raise Lower FLOAT MASS This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods where float type automatic tanks gauges are used It defines the mass of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge FLOAT DENSITY This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods where float type automatic tanks gauges are used It defines the density of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge FLOAT DIAMETER This parameter is used for LPG volume correction methods where float type automatic tanks gauges are used It defines the diameter of the float FuelsManager uses this to compensate the level value reported by the tank gauge STRAPPING TEMPERATURE This parameter defines the temperature at which the tank strapping table was made FuelsManager uses this parameter to correct for roof volume in tanks where the mass of the floating roof has been accounted for in the strapping table but the current temperature differs from that at which the tank was strapped STRAPPING DENSITY This parameter defines the density at which the tank strapping table was made FuelsManager uses this parameter to correct for roof volume in tanks where the mass of the floating roof has been accounted for in the strapping table but the current density differs from that at which the tank was strapped STRAP TABLE TYP
383. r defined intervals and averaging the change in net volume over a user defined number of samples However this value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator NET FLOW TIME NET FLOW TIME This process variable is the last time that the tank Net flow was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified VAPOR MASS VAPOR MASS This process variable is the mass of the vapor space above the product in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this value However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered VAPOR NET VOLUME VAPOR NET VOLUME This process variable is the net volume of vapor space above the product in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this value However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered LIQUID MASS This process variable is the mass of the liquid of the product in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this value However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered TOTAL NET VOLUME This process variable is the total net volume of the product in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this value However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered FASTSCAN COMMAND This process variable allows the operator to choose
384. r the Source points used to copy or rename the Destination points Each edit box corresponds to a database level For example if you were editing a two level database point the leftmost edit box would be unavailable Enter the Source Points You can rename points using a combination of methods by entering an asterisk in the appropriate edit box es For example you can type BARGE in the Level 2 edit and then enter asterisks in the remaining edit boxes This combination instructs the database to rename the Level 2 of the destination points but to leave the remaining levels unchanged If the entire point needs to be renamed you then enter the existing point in the Source Points edit boxes and the new name in the Destination Points edit boxes In the above example the Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 point is renamed Tank Farm Tank Tank 5 You could have also entered an asterisk in the Destination Point s third edit box instead of typing in GAUGE Enter the Destination Points You can also use asterisks These points will be renamed according to the defined Source points Click Copy or Rename if renaming A message is displayed warning you that any Graphics or Reports that reference the point s that are about to be renamed may now be invalid If the point s are renamed successfully the Database Copy Rename Status window will indicate a status of OK otherwise it will indicate the reason why the rename failed When renaming multiple points t
385. raditional tank sensors return the level and temperature of the tank From these two values plus the tank configuration a series of calculations is performed by the FuelsManager Strap Table Volume TOV The strap volume is obtained from the tank strapping table for the measured tank level FuelsManager calculates the volume for a given level based on the tank shape as shown below Varec Inc 203 Setting Calculation Methods Cylindrical tanks Calculations LevelRatio Level LowLevel HighLevel LowLevel TOV LowVolume HighVolume LowVolume x LevelRatio Where conditions Level Current Tank Liquid Level LowLevel Strapping point level in table immediately below Level HighLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above Level LowVolume Strapping point volume in table for LowLevel point HighVolume Strapping point Volume in table for HighLevel point Horizontal tanks Calculations LevelRatio1 Level HighLevel x Level HighestLevel LowLevel HighLevel x LowLevel HighestLevel CalcVolume1 LowVolume x LevelRatio1 LevelRatio2 Level LowLevel x Level HighestLevel HighLevel LowLevel x HighLevel HighestLevel CalcVolume2 HighVolume x LevelRatio2 LevelRatio3 Level LowLevel x Level HighLevel HighestLevel LowLevel x HighestLevel HighLevel CalcVolume3
386. rd dialog appears Enter the Old Password Enter the new password twice once in New Password and again in Confirm New Password Click Update To ensure the integrity of the FuelsManager historical data FuelsManager makes use of Windows XP amp 2000 folder file and object based security All system data stored in open format databases is configured with file security settings The System account has ownership read and write access while all other accounts have only read access 248 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas FuelsManager services that write system data run under the System account thereby providing write access to all users but only in accordance with the FuelsManager Security configuration The FuelsManager application allows the W amp M official to seal any open format database specifically the historical data stored in the Archive MDB file an MS Access database This sealing process is protected by the same W amp M password and integer seal ID mechanism used in the Module and Tag seals dialogs The process of sealing an Archive MDB file sets the permissions on the file to Everyone Read Execute System Full Control In addition ownership of the file is set to System In order for any user administrator included to make changes to the security of the file they would need to take ownership of the file If the archive is sealed FuelsManager checks the ownership of the file whenever access
387. re than the Movement High limit a Movement Alarm is activated By default the movement alarm is based on change in product level by editing the registry value HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE FuelsManager DataManager UseNetVolumeForMvmntAlarm such that the value equals 1 The movement alarm behavior will be based on change in Net Std Volume thus eliminating false alarm caused by product temperature changes This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate MOVEMENT HOLDOFF MOVEMENT HOLDOFF TIME This variable is the amount of time in seconds by which the level or Net Std volume must exceed the Movement alarm high limit before an alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges REVERSE FLOW ALARM This variable is used to detect product movements in the opposite direction to the selected tank command mode If the tank command mode is Filling and the level falls then a Reverse Flow Alarm is activated REVERSE FLOW HOLDOFF REVERSE FLOW HOLDOFF TIME This variable is the amount of time in seconds by which the reverse flow condition must exist before an alarm is activated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges NO FLOW ALARM This variable is used to detect that product movement
388. reen all objects are redrawn Resizing objects A selected object is marked by small squares called handles Lines have three handles one at each end and one at the center Labels and Values have one handle The Label handle is located on the upper border of the label on the left center or right depending upon the label s text alignment A Value s handle is always located on the left Arc handles include the arc start and end points as well as handles at the corners and sides of the rectangle bordering the original ellipse drawn to create the arc All other objects are marked with handles at the corners and sides of the object s bordering rectangle 172 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas The geometric shapes can be sized by grabbing these handles When resizing symbols the symbols remain in proportion Using Dynamic Conditions Edit Dynamic Conditions Description SEETESTTTS Variable Type Condition Type Ew Edit Condition Clear Edits Select Conditions 3 Entries eq Running then 2 eq Stopped then 1 else then4 UE RE ek You can use Draw s Dynamic Conditions to change the way an object in a graphic appears based on real time changes in the system including site events alarms and other activity You can build conditions to show specific alarm conditions for database points This provides more detailed information to the operator than simply showing whether a an alarm stat
389. rface Configuration window appears This window lists all the interfaces available on the selected system You can also set a Deadband to filter out minor changes Once an interface is selected click O Point to view the I O connections Only I O connections compatible with the point data format and engineering units configuration are displayed Note For Deadband by source if the source is Comm Input you can only assign a trans lation on the Details tab You cannot assign it on the source input tab because the field is unavailable The translation on the Details tab occurs AFTER the deadband is applied Translation configured on the Source Assignments tab occurs BEFORE THE deadband is applied For more details on Comm connections see the Communications section of this manual Calculated Value This option defines that FuelsManager should calculate this value This option is only available for tank point variables that can be calculated i e volume mass etc It is not available for variables that must be measured or manually entered i e Level or Temperature Local Input This data source option defines the value to be connected to another database point and is only available for the Tank Point variable Ambient Temperature You can also set a Deadband to filter out minor changes OPC The OPC option also allows you to connect to an external field device using a Varec or third party OPC server The hierarchy of tags available
390. rge Truck or Pipeline From Single Tank Receipt From Unit Typically Ship Barge Truck or Pipeline To Tank s One or More Tanks Run down From Unit Typically Ship Barge Truck or Pipeline To Single Tank 128 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Shipment 2 To Unit Typically Ship Barge Truck or Pipeline From Tank s One or More Tanks Transfer EJ Tank to Tank Transfer Water drain From Single Tank Ph ey To Unit Typically Drain or Slops tank Xfr modes The transfer or Xfr mode refers to the measuring denomination you are using to measure the product movement Level Mass or Differential Volume or Mass These examples illustrate the different types of xfr modes Varec Inc 129 Configuring Product Movement Transfer by Level lt Current Level t Arequired End Level Transfer by Level Transfer by Volume or Mass Pe Volume Mass 4 nequired End Volume Mass Transfer by Volume or Mass Transfer by Differential Volume or Mass Enter the amount of volume mass to be transfer from the tank Transfer by Differential Volume or Mass 130 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Definitions This guide uses the following terms when explaining how to configure the Movement System Movement summary Unit The movement system allows the creation of Sour
391. ribed in Creating a Data Source in Report Manager on page 284 Click the Upload File button The upload file page opens 4 Click the Browse button next to File to Upload 5 For standard reports navigate to Program Files FuelsManagerl FMProject1WebReports 6 Select the report layout file rdl for the report you are registering and then click Open If you are configuring the standard reports select one of the standard reports listed below Standard Reports Active Tank rdl CurrentTanklInventory rdl InactiveTank rdl LastFullDayTankChange rdl LastFullMonthTankChange rdl LastFullWeekTankChange rdl MonthToDateTankChange rdl SeventhDayTankChange rdl TanklnventoryByDate rdl 7 Inthe Upload File page click the OK button 8 Repeat the process above until you are finished registering reports If you are registering standard reports register all of the reports listed above 9 Proceed to the next section Setting Report Properties Use this procedure to define the settings for each report that you have registered with Microsoft Reporting Services This includes providing the report name that end users will see in their browser and associating the report with data source s Reports must be registered as described above before you can set report properties If you are configuring standard reports set report properties for each of the reports Opening the Report Pr
392. riodic File enter the path and filename you want to create in the Periodic File field Set the Periodic Interval field keeping in mind that this value is also used to set the interval for the HTML file Also set any desired Period File Options If you want Automated Data Output to create an HTML file enter the full path and filename in the HTML File field as well as an HTML Header File if you want to include a logo in the browser above your HTML file If you want Automated Data Output to create an XML file enter the full path and filename of the file you want to create in the XML Files If needed click the Test button and review the output files Click the Ok button to save the configuration and close the dialog Automated Data Output configuration is now complete Since Automated Data Output is running as a Windows ser vice the files Snapshot csv Test csv and Test html will be automatically produced as a specified regardless of whether the Automated Data Output Configuration application is open 198 Administrator Manual 13 Setting Calculation Methods Volume correction methods This section describes the correction methods and tank calculations used in the FuelsManager program Since the volume of the product in a tank varies with the temperature and density you must use a correction method to correct for variations in temperature and density of the product Data rounding Selecting any of the correc
393. rrects a volume at an observed temperature to a standard temperature Petroleum tables Type Method Product Table Entry Range Temp Range 6A 5A Generalized Crude Oil API gravity 60 F in API 0 40 0 300 F 40 1 50 0 0 250 F 50 1 100 0 0 200 F 6B 5B Generalized Products API gravity 60 F in API 0 40 0 300 F 40 1 50 0 0 250 F 50 1 85 0 0 200 F API F m 7 7 3 6C Individual amp Special API gravity 60 F in API 0 40 0 300 F API F 1980 Applications 40 1 50 0 0 250 F 50 1 100 0 0 200 F 6D Generalized Lubricating API gravity 60 F in API 0 50 0 150 F Oils 50 1 100 0 0 125 F 200 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Type Method Product Table Entry Range Temp Range 54A 53A Generalized Crude Oil Density 15 C in kg m 610 5 778 5 18 95 C 779 824 18 125 C 824 5 1075 18 150 C 54B 53B Generalized Products Density 15 C in kg m 610 5 778 5 18 90 C 779 824 18 125 C 824 5 1075 18 150 C 54C Individual amp Special Thermal Expansion Coefficient in Alpha x 489 918 18 150 C Applications 10 919 945 18 125 C 54D Generalized Lubricating Density 15 C in kg m 800 824 18 125 C Oils 824 1 1164 18 150 C 54A 53A Generalized Crude Oil Density 30 C in kg m 610 5 778 5 18 95 C 30 C 779 824 18 125 C 824 5 1075 18 150 C 54B 53B Generalized Products Density 30 C in kg m
394. rt Figure 5 8 Translation dialog Entering Input Sources for an input output point Variable Format Details Input Source eS ON we MN TUR Description System Type Endress Hauser DataManager 1 Mete SIZE OPC Figure 5 9 Input Source tab Input output point 1 From the Edit Point window select the Input Source tab You can add input sources from a specific data source Manual Comm or OPC Click Add to display the Select Data Source dialog and select any data source B wow When finished click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog Note Changes made to the Data Source settings or the Alarm Definition cannot be dis carded by the Cancel button they have already been saved Varec Inc 77 Configuring Database Points Creating and Editing Triggered Points A Triggered Point serves as a monitor that views a single database point such as an input point from a gauge You can set the trigger point to send to an output point OPC server or PLC when it observes a change in the point its monitoring Note You must first select a point format before the other attributes can be addressed Once selected the default minimum and maximum values appear in the Minimum and Maximum Value edit boxes if the format is numeric Continued from the previous instructions Creating Database Points In the Edit Point window select a data format data source s engineering units and other parameters For a descri
395. ry report naana eee 254 Creating a table in a summary report lille 255 Creating labels in a summary report 256 Creating values in a summary report 2 257 Creating column totalS oooooooooc s 258 Dynamic reports scs geh TRA ERR RUE al TE 259 Creating a new dynamic report sssaaa aana ee sers 259 Formatting reports tocador eJ en De dia Pe EDS PRIVATE 261 Setting the default font annaa aaa aaa ee 262 Setting the reportlayout llis 262 Editirig reports 2 Les Reg deb URP APA T ved bales epe d kx 264 Opening an existing repOlt ooooooooo s 264 Editing report objects 24 2 ucili lvi li LL ELSE 264 Managing report files sekeren nE RE hh hes 265 Saving reports epu A A Up ed id 265 Generating reposa ra siss ze uc a ufu E es x anb Eurus ral cete 265 Varec Inc 9 16 17 Deleting reports ia o RE E ERES ERE EIS 266 Historical t ports ovio ct eR tad 267 Configuring the FuelsManager Web Server 269 Before YOU BEN a E URN 269 Task Overview Configuring the Web Server 269 Logging In to the Web Server as an Administrator llle sess 269 Defining Site Properties illie nh 270 Defining Users and User GroupS 0 0000 eres 271 Introduction to Users User Groups and Security ooooooooo o 271 Understanding How Security is Implemented o ooooooooooo 272 Setting Up User Groups and Users Overvi
396. s 000s 140 Exporting Movement Elements llli 140 Importing Movement Elements l l 141 9 Configuring the System Update Utility 143 Before Updating Your Database 0 0 00 ee 143 Items inotupdated scat sedan oe taaen Eat Red b aia 143 Running the Utility 0 00 e ae Re 143 Error messages and troubleshooting lille essen 145 Errormessages o ssa anne A adu acr A Pa dece hdd 145 Varec Inc 5 Troubleshooting on xo tutu ta A ra TE s 146 After Updating the Database o oooccoooooo ee 146 10 Creating Graphics ooocccccoccccccc 147 How Draw graphics are used in Operate 00 200 c eee 147 Opening and Exiting the Draw Application 200000 2c ee 148 Opening Draw sia Se aod tua eave dte end ale Balad fate 20s 148 ExitingiDraw uie Sop hah ei de ees Pen aed de 148 Understanding the Draw window 0 00 eae 148 The Drawing space ice ia sce ie tot uus Dx San GAs Mose fale E 148 The Draw toolbar coco a ee ee ee ie dee 149 Drawing tool icons s s sae iie teu o ats ue y saline Zu AR 149 Peni amp brushi box uus a haces eae RIO ARA Atte be ale dat d 149 Message WIndOW corri A EA eA ds 149 Text amp background box llis 149 Setting Up the Drawing Space ooooccoccccco eae 149 Displaying and Setting Up the Grid n nananana aaa ee 149 Showing appends 2 vg mede o ta a N 151 Displayin
397. s 2 Enter the required Correction Level and P Constant Note Enter the Correction Level in millimeters 3 Review the values for Density and Temperature Note Fordetailed calculation method used see the Polynomial Sphere section of the Tank Calculations section 94 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Edit Tank Data gt WEME TankFarm Tank21 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Leak Detection Polynomial Sphere Level Q Constant RConstant S Constant 0 00 0 00e 000 0 008 000 0 00e 000 0 00 0 00e 000 J0e 000 0 00e 000 0 00 0 00e 000 10 0 00e 000 0 00 0 00e 000 0e 000 0 00e 000 0 00 0 00e 000 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 0 00e 000 Equation Constants Correction Level Density 30 00 P Constant Temperature 60 00 Figure 5 21 Edit Tank Data window Polynomial Sphere tab Edit Tank Data window Polynomial Sphere tab LEVEL amp These columns display the volumetric constants to be CONSTANT applied between the specified level ranges The level COLUMNS column reflects the current engineering units for the tank CORRECTION This field allows you to enter the level offset n LEVEL millimeters to be used to correct the level process variable for the measurement error due to the low temperatures in tanks cont
398. s variable TANK STATUS CURRENT TANK MODE This process variable reflects the selected mode of operation of the tank possible values are stopped filling emptying running testing or disabled This variable always reflects the selected tank mode regardless data source selection TRANSFER STATUS TANK TRANSFER STATUS This process variable reflects the current state of the tank transfer possible values are Inactive Trans SD Setpoint In Progress Advisory or Complete The value is intended to represent the various steps in the transfer process This variable always reflects the current state of the tank transfer regardless data source selection TRANS SD SETPOINT TRANSFER SHUTDOWN SETPOINT This variable is the operator entered desired ending point of a tank transfer it is automatically expressed in either volume of level units depending on the transfer mode selected TRANS ADV SETPOINT TRANSFER ADVISORY SETPOINT This variable is the amount of time before a transfer is complete that an advisory alarm should be triggered The value can be from 0 120 minutes before the transfer reaches the Transfer Shutdown Setpoint TRANSFER UNITS TRANSFER SHUTDOWN SP UNITS This variable is the units being used for the currently active transfer The units are dependant on the transfer mode selected i e Xfr by Level Tank Level Units Xfr by Diff Vol Tank Volume units TRANSFER VOLUME CURRENT VOLUME TRANSFER
399. s The Properties command allows the administrator to define the properties of a user group or an alarm category according to what section is selected in the security window Close The Close command will close the Security window completely Administrator or any user with the Configure Security permission enabled FuelsManager provides two types of categories Alarms Tags Categories allow the administrator to set access and permissions at a group level Groups may be used to designate a physical location such as Control Room A and Control Room B Groups can also be used to set access and permissions for job titles such as Supervisor or Operator Note An individual can belong to only one category Alarm groups designate which alarms a particular user group receives In addition the administrator can designate which printer prints a particular alarm category For larger systems it is important to categorize alarms so that only users with responsibility for a particular area of the facility are notified of alarms for that area For instance you do not want Control Room A to receive alarms for Control Room B Tag categories allow the administrator to further segregate the FuelsManager system by defining which database points a particular user groups can see Once defined the administrator can deploy a system with a central database containing all tanks for the entire 12 Administrator Manual FuelsManager
400. s are used The process involves selecting a default database selecting the point and then selecting the corresponding point variable All types of points can be used in a Dynamic Report Input Output Triggered and Tank points 1 Select Edit click Add and click Value Click where you want the value to be displayed This can be within a table or not Select a point from the Database Edit window to be represented by the value Click Select The Select Database Point window appears mn BR U N Make appropriate selections and click OK The Select Engineering Units window appears if the point variable is numerical For a complete list of engineering units refer to the Glos sary 6 The Database Value Attributes window appears 7 Click OK when the appearance formatting and positioning of the value have been com pleted The value appears in the selected area or cell Creating totals and averages After all values have been inserted you have the option of displaying totals or averages at the bottom of a column or at the end of a row You can insert multiple column averages and totals however total or averages cannot be used outside of a table 260 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 1 Select Edit click Add and click Summary 2 Click on the cell where you want the total to be displayed The insertion can exist in any cell at the end of a row column or any cell in between as long as there are cell
401. s intended for future development and is not used in this version View Transaction Aliases This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version View Transaction Data This right is intended for future development and is not used in this version View User Groups When a User with this right logs in the User can view User Groups View Users When a User with this right logs in the User can view Users 8 Click the OK button to save your settings and return to the User Groups page Adding a User 1 Ifyou have not already done so log in to FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server as described in section on page 269 2 Inthe left treeview select Configuration gt System gt Users The Configuration page opens Click the Add button under the Users list 4 Fill out the form fields as appropriate At minimum complete the following fields ID Pass word and Re enter Password See the following table for a description of each field Field Description ID Enter a unique login User ID that the User must enter when logging in to the Site Password Enter a password that the User will be required to enter when logging in to the Site Re enter Password Re enter the password that the User will be required to enter when logging in to the Site This must be identical to the password entered in the Password field Change Password at Login If you sele
402. s numerical You can also convert to new engineering units if necessary The attributes also include font appearance and positioning You can select the value size font and style The table Snap option is enabled for aligning the value if the Snap to table option under the table menu is checked Variables are parameters of a point such as time temperature and density A single point can have multiple variables For example a point is defined as Tank Farm A Tank 22 Tank Point The variables associated with the Tank Point may be temperature sediment and tank level The variables available for Input and Output points are different from those available for Tank points Some examples of Tank point variables include temperature level and density Input and Output point variables may include an alarm status or process value For a complete listing of point parameters refer to the Glossary Column row totals and averages You can display column row totals or averages in a report Values in a column can be totaled all together or individually for each product or database system Varec Inc 253 Administering Reports Summary reports A Summary report acts like a spreadsheet The first column lists all the Tank points active inactive or both and corresponding databases These points can be grouped by tank product or by database system The remaining columns list point variables such as level and density You can select wha
403. s or manually entered by the operator VOL STRAP H20 STRAP VOLUME MINUS WATER VOLUME This process variable is the tank strapping volume minus the water volume FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the current water volume from the current strapping volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOL STRAP COR EXP STRAP VOLUME MINUS CTSH This process variable is the tank strapping volume minus the thermal expansion effect of the tank shell FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the volumetric effect of the tank shell correction factor from the current strapping volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VOL NET C amp W NET VOLUME MINIUS C amp W CORRECTION This process variable is the Net Std volume minus the correction for sediment and water FuelsManager normally calculates this by subtracting the correction for sediment and water from the current Net Std volume However this value can be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator TANK SHELL COR FAC TANK SHELL CORRECTION FACTOR This process variable is the tank shell correction factor used to correct gross volume for the effects of tank shell thermal expansion FuelsManager normally calculates this from product temperature ambient temperature shell m
404. s seals 248 T tabbed window display setting 44 tables translation 39 tag categories 15 tag category points 69 tank analysis methods Leak Detection 191 calculations traditional 203 calculations typical 232 detail display default 43 detail screen customizing 176 farm monitoring Web Server 278 points alarms configuration 86 alarms predefined 47 creating 82 definition 66 template graphic 153 154 templates alarm 46 toolbar Draw 149 TOV 203 traditional tank calculations 203 transfer 129 transfer modes 129 translation tables 39 triggered points creating 78 definition 66 types of alarms 46 U unacknowledged alarm 48 units engineering 67 updating the database system 143 user groups Standard or Professional Edition 16 Web Server adding 272 introduction 271 user defined alarms 46 users Standard or Professional Edition 16 Web Server 271 V values 162 ViewRTU directory 29 sealing the point 238 volume calculation methods 199 correction techniques 200 Volumetric Analysis 181 Varec Inc Ww W amp M indicator 245 password 248 water strapping tables 206 water drain 129 Web Server configuring overview 269 Data Dictionary 276 logging in as administrator 269 products 276 regional settings 278 reporting 281 reports 282 security 272 sites 270 tank farm monitoring 278 user groups 271 users 271 Users amp User Groups 272 Weights and Measures 8130 RTU 238 applying the software seal 241 displaying W
405. s to total or average The Row Column Summary window appears 3 Click either the Column Summary or the Row Summary option button to select a row or a column summary Click either Calculate Total or Calculate Average option button 4 Type the number of cells to include in the summation or average This number includes the cells to the left in a row or the number of cells above the insertion point Entering this num ber allows for more than one total average to display The number excludes the cell con taining the total or average 5 Click OK A value appears in the selected cell Adding pages This option applies exclusively to Dynamic reports since the number of pages in a Summary report is undefined 1 Select Page from the menu bar and click one of the following options Append or Insert Page Before Current Page 2 Select Append to add a page to the end of the report 3 Select Insert Page Before Current Page to add a page before the current page Once a page has been added more tables values and summaries can be placed onto the page just created Deleting pages You can delete a page in Dynamic reports All data that is on the page will be removed completely 1 Select the page that is to be deleted 2 Select Page from the menu bar and click on Delete Current Page Maneuvering through pages The Page menu applies only to Dynamic reports This option allows you to add pages to the report and to maneuver throug
406. s variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or No Flow if the No Flow alarm is active see above for details of the No Flow Alarm ALARM REVERSE FLOW REVERSE PRODUCT FLOW This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Reverse Flow if the Reverse Flow alarm is active see above for details of the Reverse Flow Alarm ALARM TANK IN TEST TANK IN TEST MODE ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Testing if the tank mode has been set to Test by the operator see above for details of the Test Mode alarm ALARM XFR ADVISORY TRANSFER ADVISORY ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Trans Adv SetPt if the current tank transfer has reached the Transfer Advisory setpoint ALARM XFR SHUTDOWN TRANSFER SHUTDOWN ALARM This variable is a coded variable value that displays a status of either Normal or Trans SD SetPt if the current tank transfer has reached the Transfer Shutdown setpoint Varec Inc 309 Point Parameters Scaling and engineering units data Scaling and Engineering Units Data VARIABLE TYPE FuelsManager variables are divided into eleven types for each type of variable you can configure the range of the data and the engineering units The range and engineering units are configured via the General tab of the tank co
407. se DataManager Graphics Directory Current Mode Shutdown Standby Active c EIS CAT UNIES Browse Auto Start Mode Ir Reports Directory None C Standby C Active C Program DEFROST Browse omen System Selection Note The Select FuelsManager System dialog only displays active FuelsManager installa tions If your system is not listed make sure the appropriate manager is active FuelsManager Configuration can be used to configure the local FuelsManager application or a remote FuelsManager on the LAN or WAN Nearly all FuelsManager Configuration dialogs contain a System Name field and a Select or Browse button that allows you to pick which FuelsManager system is to be configured In this case you can select a different server on the network by clicking Select which opens the Select FuelsManager System dialog Then choose a different system and click Select Select FuelsManager System x System WESTWS15 FuelsManager Systems WHELPDESK XP 2 r Display Options v Show LAN Servers TT Show TCPAP Servers cen Figure 3 2 Select FuelsManager System window Current Mode The Current Mode options let you change the current operating mode Selecting Shutdown Standby or Active immediately changes that subsystem s mode 26 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Auto Start Mode Note You can also select the directori
408. se tables can be either related to one another or totally independent This section details the calculation methods used by FuelsManager when configured to use separate water and product tables In order to configure FuelsManager to use separate water and product tables simply use the Strap Water table tab of the Edit Tank Data dialog to either manually enter a water table or import a previously defined water table Edit Tank Data gt MSIZEMORE tankfarm tank tank4 General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel2 W amp M Strap Water Table Water ft in 16th gal US 0 00 15 00 Water C Strap Hydro Def 10 11 10 Density 60 00 API Temperature 60 00 F Strap Table Type c c Strap Water Table Mode Combined C Separated Number Of Table Entries 2 Add Del nse Export Import Cancel Note Use the import option to save time by importing previously defined product or water tables When using product and water tables Configuration can be used to set the water and strapping table method for either integrated Product and Water tables or Separated Product and Water tables Under Strap Water Table Mode select either Combined or Separated Integrated Product and Water Tables Combined The key concept in the integrated product and water table mode of operation is that the top point of the water table is assumed to coincide with the bottom point of the product table In the in
409. see section 276 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas You can also export a Data Dictionary to an XML file to make it reusable See section on page 277 for more information Defining a Data Dictionary Automatically Importing 1 If you have not already done so log in to the FuelsManager Web Server as described in section on page 269 In the left treeview click Configuration gt Sites gt Data Dictionary The Data Dictionary Glos sary page appears showing a list of keyvalue pairs Under the Glossary terms list click the Import button Select a file This is an XML file exported from FuelsManager Web Server Data Dictionary Click OK Defining a Data Dictionary Manually 1 If you have not already done so log in to the FuelsManager Web Server as described in section on page 269 In the left treeview click Configuration gt Sites gt Data Dictionary The Data Dictionary Glos sary page appears showing a list of keyvalue pairs Find the interface element that you want to rename Click the appropriate letter button to show interface elements that begin with that letter e If there are many entries for the letter you selected the list for the selected letter is broken into multiple numbered sections Use the number links under the list to find the entry that you are seeking Click the edit pencil icon for the term you want to change A text box appears in the Value column for the selected
410. signed Users list Configure Accounting This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Configure Import Export This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Create Orders This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Execute Import Export This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Export Configuration Data This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Import Configuration Data This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Modify Allocation Data This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Modify Company Data This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Modify Equipment Data This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Modify Load Rack Data This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Modify Personnel Data This right is intended for future development and is used in this version not Modify Product Data When a User with this right logs in the User can modify Products Products Additive Profiles Products DOT Hazardous Messages Products Product Groups Products Product Groups
411. sity as defined below D Air Density 353 x exp px Air Temp 273 16 Where Elevation is in meters Air Temp is in C Local Gravity 230 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Note Alternatively you can enter the local manually 9 80616 0 025928 x A 6 9 x 10 x A 3 086 x 10 x Elevation Where A cos 2x Position in Radians For convenience FuelsManager allows for the entry of the tank position in deg min sec of latitude The following is used to convert the position in deg min sec to the position in radians 2x T Mis ES HA pp a Radians 360 x Deg 60 3600 The position of the pressure transmitter is critical to the hydrostatic and hybrid tank calculations since the positions can be affected by the thermal expansion or contraction of the tank FuelsManager uses the following to correct the installed height of each transmitter for the effects of temperature Corrected Height Height x 1 ExpCoeff x Temp Installed Temp Where Height H H or H ExpCoeff Thermal coefficient of expansion for the material from which the tank shell is constructed Temp Current product temperature Installed Temp Temperature when the pressure instrument was installed Both the Hydrostatic and Hybrid methods calculate product density based on the pressure difference between instruments of known heights as
412. solute values The Leak Rate alarm is triggered if the absolute values of the Leak Rate exceed the defined High absolute limits Leak Data Allows an Enable Disable State This alarm when enabled will alert every day at 12 00 AM to notify the operator that there is not enough valid data or quiet time data from the configured tank to produce a valid Leak Test Report Vessel 1 The Vessel 1 page allows you to enter additional data about the tank such as its construction material inspection date and dimensional data This data is not used in any calculations and is only presented as informational data on the Leak Test Report The following fields on the Vessel 1 page are important for informational data Tank Volume Date Installed Tank Height Cathodic Protection Tank Radius Overfill Protection Tank Material Spill Protection Lining Material Note Leak Detection data from the Vessel 1 page appears on the Leak Test Reports 188 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Edit Tank Data gt MSIZEMORE Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 WAM Strap Water Table Leak Detection Characteristics Dptional Protection y Tank Shell Correction Cathodic Protection Enable Landed Height EBEN ftin 16th Floating Height 0 00 00 ftin 16th Roof M 0 00 lb E r Gauging Setup Roof Type No Tank Roof gt Traditional Overfi
413. sp gr 192 Varec Inc 321 Point Parameters UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Dimensionless Bushel bushel 244 Cycles per Second Hz 233 Parts per Million PPM 235 Percent Humidity H 236 Percent Oxygen 02 237 Percentage 234 pH Factor pH 239 Relative Humidity RH 238 Revolutions Per Minute RPM 232 Centipoise centp 240 Cubic Feet per Pound ft3 lb 247 Percent Steam Quality quality 243 Percentage of Solids by Volume sol vol 242 Percentage of Solids by Weight 96sol wt 241 Proof Mass pr mass 246 Proof Volume pr vol 245 Electrical Amperes A 223 Capacitance Farad F 225 Conductance mho mho 230 Conductance Micro Siemens uS 228 Conductance Siemens S 229 Coulomb C 226 Inductance Henry H 227 Milliamps mA 222 Millivolts mV 220 Power Factor P F 231 Resistance Ohms ohm 224 Volts V 221 Energy British Thermal Unit IT BTU 200 Calorie cal 201 Joule J 202 Kilowatt Hour kWH 204 Watt Hour WH 203 322 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas UNIT TYPE UNIT NAME ABREV INDEX Metric English Length 16ths of an Inch 16th 024 Centimeters cm 021 Feet ft 026 Feet in 16th ft in 16 027 Feet in 8th ft i
414. ss Volume Net Volume Remaining Net Volume Available Net Standard Density Mass Solids Level Flow Water Volume Gauge Position Density Temperature Solids Volume Tank Status VCF Volume Roof Correction Vol Remaining Gross PT Val Availahle Gree Seal ID 5 Figure 14 5 Edit tank data W amp M tab Changing a Seal State for a Process Variable A checkbox indicates the state for the Tank Seal and each input Process Variable Seal A check mark means that the state is sealed 1 Make the change by checking or clearing the appropriate checkbox under Calibration Seals The Update Seals button becomes available This happens when any Seal State checkbox is changed 2 Click Update Seals A prompt appears to confirm the changes 3 Click OK If any Seal State changes are checked a prompt appears to enter the Weights amp Measures password Otherwise the prompt is simply for confirmation 4 Enter the password The Weights amp Measures password must be properly entered to effect setting Tag Seals Varec Inc 243 Using Weights and Measures W amp M Password Prompt Update Seals Are you sure you want to dear seals x em Figure 14 7 Update seals confirmation Each time the Tank Seal Data is changed the Seal ID is incremented This Seal ID will be recorded by the W amp M official If
415. ssages System Update Utility 145 event logs 64 events creating 62 definition 62 editing 63 logs 64 points 69 removing from database point 63 exiting Draw 148 FuelsManager Report Editor 251 exporting alarm templates 53 global alarms 53 points 57 product movements 140 F features comparison 2 file directories FuelsManager 27 files graphic 152 merging 158 purging 158 saving 157 report 265 symbols 152 FMDataManager 7 FMSystemManager 6 FMTools directory 28 formatting reports 261 FuelsManager Configuration 8 FuelsManager Draw 9 FuelsManager file directories 27 FuelsManager interface 10 FuelsManager Oil amp Gas overview 1 FuelsManager Operate 9 FuelsManager Report 9 FuelsManager Report Editor exiting 251 opening 251 tools and objects 252 FuelsManager Web Server 269 G generating files 155 generating reports 265 global alarms 46 assigning to point 52 creating 51 editing 52 exporting 53 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas importing 53 opening list of 50 understanding 50 global alarms predefined 46 graphic creating 153 graphic files 152 Graphic Index 156 graphics appends 151 buttons 151 creating 153 creating a symbol 155 customizing tank detail screens 176 Draw appends 151 165 bar graphs 163 bitmaps 170 buttons 151 165 conditions 173 default settings 159 drawing shapes 160 drawing space setup 149 dynamic conditions 173 editing 171 grid 149 keyboard shortcuts 17
416. ssed during database edit and then assigned to Tank points Creating a new product definition l In the Configuration window select select the Products command from the resources menu The Product Configuration window appears Click Add to create a new a product code The Edit Product Definition window appears Enter in the name of the product description of the product assignment options correc tion method if any and temperature alarms if any The product name can be up to twenty alphanumeric characters and the description can be up to thirty alphanumeric characters Enter any appropriate Assignment Options for the product definition Click OK to save the product definition Varec Inc 29 Setting System Parameters Product Configuration Product Server SIZEMORE Number of Entries 6 Product Code Product Description Crude Oil Diesel Fuel Gasoline Heating Oil Jet A Fuel Pipeline Transmix E e Figure 3 3 Product Configuration window Edit Product Definition r Product r Assignment Options Name 20 chars IV Use Correction Method Description 30 chars CTA Use Temperature Limits Use Standard Density r Correction Method m Temperature Alarms Type Specific D High High aer y Tabie 68358 Standard Temperature Correction Factors 0 High 60 F NA cel Low NA Standard Density ae NA a 4 Low Low NA NA o Hold Off Cancel
417. sting the Test Mode alarm is generated ETA ESTIMATED TIME OF ARRIVAL For each level alarm limit and ETA is calculated Whenever the ETA is less than the Transfer Advisory Setpoint the corresponding ETA alarm is generated ETA alarms are suppressed when the ETA time is O Vessel Information Vessel 1 8 Vessel 2 Tabs The point information concerning the vessel is divided among two tabs Vessel 1 amp Vessel 2 Vessel 1 keeps the physical statistics of a tank along with gauging pressure and other information to ensure accurate use in FuelsManager Vessel 2 contains transfer limit settings gauge assignments and float characteristics Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Characteristics Landed Height Floating Height 300 00 Roof Mass 487 00 ftin 16th ftin 16th lb Roof Type Roof Mass in Strap Tank Geometry Vert Cylinder Tank Volume 0 00 Tank Height 0 00 00 Tank Radius 0 00 00 Shell Thickness 0 00 00 Lining Material gal US ftein 1 65th ftin 16th ftin 16th Date Installed 5 18 2003 Tank Material Unknown ExpCoef 0 Install Temp 0 Optional Protection Tank Shell Correction Cathodic Protection Enable Dverfill Protection f Spill Protection AreaCoef Gauging Setup Traditional Hydrostati
418. storical Period field and contain configuration information Refer to the following tables for a complete list Tank Point Records Data Record Description Records Point Tag Point Tag Product Code Description System Name System Name Tank Level Level Units Tank Level Status Temperature Units Temperature Flow Units Temperature Status Density Units Density Volume Units Density Status Minimum Level Range Gross Volume Maximum Level Range Gross Volume Status Minimum Temperature Range Net Volume Maximum Temperature Range Net Volume Status Minimum Density Range Remaining Volume Net Maximum Density Range Remaining Volume Net Status Minimum Volume Range Available Volume Net Maximum Volume Range Available Volume Net Status Minimum Flow Range Flow Maximum Flow Range Flow Status Time Zone Water Level Time Stamp Water Level Status Tank Status Tank Status Status Data Time Stamp Description file Time Stamp Input Point Records Data Record Description Record Point Tag Point Tag Description Description System Name System Name Alarm Status Units 116 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Data Record Description Record Process Value Minimum Process Value Range Process Value
419. sufficient privileges DENSITY ALARM HOLDOFF This variable is the sometimes known as deadband or hysteresis It is the amount by which the alarm limit must be cleared before the alarm is deactivated For example if the High density alarm setpoint is 10 and the density alarm holdoff is 1 the density must return to a value of 9 before the High density alarm is deactivated This variable is entered when configuring the tank point and cannot be modified from Operate FLOW ALARM COMPOSITE FLOW ALARM This variable is a composite value that displays a coded variable representing the highest priority flow alarms for the tank Possible values are Normal High or Low FuelsManager calculates this alarm based on the current flow and the alarm limits configured for the tank FLOW HIGH LIMIT CURRENT HIGH FLOW LIMIT This variable is the limit for a High flow alarm If the tank flow exceeds the High Alarm value then a High alarm is activated Please note that FuelsManager compares the value of the flow variable regardless of it s sign meaning that a flow of 10000 gpm would trigger a high flow alarm if the High flow limit was 9999 This variable is entered when configuring the tank point but can be modified from Operate by a user with sufficient privileges FLOW LOW LIMIT CURRENT LOW FLOW LIMIT This variable is the limit for a Low flow alarm If the tank flow falls below the Low Alarm value then a Low alarm is activated
420. sult restrictions may apply when selecting a database point depending on the engineering units and data format for example Float DWORD etc Types of I O points Device drivers can support three types of I O points Internal An internal point only exists in the device driver software and typically provides information about the status of the communications between FuelsManager and the device Input Input points collect data from the field device and can be connected to FuelsManager point variables in order to read data from the field Output Output points read data from FuelsManager point variables and can be connected to I O points to write values to field devices You can perform maintenance and diagnostics on the interfaces and corresponding devices In the Communication Interface Maintenance window you can change an interface s mode as well as open the device windows of that interface to display diagnostic information 1 Select Communications in the Configuration window 2 Select Maintenance Varec Inc 123 Configuring Communications Communication Interface Maintenance System Name SIZEMORE Select System Run Mode ACTIVE Interface Status Interface Description Interface Type Port Status INTERFACE 004 Modbus Master UNASSIGNED STANDBY INTERFACE 005 Varec 8130 RTU COMI STANDBY Change Interface Mode Open Maintenance Dialog Done Help Figure 7 7 Communication Interface
421. system This can be done manually by filling out a form for each tank or automatically using the AutoCreate feature Use FMDataManager to check the existing FuelsManager database Note Adding tanks with AutoCreate saves time by automatically associating a product with each tank Adding Tanks with AutoCreate This procedure automatically adds all tanks with all tank details to the FuelsManager Web Server database by obtaining tank information from the selected Site s FuelsManager Oil amp Gas system 1 Ifyou have not already done so log in to the FuelsManager Web Server as described in section on page 269 2 Inthe left treeview click Configuration Sites Tanks A Configuration page appears showing the Tanks list 278 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Under the Tanks list in the Systems list select the network computer on the which the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas system for the desired Site is installed Click the AutoCreate button FuelsManager Web Server sends a request to the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas software on the system you specified When FuelsManager Oil amp Gas identifies each tank in its database this information is then mirrored in the FuelsManager Web Server database The FuelsManager Web Server can now monitor all of the tanks for the selected Site Adding Tanks Manually Use this procedure to add one or more tanks to a FuelsManager Web Server Site Consult the FuelsManager data
422. t a text and text background rectangle color by clicking on Palette button The edit box displays the number assigned to each color in the palette 5 Click OK A label appears in selected area Inserting a value 1 23 The Value tool provides a way to display the value of a FuelsManager database point variable in a graphic as text To create a Value you select the database point variable to associate with the Value and you define how the Value will appear Note The default font attributes also apply to the Value object When you create a dynamic object such as a Value in a Template Graphic the database point variable that you assign to the object is relative by default The database point will be selected dynamically when the graphic is opened and the Value of the variable for that point You also have the object of making the assignment absolute so the value is always associated with the point variable that you select For more information see Creating a template graphic on page 153 and Placing an append button in a graphic on page 165 1 Select the Value tool or select Add and click Value 2 Click in the drawing area A window appears for selecting the database point variable ref erence for the value If you are working with a regular graphic go to step 3 If you are working with a Template Graphic go to step 4 3 Ifyou are building a regular graphic use the Database Edit window to select a database ref erence
423. t box Click Add Destinations The Nodes window appears and is shown above This window lists all nodes except the selected source and lets you select one or more nodes Varec Inc 137 Configuring Product Movement Select one or more nodes Use the lt Ctrl gt or lt Shift gt key to select multiple nodes 6 Click Select You are returned to the Movements window The contents are arranged in a tree like format View the Destinations of a Source by double clicking on the desired Source 7 Click Save The system saves the defined Sources with Destinations Defining groups Groups may be used to correlate multiple Movements You can add groups anytime during the configuration process Clicking the Groups button allows you to view all previously defined Groups or create new ones Inserting a group 1 From the Movements window click Groups The Movement Groups window appears as shown below Movement Groups 2 Click Insert Type in the new Group name 3 Click OK The system returns you to the Movement window Note Each Group name must be unique Deleting a Group To delete a group from the movement system perform the following steps 1 From the Movements window click Groups The Movement Groups window appears This window lists all the groups 2 Select the group to be deleted Click Delete The selected group is erased from the list 4 Click OK to save changes The system returns you to the Moveme
424. t from a database point Doing this clears all alarm settings from the database point including alarm limits graphics or help files When you remove a global alarm assignment the global alarm still exists for use with other database points When you remove a local alarm assignment you delete the alarm limits permanently 1 From the FuelsManager Configuration application Database menu select the Points com mand The Database Edit window appears 2 Select the input or output point for which the alarm is defined and then select Edit The Edit Point window appears 3 Select the Details tab If an alarm is assigned to the point the Alarm Defined checkbox under Alarm Event Configuration will be selected 4 Deselect the Alarm Defined checkbox A message appears asking you if you want to delete the alarm definition Caution Clicking Yes removes the alarm immediately in the database 5 Click Yes The alarm assignment is removed Importing and Exporting Points Files consisting of Input Output Triggered and Tank point information can be imported and exported FuelsManager also enables you to import manual values calculated values forced values strap tables and source assignments This feature has been provided so that you can create an Input Output Triggered or Tank point using external applications such as Excel or Notepad Not only can this method save time involved in initial configuration but it can also be used as a bac
425. t the tank density temperature was updated This variable can be viewed from the Operate interface but cannot be modified SOLIDS VOLUME BOTTOM SOLIDS VOLUME This process variable is the volume of solids in the tank FuelsManager normally calculates this from the solids level value and the tank strapping table however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered by the operator VCF VOLUME CORRECTION FACTOR This process variable is the volume correction factor used to correct gross volume for the effects of product thermal expansion FuelsManager normally calculates this from temperature density and selected correction method the variable can also be linked to automatic gauging systems or manually entered if required VOLUME STRAP VOLUME This process variable is the observed volume of the product in the tank as read from the tank strapping table FuelsManager normally calculates this from the tank gauge reading and the tank strapping table however the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered ROOF CORRECTION ROOF VOLUME This process variable is the volumetric effect of the tanks floating roof If a floating roof type tank is defined FuelsManager normally calculates this from the roof weight and roof position However the value can also be measured by automatic tank gauging systems or manually entered Varec Inc
426. t variables the report displays Object Functions in summary reports Object Summary Report Functionality TABLE Exactly one table is required OF ROWS IN The FuelsManager database sets the number of rows TABLE User cannot enter a number LABELS Can only be inserted in the first row as report column headers VALUE The first value entered in the table establishes or tags the databases to which the Tank points will be derived Each subsequent value created represents the selected variables of one or more Tank points such as temperature and density COLUMN ROW Only column totals and column averages can be TOTALS AND displayed AVERAGES Creating a new summary report 1 Within the Report Editor window from the file menu select New and then select the Sum mary Report command from the sub menu 2 The Summary Report Setup window appears In the Summary Report Setup window set the specifications of the Summary report The components of the window are described below Summary Report Setup Number Of Columns 2 19 3 IV Outline Table Independent Variable Select Database System All Tanks Tank Points C Active Tanks Database C Inactive Tanks Column Totals Set Table Sorting Order No Column Totals c Group Entries by System c Group Entries By Product Total Everything in Column Figure 15 1 Summary Report Setup window Summary report Setup window In the N
427. table below contains a list of the system permission and the corresponding description System Permission Description Acknowledge Local Respond to alarm activity in the Operate program from a Alarms local system Acknowledge Remote Respond to alarm activity in the Operate program from the Alarms remote server Add Database Points Capable to add database points Must have Configure Database permission Browse Database Browse the point database in Operate to define open or restore any point variable to monitor Defines whether you can access the Point menu bar option Must have Configure Database permission Communications Configure the communications maintenance including Maintenance monitoring enabling and disabling communications using FuelsManager Configuration gt Communications gt Maintenance Varec Inc 19 Configuring Security System Permission Description Configure Alarm Categories Configure Alarm category within security Configure Alarms Configure global alarm definitions in FuelsManager Configuration gt Database gt Alarms Configure Archivemanager Configure Archive Manager Services for start times intervals and historical periods for data to be archived Configure Auditing Configure Audit permissions Configure Communications Configure the CommManager Services only for the interface device description and communicatio
428. tegrated product and water table mode The product table begins were the water table ends 206 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Product Product Table Water Table 45 Example 1 Water level lower than the top point in the water table 208 Product Tat 5ft Product 1ft Oft Product ft 2ft WE d Water Table A A Example 1 shows how the product and water volumes are calculated when the water level is less than the water table Product Table Water Table Product Level Product Vol Water Level Water Vol 0 0 0 0 1ft 1000 gal 1ft 1000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 2ft 2000 gal 5 ft 5000 gal 20 ft 20 000 gal Measured product level 5ft Measured water level 1ft From the product table the product volume 5000 gal FuelsManager recognizes that the measured product level is below that of the bottom point in the product table so it uses the top of the water table to extend the range Varec Inc 207 Setting Calculation Methods From the water table 1ft 2ft top minus 1ft measured water level 1000 gal Total product volume for 5ft of product and 1ft of water 6000 gal From the water table 1ft of water 1000 gal Example 2 Water level higher than the top point in the water table A Product Table 5ft Product Oft Product 2ft Water Water Table 1ft
429. tension Click OK Close the Registry Editor pop en Changing the Operate Tabbed Window Display Setting By default users can view multiple tabbed windows in the Operate application You can use a Windows Registry setting to restrict Operate to display only one tabbed window at a time This setting must be made on the client machine and is specific to each logged on user Caution Using the Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall your operating system Varec Inc cannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of the Registry Editor can be resolved Use the Registry Editor at your own risk 1 On the Windows Start menu click Run Type regedit in the Open field Click OK The Registry Editor window opens In the left treeview select HKEY_CURRENT_USER wm BR N Double click the following keys in sequence Software gt Varec gt SCADA gt Operate 6 Double click on this value SingleTabbedWindowOperation The Edit DWORD Value window opens 7 Inthe Value Data field do one of the following Enter a 1 to restrict the display to a single tabbed window Opening a tabbed window when one is already being displayed closes the current window Enter a O default to disable this feature The user can now view multiple tabbed windows in Operate 8 Click OK 9 Close the Registry Editor Note Operate must be restarted for registry settings to take effect
430. ter Process overview The process of creating a custom Tank Detail is summarized below 1 2 3 The display is opened in Draw Insert labels values and other objects Once completed the display is saved and generated like any other graphic The default Tank Detail is then defined by entering the file name in the Registry Editor as described in Changing the Default Tank Detail Display on page 43 The default Tank Detail can be overridden on a tank by tank basis by entering the file name in the Detail field of the Edit Tank Data window Creating a custom tank detail 4 Note DO NOT SAVE over the default file Save the file under a different file name by select ing Save As Select File and click Detail Mode If a graphic is presently opened Draw will ask if you want to save the file A check mark appears next to the Detail Mode menu option Select File and click Open The Open Graphic File window appears Select the desired graphic grf from the File Name list box Make sure that the Graphic option button is selected The Tank Detail graphic appears in the Draw window Editing a value Tank Details can be edited in one of two modes Use Parameter mode and Use Template mode You can switch between these modes via the Draw menu File sub menu Detail Data command Use parameters mode In this mode only tank point variables can be added to the Tank Detail This is the default mode n BR U N From
431. the Alarm Assignments window under Alarm Graphic click the Select button A window appears showing available graphics 2 Under Available Displays select a graphic 56 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas If the OK button is not available after you select a graphic you have selected a template graphic Under Available Templates select the database point to associate with the tem plate graphic when it is opened 3 To make the graphic appear automatically each time that the alarm occurs select the Auto Run option 4 Click OK The Alarm Assignments window appears with the graphic file that you selected displayed in the Alarm Graphics area Assigning a Help File to an Alarm You can assign a text help file htx to an alarm to present alarm related information to the operator Help files must be located in the FuelsManager Graphics directory default FMProject Graphics 1 Inthe Alarm Assignments window under Alarm Help click the Select button The Help Files Configuration window appears 2 Inthe list of available help files select a file For more information about Help files including instructions for adding files to the list see Managing Help files on page 36 3 Click OK The help file that you selected appears in the Alarm Help area of the Alarm Assignments window Removing an Alarm from a Database Point In some situations you may need to remove a global or local alarm assignmen
432. the Tanks contained in the FuelsManager Tank Database for the current system that have either Tank or Input Process Variables sealed The Dialog shows the Tag the Seal ID and the sum of the Seal ID s Display of W amp M Indicator on Graphics amp Reports The FuelsManager Operate program indicates any Weights amp Measures Seal for Tank Detail and Historical Report displays The Weights amp Measures Seal is shown by the prefix W amp M on the title bar of the display If a particular tank process variable has been sealed FuelsManager displays or prints values with the subscript W amp M This is determined by the Input Process Variable Seal and if applicable an 1 O Seal that is communicated from the external device An illustration of the W amp M seal indication is provided below Varec Inc 245 Using Weights and Measures 7 FuelsManager Operate Display View Alarm Point Movements Tools Detail Help 3 sd Realtime Trends Graphics sace Gan Tank Name ETE Dynamic Reports Set Para Product ETA Tank 1 Ii Tank 10 E Tank 11 a Tank 12 Measured Values Level Set 5 25 2005 5 48 12 PM ft in 16th Figure 14 8 FuelsManager Operate Level field showing W amp M indicator Any FuelsManager user defined reports will include W amp M indicators The system checks the database for the Seal and displays the subscript if applicable
433. the selected object These attributes include color style fill pen and condition An additional modifiable attribute is the database point variable selection Conditions and Symbols can also be edited or deleted Most of the editing options are found under the Edit menu This section describes the different techniques used to edit a graphic Selecting an object To move an object or change the object attributes you must select the object with the Hand tool 1 Click the Hand selector icon from the Draw toolbar 2 Select the object 3 An object selection can be cancelled after the object has been selected Click anywhere on an empty spot in the screen the handles disappear or press ESC 4 Choose an command from the Edit menu to modify the object Deleting an object You can delete objects by selecting the Delete command in the Edit menu or by pressing SHIFT DEL Next amp previous The Next and Previous commands allow you to change the selected object based on its layered position i e selecting overlapped objects Next PgUp allows you to select an object from the back or bottom to the front or top Previous PgDn allows you to select an object from the front or top of the layers to the back or bottom Attributes All objects found under the Add menu item can be edited using the same initial procedure 1 Select the object 2 Select Attributes from the Edit menu item or press Ctrl A The window pertaining t
434. the tags depend on the OPC client software being used The dialog below shows the OPC tag structure as seen via the industry standard Matrikon OPC explorer client Matrikon OPC Tag Studio Matrikon OPC Explorer FuelsManager Group File Edit View Help 8 x alk Bo Tag Entry Tags To Be Added TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Level TAG Item ID rankFarm Tank 1 Tank Volume l Data Type Empty Defaut v M Create Active Eiter Level Data Type Filter Empty Default v v Write Access V Read Access Branches Items Available Items in Server Endress Hauser DataManager 1 EU TankFarm Tank 1 E Tank EY Tank 2 Tank 3 Tag TankFarm Tank 1 Tank Level ie Eg Tank 4 Access Path Validated No Vol Strap Cor Exp Data Type Empty Default Vol Strap H20 Create Active Yes T Volume Available Net Writeable e Figure 5 1 Matrikon OPC Tag Studio dialog Supported client and server interface OPC Data Access DA v1 0 OPC Data Access DA v 2 05a Varec Inc 71 Configuring Database Points The OPC standard also supports an interface designed to browse and select database tags for which data is exchanged This function allows developers of OPC clients to provide an interface to browse and select point variables from the in FuelsManager database Setting the Number of Database Levels FuelsManager stores real time data in units called points Points are arranged in a tree like struct
435. the timing of the communications for a particular gauge The possible values are enabled or disabled When enabled the timing is dependent of the type of gauge FASTSCAN STATUS This process variable displays the current FASTSCAN status gauge communications either enabled or disabled 301 Point Parameters Product Transfer Data Product Transfer Data TRANSFER MODE TANK TRANSFER MODE This process variable is the mode by which the operator wants to transfer product to from tank possible values are inactive by volume by level or by differential volume This variable is used as part of the tank transfer feature and as part of the Product Movement System option This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote setting of the transfer mode TANK COMMAND TANK MODE COMMAND OUTPUT This process variable is the desired mode of operation of the tank possible values are stop fill empty run test reset or out of service This variable is used by the tank point to enable tank mode alarms For example if the tank mode is Stop and the product movement alarms are enabled and the level changes then activate an illegal movement alarm This variable is normally entered by the operator but can be linked to automatic tank gauging systems to allow remote setting of the mode or can be calculated by FuelsManager based on the flow proces
436. ting 264 exiting FuelsManager Report Editor 251 files 265 formatting 261 generating 265 historical 267 opening Report Editor 251 predefined standard 251 summary reports 254 tools and objects 252 Web Server 281 282 reset holdoff 60 run modes subsystem 25 run down 128 S saving graphic files 157 SCADA 2 scale limits 67 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas scaling functions 42 sealing FuelsManager modules 246 tank point variables 243 the point 238 security alarm categories 13 14 audit 23 categories 12 Leak Detection 183 opening the Security window 11 permissions user group 19 tag categories 15 users and user groups 16 Web Server 272 servers OPC 70 services 6 shapes drawing 160 shipment 129 sites Web Server 270 Standard Edition 2 standard reports 251 Start Definitions 38 Strap Table Volume 203 strapping tables product and water 206 strings 32 subsystem run modes 25 summary reports 254 summary movement 131 Symbol Index 156 symbols creating 155 files 152 placing in a graphic 165 system architecture 4 parameters coded variables 34 file directories FuelsManager 27 FMTools directory 28 help files 36 modifiers 35 Operate tabbed window display 44 products 29 Start Definitions 38 strings 32 subsystem run modes 25 tank detail display default 43 ViewRTU directory 29 System Update Utility before updating 143 error messages 145 running 143 troubleshooting 145 SystemManager 6 system
437. ting techniques include sizing the table defining the number of rows and columns inserting deleting columns and moving the table A Label is text used to identify values 252 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Creating label attributes includes entering the label name selecting the appearance and positioning the label You can select the label size font and style Values A Value represents real time data connected to a database Creating values include selecting a database and corresponding points and variables This procedure used to create values is the same procedure used in the Draw application Summary Report Setup Number Of Columns 2 19 3 v Outline Table Independent Variable Select Database System All Tanks Tank Points C Active Tanks Ib rcu C Inactive Tanks Column Totals Set Table Sorting Order No Column Totals C Group Entries by System r Group Entries By Product C Total Everything in Column cen In addition to selecting a database point and point parameter other attributes include font appearance positioning field width precision and engineering units These attributes are set in the Database Value Attributes window displayed during value creation You have the ability to customize or automatically set the field display Field Width is the number of characters allowed for the value Precision is the allotted number of decimal places if the value i
438. tion If you want the object to blink repeat this step with Select Color 2 Click OK to return to the Edit Dynamic Conditions window Click Append to add your selections to the Conditions list Continue appending conditions until your Dynamic Condition is complete On the Edit Dynamic Conditions window click OK Assigning a condition You can assign the a condition to any object in a graphic to make that object change visually based on changes in the FuelsManager database Common reasons for assigning a condition are to show a change in status for an input point or to show an alarm condition for an input point The process for creating a condition is described in detail on page 173 1 2 3 Open the graphic or template graphic in which you want to apply the condition Select the object or symbol that you want to assign the dynamic condition to From the Edit menu select Conditions to open the Define Object Conditional Data dialog or press lt Ctrl K gt A window appears for selecting the database point variable reference for the condition If you are working with a regular graphic go to step 4 If you are working with a Template Graphic go to step 5 If you are building a regular graphic use the Database Edit window to select a database ref erence as follows a If you need to select a different database click the Database button b Under Point Name navigate to the correct tank point by selecting an entry and using th
439. tion and Pump and Valve Control Field Instruments Real Time Database FuelsManager maintains a real time memory resident database consisting of input values calculated values and operator entered values The system supplied is completely pre configured to fully support the required functions Refer to the Database chapter for procedures on editing the database The FuelsManager real time database offers the following features Volume Calculations Multiple Users Multiple databases Online Configuration Alarms 4 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Trends Events and Event logging Trends Online help Volume Calculations FuelsManager performs automatic database calculations based on changes to database point values Changes may be due to receipt of new input data from external sources other database calculations or timed events FuelsManager includes a comprehensive set of tank volume calculations for storage tank data To review correctional methods used to calculate tank data refer to the Tank Calculations chapter Multiple Users FuelsManager supports simultaneous access to configuration data for multiple users It maintains database integrity by locking database points that are currently selected for modification Multiple Databases Each machine has its own database and data management system called FMDataManager No more than one database can be created on a single machine but users ca
440. tion Index 156 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Select Symbol Index Entry Symbol Description File Name Used By DSA Type Dynamics Control Valve Legend ControiValve A FlowMeter Legend SD_FlowMeter Pump Legend SD_PumpLegend SD_Valve SD_Valve Valve Legend SD_ValveLegend J ee E Renaming a Graphic or Symbol in the Index The description that you enter for to each graphic and symbol in Draw is the name that is displayed in Operate This name is independent of the file name You can change this descriptive name using this procedure 1 On the Master menu select Graphic Index or Symbol Index 2 Select the graphic or symbol entry in the list 3 Click the Edit button Change the Description field entry and then click the OK button Generating a Saved Graphic or Symbol Using the Index 1 Onthe Master menu click Graphic Index or Symbol Index 2 Select the graphic or symbol entry in the list 3 Click the New button The Edit Graphic Index or Edit Symbol Index window appears showing a list of files that have not been generated 4 Select a graphic or symbol in the File list and enter a description for the file in the Descrip tion field Click OK The graphic now appears in the index list with the description that you entered Editing a condition using the Condition Index 1 On the Master menu click Condition Index 2 Select the graphic or symbol entry in the list 3 Click the Edit but
441. tion configures the tank to use traditional level TRADITIONAL tank gauging techniques GAUGING SETUP This option configures the tank to use Hydrostatic tank HYDROSTATIC gauging techniques GAUGING SETUP HYBRID This option configures the tank to use Hybrid tank gauging techniques PRESSURE These parameters define the position and offset for the TRANSMITTER Top pressure transmitter in Hydrostatic Hybrid tank SETUP TOP calculations PRESSURE These parameters define the position and offset for the TRANSMITTER Middle pressure transmitter in Hydrostatic Hybrid tank SETUP MIDDLE calculations PRESSURE These parameters define the position and offset for the TRANSMITTER Bottom pressure transmitter in Hydrostatic Hybrid tank SETUP BOTTOM calculations MINIMUM LEVEL This parameter defines the lowest level of which Hydrostatic Hybrid tank calculations can be performed DENSITY This parameter defines the minimum change in density DEADBAND that will cause the Hydrostatic Hybrid tank calculations to be executed USE LOCAL Enable the entry of the Earth s gravity in m sec2 at the GRAVITY tank s specification Used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations ELEVATION Defines the elevation above sea level at the tanks specific location used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations LATITUDE Defines the Latitude in deg mins amp sec at the tank s specific location used in Hydrostatic Hybrid calculations
442. tion methods designated Japan allows you to configure the following special data rounding methods Volume Correction Factor VCF None 0 00001 0 0000001 Level This includes both Product and Water Level None Nearest Integer i e 123 5 millimeters is truncated to 123 millimeters Temperature This includes Product and Gas Temperature None 0 25 Degrees 0 000 0 124 0 00 C 0 125 0 374 0 25 C 0 375 0 624 0 50 C 0 625 0 874 0 75 C 0 875 1 124 1 00 C 0 5 Degrees 0 00 0 29 0 0 C 0 30 0 79 0 5 C 0 80 1 29 1 0 C Varec Inc 199 Setting Calculation Methods Volume correction techniques Correction for temperature for a liquid Compensates for the effect of temperatures on a liquid Custody transfers and billing are used based on volumes at a given temperature or Standard Temperature FuelsManager provides the following temperature correction techniques All correction techniques are based on internationally recognized standards developed by the American Petroleum Institute API American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM Institute of Petroleum IP Japanese Institute of Standards JIS Gosstandart of Russia GOST and Chinese National Standards GB T The goal of a correction technique is to calculate a Volume Correction factor VCF and to use this factor to calculate standard volumes from measured volumes The VCF is defined as Co
443. to correct the settings Click the OK button The Define Object Conditional Data window appears Define Object Conditional Data Database MSIZEMORE Point Tank Farm Tank Tank 4 Variable Mass Product Mass Type Double v Pen Color dfasdf Y Background Color dfasdf v Brush Color dfasdf v Object Visibility ddgghhh Cancel OK Select the checkbox for the visual change that you want to apply to the object when the con dition requirements are met Text Color or Pen Color Background Color Brush Color or Object Visibility Option availability depends on the object you selected in step 2 Choose a condition by doing the following a Click the Edit button next to the visual setting option you selected The Select Global Conditions window appears listing the available predefined conditions b Ifthe condition that you need is not in the list you can click the New button to create a new condition as described on page 173 c If you need to modify a condition before applying it select the condition and click the Edit button Refer to page 176 for detailed instructions d Select a condition Click the OK button In the Define Object Conditional Data window click the OK button to apply the condition to the object Varec Inc 175 Creating Graphics Editing a Dynamic Condition You can edit a condition to change how it appears to operators change the database point variable it is associate
444. to move them to the Assigned Points pane The double right arrow button moves all Unassigned Points to the Assigned Points pane If you want to unassign a Point select the point and use the left arrow to move it to the Unassigned Points pane The double left arrow button move all Assigned Points to the Unassigned Points pane Click OK to save the points you have set Archiving Parameters The Archiving Parameters allow you to set when the archive is written by the Archive Manager You can set the points to archive on data change or to archive on a given schedule Note You must select either Archive on data change or Archive with a static interval If this Archiving Parameter is not set a System Fail error is generated when attempting to start ArchiveManager Setting Archive on Data Change To archive the points when the data changes select the check box Archive on data change Setting the ArchiveManager Schedule The ArchiveManager writes data on a schedule based on your entries in the Start Time and Interval fields in the ArchiveManager Configuration window as follows Varec Inc 113 Archiving Information 1 Select the Archive with a static interval check box to enable this feature 2 Inthe Start Time field enter the time in HH MM format that you want to begin archiving data 3 Inthe Interval field enter the number of minutes you want to leave between data transfers The minimum int
445. to the Periodic Interval field It can be used alongside or instead of the HTML file Table 12 1 Output File Types 194 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Automated Data Output Configuration Dialog 3 Automatic Data Output Available Tank Variables Tank Variables to be logged Ambient temp for ctsh API Correction Error Available Mass Available Vol Gross Available Volume Net Bit 12 Bottom Sediment amp Water Bottom Sediment amp Water Time Calculation Error Combined Bottom Volume H20 Solids Current Transferred Volume Database Configuration Error Density Snapshot File Parameters Trigger Point gt gt Add gt gt lt lt Remove lt lt Default Precision 6 Move Up Move Down Trigger Value Reset Value Trigger Time 1 Trigger Time 2 Snapshot File Periodic File Parameters File r 1611 55 T 16 11 55 E Trigger File al Snaphot Periodic File Options Version Export Quality Info Interval Mins al 1 Export Header HTML Files File Header File OR Note Ifa tank point variable is not configured see the Database section of this manual the resulting data written by Automated Data Output may be invalid Field Definition Available Tank Variables This list includes all possible tank point variables Tank Variables to be logged This field lists all of the tank point variables th
446. tom2 Top3 Bottom3 Top4 Bottom4 Where conditions Level Current Tank Liquid Level LowLevel Strapping point level in table immediately below Level HighLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above Level HighestLevel Strapping point level in table immediately above HighLevel LowestLevel Strapping point level in table immediately below LowLevel LowVolume Strapping point volume in table for LowLevel point HighVolume Strapping point Volume in table for HighLevel point HighestVolume Strapping point Volume in table for HighestLevel point LowestVolume Strapping point Volume in table for LowestLevel point Polynomial spherical tank Calculations TOV P Lx L0 Qn Lx L0 2 Rn Lx L0 Sn VR Where conditions Ln 1 Lxw lt Ln and n is an integer between 1 n lt 9 Lwx Lwx 1000 VR VR 1000 Lx measured liquid level mm LO correction volume mm Ln levels at the registered pointers mm P constant X XXXXXXXXX Qn constant XXX XXXXXXX Rn constant XXXX XXXXXX Sn constant EXXXXXXX XXX VR correction volume L Varec Inc 205 Setting Calculation Methods Product and Water Strapping Tables It is typical for FuelsManager customers to have two separate strapping tables one for product and one for water bottom The
447. ton 4 n the Edit Dynamic Conditions window make any changes necessary and then click OK See Editing a Dynamic Condition on page 176 for detailed instructions Saving files The Save As command saves a file for the first time This option is also used to save the opened file under a different name The Save command saves changes to an existing file Save As is particularly useful when you have created a complex display that you want to use again with minor modifications Varec Inc 157 Creating Graphics Purging files The Purge option enables you to delete unwanted symbols and graphic files from your system When you purge a file the Symbol and Condition Indexes are updated accordingly Note You should not delete graphic or symbol files from the project folder using Windows Explorer Doing so will remove the File but the symbol and condition indexes will not reflect the deletion Instead use the Purge option Merging files Draw allows you to merge previously created files with the file in which you are currently working You cannot merge template graphics 1 Click Merge File from the File menu item Point and click on the location where you want the merged file to appear 2 Drag the mouse to create a box where the merged file appears The Merge Graphic File win dow appears Type the name of the file you wish to merge or select one from the File list box 4 Click OK to complete the operation and return t
448. ton once Double click To quickly press and release the mouse button twice in succession Drag To hold down the mouse button while moving an object across the computer screen Release To quit holding down the mouse button after dragging an item Select To pick an item on a menu button or to highlight text or graphics usually via a single click Selecting does not initiate an action Choose To pick an item to carry out an action Often needed to select an item before choosing it usually via a double click Varec Inc vii Getting Started Window Elements Elements Description Program Icon Provides a pop up menu which allows window modification Title Bar Shows the title of the application document or FuelsManager graphic screen Menu Bar Lists of available menus Most applications have a File menu Edit menu and a Help menu as well as menus unique to the application Menu A menu contains a list of commands or actions performed by the operator Also referred to as a pop up drop down menu Dialog Box A movable window that is displayed on screen in response to the user selecting a menu option It provides the current status and available options for a particular feature in the application Window A scrollable viewing area on screen May refer to the entire application in a window Window Title The Window title
449. tpoint Low Low must be greater than Low and activates when tank level is equal to or greater than the setpoint Volume calculations are based on the Strap table with the exception of Water Volume and Bottom Volume for Outage These volumes are calculated as if the Strap table was an Innage table Strap Water and Hydro Definition Modes FuelsManager can be configured to calculate gross volume by one of two different methods Combined product and water tables Separated product and water tables These selections control how the product and water tables overlap and how FuelsManager should interpret the volumes at the point where the two overlap For more details see the Product amp Water Strapping Tables section of the Tank Calculations chapter 98 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Leak Detection If your system has the Leak Detection feature installed a Leak Detection tab appears on the Edit Tank Point window For details on these configuration parameters please refer to the Leak Detection section of this manual Assigning Data Sources Database IO Connections Points Current Database System Alarms WSIZEMORE Si 5 ents Source Assignment hs Selected Point Type ArchiveManager Tank C Input C Output C Triggered Connection Types M None v Manual v Calc v oPc Refresh M Comm Database Point Connection Type Selected System Server Server Tac Tank
450. truments or operator entry Performing analysis of sensor data looking for conditions that might indicate a leak Comparing instruments readings and calculations against alarm limits Annunciating processing and logging alarms Providing Reports Configuration of the FuelsManager Leak Detection feature is performed from the Configuration user interface and is documented in this section The procedure for running a leak test and creating a leak report is accessed using the Operator user interface and is documented in the User Guide for the Operate program Leak Detection interfaces directly to FuelsManager s Archive database reading data from ArchiveManager s database file applying filtering algorithms calculating various statistics applying qualifying logic and writing the results of the calculations to FuelsManager database points Alarm Processes running within DataManager can monitor the resultant calculations Any data source can serve as the source of data for Leak Detection s calculations This includes data manually entered data calculated by DataManager or an Application DLL or data received via CommManager or an OPC server FuelsManager Leak Detection feature is able to detect a leak at rates as low as 0 2 gallons per hour The ability to detect leaks at these rates depends upon the physical characteristics of the tank size shape above below ground materials used in construction etc the types of instruments available to
451. try window appears 6 Select a file from the list and click OK to return to the Append Attributes window 7 Click the OK button Creating a Help append A Help append button displays plain text help in an Operate window or a single topic ina Windows Help file when clicked You can use a Help append to direct the operator to performa specific task Before you can refer to a help file with an append button the file must have the proper extension and it must be stored in the FuelsManager FMProject Graphics folder Plain text files must have a htx extension If you will be using a Windows Help file you must know the context ID for the topic that you want to show to the user Varec Inc 167 Creating Graphics 1 Select the Append tool or select Add and click Append Click on area to define corner and hold down mouse button 2 Drag the cursor to define the size of the append and release the mouse button The Append Attributes window appears 3 To display the append as a visible button in your graphic click on the Button is visible under Style and then select a button color 4 Under Type select the Help option 5 Click File in the Help File Name group box The Select Help File window appears 6 Do one of the following To use a Windows Help file select the Windows Help Format checkbox Enter the context ID for the appropriate Help topic in the Context box To use a plain text file ensure that the Windo
452. ts that get populated as a result of the input source changing Variable Format Details Output Destinations input Source EVENT oh Mitad Description System Type AAA aA Figure 5 12 Output destinations triggered point 1 From the Edit Point window select the Output Destinations tab 2 Click Add to display the Select Data Source dialog and select any data source as an output destination You can add output destinations of up 32 to a specific data source destinations Comm or OPC 3 When finished selecting Data Source distinctions click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog Varec Inc 79 Configuring Database Points Entering Input Source for a triggered point For triggered points the input source is the point that the trigger point will monitor Variable Format Details Output Destinations Input Source Add DEA o Description System Type Figure 5 13 Input Source triggered point 1 From the Edit Point window select the Input Source tab Bow gw Edit Point Window When finished click OK to return to the Edit Point dialog Edit Point window Input Output and Triggered Point DESCRIPTION Define a descriptive name to be use for the point This name can be displayed on user graphics and reports in addition it forms part of the alarm entry if an alarm condition should occur DISABLED Disable the processing of a particular input output po
453. tware Varec SCADA Operate Double click the value for UseAlternateAlarm Line In the Value Data field do one of the following Enter a to enable the alternate alarm Line Enter a O to enable the default alarm Line Click OK 10 Close the Registry Editor Changing the Alarm Display Mode By default FuelsManager Operate shows the newest unacknowledged alarm on the Alarm Line Each time an alarm occurs it replaces the previous alarm on the Alarm Line 48 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas You can also set Operate to show the oldest unacknowledged alarm on the Alarm Line by changing a Windows registry setting This setting is made on the client machine and applies to any user logging on to that machine wm BR N Caution Using the Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall your operating system Varec Inc cannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of the Registry Editor can be resolved Use the Registry Editor at your own risk On the Windows Start menu click Run Type regedit in the Open field Click OK The Registry Editor window opens In the left treeview select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Double click the following keys in sequence Software gt Varec gt SCADA gt Operate Double click on this value UseOldestUnAckOnAlarmLine The Edit DWORD Value window opens In the Value Data field do one of the following
454. ty is unable to complete the update the last line of the log will display Update Failed 144 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Error messages and troubleshooting Error messages Missing System File Update is Not Available You may get this message in the FMSystemUpdate window as shown below wa FMSysUpdate This message means that either the utility does not recognize the system file as a version that it can update or that there are files missing If your version is not 4 0 4 1 or 4 2 the utility cannot update your database system If this is so the Run button is disabled System Data File Version 4 3 If the utility recognizes the version as 4 3 System Data File Version 4 3 then the system is already updated and you do not need to run this utility In this case the Run button is also disabled Unsupported Graphic Revision in File 3401 SYM You will get this message if you created your graphics and symbols in a version previous to 4 0 This will not keep the update from successfully running But you should make sure that your graphics and symbols are displaying correctly and if not manually correct them Database is Corrupt You may get a Database is Corrupt message This can reflect a couple situations Any of your data files may be from a version previous to 4 0 Your data files are not consistent you may have a 4 0 movement database and a 4 2 product database Whatever th
455. u Begin Prerequisites The following prerequisites are required FuelsManager Standard or Professional Edition must be installed with the Web Server option The FuelsManager Web Server must be configured as described in Chapter 16 Key Information Note These URLs are the installation defaults they can be changed during the installation process SQL Server 2005 Reporting Services The FuelsManager Web Server uses Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Reporting Services to manage and generate reports There are two web utilities that are used to manage and access Reporting Services Report Manager http localhost Reports a utility for managing and configuring reports Report Server http localhost ReportServer a utility for running reports About Report Layout and Data Source Files The FuelsManager Web Server uses two types of files to generate a report 1 an report layout file rdl which contains the report layout and 2 a data source file rds which describes how to obtain the appropriate data from the database Each report can use more than one data source The report setup procedures in this chapter describe how to configure each of the standard reports to use the appropriate layout and data source s Task Overview Configuring Web Reporting This section describes how to set up access to the standard FuelsManager Oil Gas reports through the FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Web Server Interface The procedure to set up ot
456. u to set the number of seconds before the movement alarm notification No Flow Holdoff Allows you to set the number of minutes before the no flow alarm notification Operations Data Pressure High Low Limit Allows you to set the pressure High or Low alarm limit Process Connection Data Allows you to edit the process connections in the tank point Process Data tab Rates Allows you to set the flow rate or level change rate of the product Reverse Flow Holdoff 2 Allows you to set the number of seconds before the reverse flow alarm notification Solids Level Allows you to enter the solids level Standard Density Allows you to enter the standard density Tank Mode Allows you to change the tank mode either emptying filling or stopped Tank Transfer Status Allows you to set the tank or transfer status of a tank Temperature High Low Limit Allows you to set the temperature High or Low alarm limit Temperature HiHi LoLo Limit Allows you to set the temperature HiHi or LoLo alarm limit Temperature Allows you to set the temperature of the product Transfer Allows you to use transfer mode this is disabled if you have the movement system Vapor Pressure Allows you to enter vapor pressure Vapor Temperature Allows you to enter vapor temperature Volume Correction Data Allows you to set the VCF factor or change the volume correction
457. uble LD Vars Level Maximum Double Level Minimum Double Level Units Units Point Tag Tag Product Code Product System Name Tank Level Double ooooocofoooooooco Figure 6 1 ArchiveManager Configuration window ArchiveManager Configuration Before ArchiveManager can begin transferring data you must first configure the system to archive the correct data in the correct format on your planned schedule This includes Select a real time Database s the DataManager from which ArchiveManager extracts data Connect to a data source ODBC compliant RDBMS Enter the Options to archive all points or select specific points Set the Archiving Parameters for when a point is archived Selecting FMDataManager variables to be stored When you finish configuring ArchiveManager you must click OK and then restart the Archive Manager service to enable the new settings Select a real time database 1 Inthe Archive Manager Configuration window click Select The Select FMDataManager Sub system window appears 110 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 2 Select the database systems you want ArchiveManager to transfer from To select more than one press lt Ctrl gt and click on multiple DataManagers Or click Select All to select all options in the window 3 Click OK after you make your selections The system returns you to the Archive Manager Configuration window Your database selection appears in the Real tim
458. uelsManager database and the To column defines the value that will written to the communications interface In either case transmit or receive if a value is not defined in the lookup table no conversion is applied Varec Inc 39 Setting System Parameters FuelsManager Translation Table Database Point Lookup PLC Valve 101 Procees From To iS Stop 100 Value Sart am 401 B Value 101 Pause 102 aii abe A Database point is of type GOUD aba coral coded variable and set to coded variable Start to the value Start value of 101 FuelsManager Translation Table Database Point Lookup PLC Valve101 Procees UD i Value 3 20 E 2 Value 30 30 3 Lookup Table converts m 3 2 PLC s value of 30 to value EL Gears alls of 90 of 3 FuelsM anager Translation Table pic Database Point Lookup Valve 101 Procees Value 70 Value 30 Value of 70 is not in the Lookup Table so no conversion take place PLC sends value of 70 To configure a translation 1 Open FuelsManager Configuration and click Resources gt Translations The Translations window opens and is shown below Translations xi Edit Manual Scaling Functions Scaling Function 10 Decimal Hex Import Esport Apply Close 40 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 2 Click Edit gt Add Lookup
459. ulate the volumetric effect of the floating roof 314 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Tank Configuration Data ROOF TYPE This parameter defines the type of floating roof possible values are No Tank Roof no floating roof correction Fixed Roof no floating roof correction Roof Mass in Strap roof mass is accounted for in the tank strapping table FuelsManager corrects the roof volume to compensate for the difference between the current product density and the density of the product when the tank strapping table was created Roof Mass not in Strap the roof mass has not been included in the tank strapping table FuelsManager applies the volumetric effect of the roof to the volume correction calculations in addition to compensating for the difference between the current product density and the density of the product when the tank strapping table was created Kaiji Kentei Kyyokai see the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukail see the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai2 see the Tank Calculations chapter for more details Only available if a Japan Correction Type is selected on the Edit Tank Data Volume tab Sin Nihon Kentei Kyyoukai3 see
460. um and Maximum Operating level alarm Selecting the User Defined option for the Minimum and Maximum fill parameter on the Edit Tank Data Ves sel tab enables these alarms Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Edit Tank Data gt WSIZEMORE TankFarm Tank 4 Tank General Volume Process Data Alarms Vessel 1 Vessel 2 W amp M Strap Water Table Leak Detection Gauge Alarm Tank Gauge Alarm Event Category Default Y High High High Low Low Low Holdoff Enabled 34 00 00 6 00 00 2 00 00 0 04 13 None None None None None Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Min gt 34 00 00 Max lt 40 00 00 Engr Units ftin 16th Figure 5 18 Edit Tank Data window Alarms tab Edit Tank Data window Alarms tab GAUGE ALARMS This button opens the Global Alarm Definitions window allowing selection of the alarm definition to be associated with the tank point ALARM EVENT The Alarm Event category selection box allows selection CATEGORY of the appropriate pre defined alarm security category ALARM COLUMN This column displays the available tank alarms This column is for display only STATE COLUMN This column displays the current status of all available tank alarms In addition by clicking on the appropriate cell in this column you can change the state of the alarms Available states are Disabled Alarm limits are not clear
461. umber of Type in a number from 2 to 19 This option is also Columns available when creating a table 254 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas Summary report Setup window The Independent This option designates which tanks are to be displayed in Variable the report All Tanks Active Tanks Tank Mode is not stopped or Inactive Tanks Tank Mode is stopped Select Database Click Database to select which databases are to be System included in the report One or more databases can be selected Set table Sorting In the Set table Sorting Order section select an option to Order group Tank point entries The entries can be grouped alphabetically and numerically by database systems by products or both If both the system and products are selected the points are grouped by system with products nested inside each system Column Totals In the Column Totals section you selects how to display column totals of each numerical point variable The default setting is no totals If one or both of the table Sorting Grouping buttons are chosen you have the option of displaying the total for each product or database system If a total option is selected three rows appear in the table If the No Column Totals option is selected only two rows appear in the table Outline table Selecting the Draw Outline table checkbox displays a table outline when the report is printed or viewed in Operate
462. ume and vapor density at measured conditions Calculate total mass as liquid mass plus vapor mass Calculate weight from total mass and liquid density 220 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas 15 Display the required results Details for each step Step 1 The Liquid temperature and vapor temperatures should both be weighted averages to reflect the volume in each vertical section In the liquid phase there should be little temperature gradient and a single measurement should be adequate In the vapor phase a gradient may be more apparent and the average of the vapor temperature at the surface and at the top of the tank should be used Measured values H gauge reading of liquid level in mm TL average liquid temperature C TV average vapor temperature C P vapor space pressure in bar g Step 2 Density is to be input by the operator This should be the liquid density at 15 C and should be in units of kg m3 Input value DENL15 liquid density at 15 C kg m3 Step 3 Calculation of VCF and hence liquid density at tank conditions may be calculated as follows X DENL15 500 25 Yl 0 296 0 2395 x X 0 2449167 x X2 0 105 x X3 0 01658334 x X4 Y2 363 8 4 924927 x X 13 66258 x X2 6 375 x X3 1 087503 x X4 TR 288 2 Y2 TT 1 TR 1 3 vo 1 1 52816 x TT 1 43907 x TT2 0 81446 x TT3 0 190454 x TTA VD 0 296123 0 386914 x
463. ummary f aatan aa Wee Iv Use Movement History CIA iE mee Primary Primary C Test Test 10 ox o cm The Number of Monitors Detected is automatically populated from the graphics card Also the Resolution of each of the detected monitors is populated The Monitor 1 through Monitor 4 is a representation of each of the individual monitors and the order of precedence for each monitor You can designate one and only one monitor to be Primary Note The Primary monitor contains the alarm line and the navigation window panes Select the Use check box for each monitor that you want to enable The Test button allows you to check which monitor in your setup is Monitor 1 2 3 or 4 The Mode area allows you to select if the monitors display Separate screens or Conjoined screens which means all monitors act as one large monitor Note In Separate mode the Alarm Summary must be designated to a monitor that is in use Note If you select Conjoined the Monitor Setup area is unavailable In the Monitor Setup you can select a monitor number for each of the Operate displays Click OK when you have the multiple monitors configured Below is an example of a sepa rate multiple monitor setup 292 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil 8 Gas Multiple Monitor Examples Varec Inc 293 Configuring Multiple Monitors 294 Administrator Manual A Point Parameters This appendix describes
464. up the alarm limit condition s Refer to Working with Alarm Limits on page 59 for detailed instructions Note When building an alarm limit for an Alarm Template the Test Value must be entered as a percentage from 0 00 to 1 00 Enter the attributes such as Use Hysteresis and Reset Holdoff value To change how the conditions are displayed in this window change the setting under Dis play Style Varec Inc 51 Configuring Alarms and Events 9 Click the OK button The new Global Alarm or Alarm Template is ready to be assigned as you configure your system database See Assigning a Global Alarm to a Database Point on page 52 for instructions Editing a Global Alarm or Alarm Template Note If the Global Alarms window is opened during database edit only the Global Alarms or templates matching the selected point s data format are displayed 1 Open the Global Alarm Definitions window In the Used column template indicates an Alarm Template A number appearing in the Used column identifies the number of database points using the Global Alarm 2 Select a global alarm or alarm template and then click the Edit button The Define Global Alarm window appears Define Global Alarm Alarm Name Description Analog Alarm Template for Standard Analog Data Format Global Process Type Global Definition Select Undefined q Template Edit Test Condition ri e Alarm Reset Holdoff IV Use Hyst
465. uration of reports for the Web Server You can open Report Manager when you are logged on to the Report Manager server or remotely by using the server URL 1 2 Open Microsoft Internet Explorer In the Address box do one of the following If you are logged on to the server enter localhost reports The Report Manager opens showing the SQL Server Reporting Services home page If you are not logged on to the server you can administer the Report Server remotely by entering http servername reports Varec Inc 283 Configuring Web Server Reporting Zi Report Manager Microsoft Internet Explorer Co Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help GQ Back x z PA Search gt Favorites eN Media 42 a Address El http flocalhost reports Pages Folder aspx Go Links gt E New Folder New Data Source t Upload File Home My Subscriptions Site Settings Help SQL Server Reporting Services Search for Go Home Properties EF Show Details Ki Local intranet Figure 17 1 Report Manager Home page Create a Reports Directory in Reporting Services Reporting Services stores each report definition and data source in a a virtual directory that you define in Report Manager The FuelsManager Web Server refers to this directory to retrieve reports when they are requested 1 Connect to the Reporting Services Report Manager on the server hosting the Report
466. ure The date time and user name are not shown on the Alarm Line Varec Inc 49 Configuring Alarms and Events 8 Click OK 9 Close the Registry Editor Note Operate must be restarted for registry settings to take effect Working with Global Alarms and Alarm Templates This section provides the information that you need to create edit and use global alarms and alarm templates To learn more refer to the following list to find a specific procedure Open the list of global alarms and templates page 50 Create a global alarm or alarm template page 51 Edit a global alarm or alarm template page 52 Assign a global alarm to a database point page 53 Importing or exporting global alarms and templates page 53 Describes how you can import global alarms and alarm templates from a csv file and export them to a csv file To learn how to use an alarm template in a local alarm see Creating and Assigning a Local Alarm on page 54 To remove a global alarm from a database point see section on page 57 Understanding Global Alarms and Alarm Templates Global alarms are alarms that you can assign to more than one database point Each global alarm consists of one or more alarm limit conditions and each has a data format You can only assign a global alarm to database points with the same data format When you edit a global alarm the changes affect all assigned database points You can also use Global Alarms as a reference fo
467. ure with up to four levels The default and the most popular selection is three levels Caution Using the Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall your operating system Varec Inc cannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of the Registry Editor can be resolved Use the Registry Editor at your own risk Also a combined maximum of four bytes is available for the four database levels un BR N Note To have any effect this procedure must be executed before the FuelsManager data base is configured On the Windows Start menu click Run Type regedit in the Open field Click OK The Registry Editor window opens In the treeview select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Double click the following keys in sequence SOFTWARE gt FuelsManager gt DataManager gt Default Level The Default Level subkey contains the number of levels available and the field width of each level Database fields are arranged from broad Level X to specific Level 0 Unused database levels contain a 0 as the data value For example the illustration shows settings for a three level database Levels 0 1 and 2 are assigned values and the bFieldWidth_3 is assigned to 0 Assign a field width for each database level a Double click on the appropriate bFieldWidth_n subkey that you will use The DWORD editor window opens b Entera field width value up to a combined maximum of 4 bytes This is a hex
468. urposes FMSysConfig exe Used to rename a FuelsManager project that was developed on one machine name but needs to be transferred to a PC with a different name FMSysUpdate An offline utility used to upgrade FuelsManager database from previous versions to the current version 28 Administrator Manual FuelsManager Oil amp Gas ViewRTU The ViewRTU directory in FuelsManager serves as the installation directory of the ViewRTU software It includes all ViewRTU system files drivers and bitmaps Note Unless absolutely necessary it is recommended that you keep the default file direc tories This will assist Varec support staff in diagnosing any problems Setting up file directories 1 Bow From the Configuration window select System and click Startup Options Click the appropriate Browse button and navigate to the appropriate directory Repeat the previous step until all the fields contain the correct directory path details Click OK Defining System Resources Resources utilized by FuelsManager are defined in the system resources within the FuelsManager Configuration application Resources that can be defined are Products Products Strings Coded Variables Modifiers Help File Names Start Definitions Product specifications are created saved edited and deleted using the resources command in the FuelsManager Configuration application They are saved in the Product Index which can be acce
469. ust be in STANDBY or ACTIVE mode Opening Reports 1 From FuelsManager Configuration User Interface menu select the Create Reports com mand 2 The Report Editor window appears Exiting Reports 1 From the Report Editor window click File 2 Select Exit Predefined standard reports FuelsManager has provided several defined reports used to display standard tank information that reflect common facility needs These can be edited to conform to the facility or used as a guideline Note All of FuelsManager s standard reports are Summary reports These reports include the Inactive Tank Active Tank Operating Tank and Current Tank Inventory reports These standard reports are listed and described below Standard Report Description Inactive Tank Displays information about all inactive tanks in the Report system Varec Inc 251 Administering Reports Standard Report Description Active Tank Report Displays information about all active tanks in the system Operating Tank Report Lists all tanks known to the system Current Tank Inventory Report Groups the data by product Also displays level temperature gross volume net volume and remaining volume data Totals for gross volume net volume and remaining volume are given for each product Fa Fwe Manager Cosplay yew Ham y g 7 ien D EEC Tank C 7 Day Tank Change Report ATT
470. ve as the destinations for triggered points You can add edit and remove the source by clicking the appropriate button Adding or editing the source opens the Select Data Source window allowing you to define the sources of your data output point INPUT SOURCE A table listing the data source for the input point You can add edit and remove the input source bay clicking the appropriate button Adding or editing the source opens the Select Data Source window allowing you to define the source of data for the input output point Input points have only one Select button whereas Output points have two Select buttons one to define the destination for the output and one for the input source Varec Inc 81 Configuring Database Points Creating and Editing Tank Points General A Tank point includes predefined variables specifically designed for tank gauging applications such as tank level flow and temperature The Edit Tank Data window allows for specification of the Tank point attributes 1 Continued from the previous Step by Step instructions Creating Database Points 2 Toconfigure each parameter for a tank point work through the following sections that cor respond to the tab fields within the Edit Tank Data window Information Follow the steps below to fill out the General tab 1 Enter a description for the tank point 2 Leave the Detail field empty if you want to use FuelsManager s d
471. ver Understanding How Security is Implemented Web Interface Security When a User logs in to the Web Server Web Interface the following occurs 1 2 FuelsManager checks to ensure that the User name is valid for the login Site If the User is valid for the Site FuelsManager verifies that the password entered matches the User If the User s password is correct the Web Interface opens FuelsManager identifies the User Group s that the User belongs to and identifies the secu rity rights attached to the User Group s FuelsManager enables or disables features according to the security rights assigned to User s User Group s within the context of the login Site When the User seeks to view or edit information in the web interface the FuelsManager Web Server checks the User s User Group s to ensure that they have authorization to take that action Setting Up User Groups and Users Overview A Define a User Group for each User role Select the Security Rights and Companies appropriate for this group Add Users Identify which User Group s each User belongs to Note Refer to Task Overview Configuring the Web Server on page 269 Adding a User Group User Groups are categories that contain individual Users User Groups determine the security rights assigned to Users in the User Group Four User Groups are assigned to your Site by default Accountants Administrators Dispatchers and Operators You
472. w appears briefly indicating that the selected file is being imported To export a point file 1 In the Database Edit window click Export The Import Export Data Type window appears Enter a file name and select the directory Click OK ua BR N A window appears briefly indicating that the selected data type is being exported to the selected file Working with Alarm Limits An alarm limit defines a condition that must be met for an alarm to occur Global alarms alarm templates and local alarms are assembled using one or more alarm limits When you assign a global or local alarm to a database point the limits in the alarm are associated with the point Each time FuelsManager checks this point in the database it tests the condition specified in each alarm limit statement When any condition is met an alarm is generated Accessing Alarm Limits Before you can edit or build alarm limits you must open a global alarm template or local alarm as described in one of the following procedures To accessing alarm limits through a global alarm or template 1 Open the Global Alarm Definitions list as described in Assignments window as described on page 50 2 Click the New button or select a global alarm or template and then click the Edit button The Define Global Alarm window appears To accessing alarm limits through a local alarm 1 Open the Alarm Assignments window as described on page 54 2 Under Alarm Limits select
473. wing permissions must be granted Configure Leak Detection allows users to configure leak tests for tank points Run LeakManager Test allows operators to execute leak tests Note For more detailed instructions on Security please refer to the FuelsManager Security section of this manual Security Actions View WM Security E Categories i Groups E a Operator EE Administrator Access E Permissions Tag amp NewGroupt amp Users l Audit Elo Acknowledge Local Alarms Mai Acknowledge Remote Alarms Mat Global Silence Audible Mx Configure Historical Trends Masi configure Realtime Trends Mai Print Display Mati configure Macros Me Execute Macros May Add Database Points Mg i Edit Database Points Mati copy Database Points Mx I Rename Database Points Mia Delete Database Points Mak importiExport Elo Browse Database aid Setup Movements Maud configure Start Definitions Ms Execute Start Definitions Mak configure Movement View Mx Contigure LeakManager Els Run LeakManager Tests Varec Inc 183 Configuring Leak Detection ArchiveManager The ArchiveManager database is analyzed to calculate leak rates It is necessary to configure ArchiveManager to write all required data to the archive database ArchiveManager needs to be configured to include the following additional tank point variables Cathodic Protection Standard Density Date Installed Tank Gauge Typ
474. with the append will occur You can set appends to appear as visible buttons or you can make them invisible and use them with other graphic elements By placing an invisible append over a valve icon for example you can make something occur when the operator clicks on the picture of the valve in Operate You can also use appends to refer to a dynamic template graphic For example you may want to allow operators to obtain detailed information for any of the 50 valves in a refinery by clicking on a picture of a valve in the site graphic You can create one generic template graphic to show the valve information and then create an append for one of the valve points This can be done quickly by creating one append and then copying and modifying it for each valve When an operator clicks on one of the valves in Operate ofthese appends the template graphic will open to for the selected valve Refer to the following list to set up the appropriate append type For this action Use append type As Described on Issue a command such as opening or Command page 166 closing the valve Open a graphic in a tabbed window Graphic page 166 or in a separate floating window Open a floating graphic that closes Linked Graphic page 167 when the parent graphic closes Open a report Report page 167 Open text or Windows Help Help page 167 Display the Tank Detail for a selected Detail page 168 tank Open a template gra
475. ws Help file checkbox is cleared 7 Select a file from the list and click OK to return to the Append Attributes window 8 Click the OK button Creating a Detail append A Detail append button displays the Tank Detail for a selected tank when clicked This option button is used when more information relating to a tank needs to be displayed 1 Select the Append tool or select Add and click Append Click on area to define corner and hold down mouse button 2 Drag the cursor to define the size of the append and release the mouse button The Append Attributes window appears 3 To display the append as a visible button in your graphic click on the Button is visible under Style and then select a button color 4 Under Type select the Detail option 5 Under Database Point Data in the upper right corner of the window click the Select button The Select Database Point window appears 6 Select the appropriate database point and corresponding variable by clicking the Data base Point or Variable buttons Refer to the Values section for more information The tank point selected is the tank that will appear in the tank detail 7 Click the OK button 8 Click the OK button Creating a Template append A template append button opens a template graphic file for a specific database point This is the primary method for accessing template graphics for your site You can create multiple append buttons that point to a single templ
476. you want to change The selection is highlighted 2 Click Edit The Edit Variable window appears 3 Click Variables The Select Point Variable window appears 4 Select a point variable and click Select The system returns you to the Edit Variables window showing the Point you selected 5 Change the width and precision of the variable by entering them in the current entries 6 When you finish modifying the variable click OK The system saves your changes and returns you to the Archive Manager Configuration window Edit variable Variable Variables Precision 3 Figure 6 7 Edit Variable window Deleting point variables 1 In the Tank Point Variables display window in the Archive Manager Configuration window click on the variable entry you want to delete The selection is highlighted 2 Click Delete The system deletes the entry from the Tank Point Variables window After a variable has been added to the ArchiveManager configuration and you have confirmed the addition by clicking OK on the ArchiveManager Configuration window it cannot be deleted Varec Inc 115 Archiving Information Records ArchiveManager creates two records for each type of point selected one for data and the other for the description Data Records are updated at the selected interval and are subject to the Historical Period field and contain process data Description Records are only updated on change and are not subject to the Hi

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Guia do usuário de facsímile magicolor 2590MF  USBシリアル変換モジュール MM  MS150108/01D  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file